NT-0090 NT Graphics Builder

Ovation NT Graphics Builder User Guide

Section Title Page Summary of Changes

Section 1. Introduction

1-1. Overview...... 1-1 1-2. Contents of this Document ...... 1-2 1-3. Additional Reference Documentation...... 1-3

Section 2. Understanding GBNT

2-1. Section Overview ...... 2-1 2-2. Definitions of Terms...... 2-2 2-2.1. Outlining Rectangle ...... 2-2 2-2.2. Coordinates ...... 2-3 2-3. Licensing...... 2-10 2-4. Entering Process Point Names ...... 2-11 2-4.1. Valid Point Names ...... 2-11 2-4.2. Dummy Points ...... 2-13 2-4.3. Pointers ...... 2-14 2-4.4. Record Fields ...... 2-18 2-4.5. OPC Points...... 2-20 2-5. Comparing the Online and Offline GBNT ...... 2-22 2-5.1. Differences with Database Support ...... 2-22 2-5.2. OPC Point Browser Support ...... 2-23 2-5.3. Differences with File - New Function ...... 2-23 2-5.4. Differences with File - Open Function ...... 2-28 2-5.5. Differences with File - Compile Function ...... 2-31 2-5.6. Differences with File - Save/Save As Functions ...... 2-32 2-6. Introduction to the Main GBNT Window...... 2-33 2-6.1. Pull-Down Menu Panel ...... 2-35 2-6.2. Error Handling ...... 2-40 2-7. GBNT Toolbars ...... 2-41 2-7.1. Main Window Toolbars ...... 2-42 2-8. Keyboard Shortcuts...... 2-46 2-9. Using GBNT Online Help ...... 2-49 2-9.1. Help Search Methods...... 2-51 2-9.2. Help Menu Icons ...... 2-54

11/01 1 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C Table of Contents, Cont’d

Section Title Page Section 3. Loading, Saving, and Conﬁguring Graphics

3-1. Section Overview ...... 3-1 3-2. File Menu Options ...... 3-3 3-2.1. Displaying a New Graphic...... 3-4 3-2.2. Opening a Graphic ...... 3-4 3-2.3. Saving a Graphic ...... 3-6 3-2.4. Printing...... 3-9 3-2.5. Restoring the Original Diagram...... 3-11 3-2.6. Compiling Graphics...... 3-11 3-2.7. Exit...... 3-14 3-3. View Menu Options ...... 3-15 3-3.1. Toolbars ...... 3-16 3-3.2. Diagram Configuration ...... 3-16 3-3.3. Integrated Source ...... 3-21 3-3.4. Generic Text Editor ...... 3-22 3-3.5. Shape Library...... 3-25 3-3.6. Zoom ...... 3-26 3-3.7. Keyboard Repaint Order ...... 3-35 3-3.8. Handle/Drag Color...... 3-35 3-3.9. Coordinate Display ...... 3-37 3-3.10. Grid ...... 3-37 3-3.11. Grid Options...... 3-39 3-3.12. Save Defaults ...... 3-41 3-3.13. Browse OPC Points ...... 3-41 3-4. Configuring Options Menu Items ...... 3-45 3-4.1. Resize Pin Point ...... 3-46 3-4.2. Resize Aspect Ratio ...... 3-46 3-4.3. Resize Scale Factors ...... 3-46 3-4.4. Drag/Draw Constraint ...... 3-48 3-4.5. Multi-draw Mode...... 3-49 3-4.6. Undefined Points ...... 3-50 3-4.7. Undefined Points Warning...... 3-52 3-4.8. AutoSave ...... 3-52 3-4.9. AutoSave Frequency ...... 3-53 3-4.10. Conditional Word Wrap...... 3-54 3-4.11. Macro notes and Parameter Descriptions ...... 3-55 3-4.12. Undefined Description Warnings ...... 3-55

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 2 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C Table of Contents, Cont’d

Section Title Page Section 4. Drawing Graphics

4-1. Section Overview ...... 4-1 4-2. Setting Drawing Attributes ...... 4-2 4-2.1. Drawing Attributes Toolbar Elements...... 4-2 4-2.2. Defining Place ...... 4-4 4-2.3. Setting Color ...... 4-7 4-2.4. Setting Font Attributes...... 4-17 4-2.5. Setting Fill Attributes...... 4-23 4-2.6. Setting Line Patterns ...... 4-24 4-2.7. Setting Line Width...... 4-26 4-2.8. Setting Blink ...... 4-28 4-3. Draw Button Reference List for Background, Foreground, and Trigger Items . . . 4-30 4-4. Arc...... 4-32 4-5. Rubberband Line/Arc ...... 4-35 4-6. Line ...... 4-36 4-7. Rubberband Line...... 4-39 4-8. Circle...... 4-40 4-9. Ellipse ...... 4-41 4-10. Polygon ...... 4-42 4-11. Rectangle...... 4-45 4-12. Dot...... 4-46 4-13. OL Rectangle ...... 4-47 4-14. OL Gauge ...... 4-49 4-15. OL Cylinder ...... 4-52 4-16. Bar...... 4-55 4-17. Plot ...... 4-58 4-18. XY Plot ...... 4-62 4-19. Dynamic Line/Polygon ...... 4-67 4-20. Trend...... 4-72 4-21. Time ...... 4-75 4-22. Date...... 4-77 4-23. Point Group Text...... 4-80 4-24. Process Point...... 4-83 4-25. Text ...... 4-88 4-25.1. Single Text...... 4-89 4-25.2. Multiple Text ...... 4-92 4-25.3. Text Groups ...... 4-95 4-26. Shape...... 4-98

11/01 3 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C Table of Contents, Cont’d

Section Title Page Section 4. Drawing Graphics (Cont’d)

4-27. Macro ...... 4-102 4-27.1. Overview ...... 4-102 4-27.2. Naming Macros ...... 4-102 4-27.3. Macro Rules...... 4-104 4-27.4. Tagging Macro Parameters to be Substituted in the Macro File ...... 4-105 4-27.5. Creating and Editing Macros ...... 4-111 4-28. Macro Notes/Parameters Description ...... 4-118 4-29. Draw Button Reference List for Keyboard Items...... 4-122 4-30. Poke Field ...... 4-123 4-30.1. Process Point (0) Poke Field ...... 4-125 4-30.2. Diagram/Group (2) Poke Field ...... 4-126 4-30.3. Program (3) Poke Field ...... 4-127 4-30.4. Ladder (6) Poke Field ...... 4-128 4-30.5. Options (7) Poke Field...... 4-128 4-30.6. Window (8) Poke Field ...... 4-131 4-30.7. Application (9) Poke Field...... 4-132 4-30.8. Help (20) Poke Field ...... 4-133 4-30.9. Control (23) Poke Field ...... 4-134 4-31. Entry Field ...... 4-138 4-32. OL Slider...... 4-141 4-33. OL Check Box ...... 4-145 4-34. OL Choice...... 4-150 4-35. OL Button ...... 4-155 4-36. OL Event Menu...... 4-160 4-37. Function Key...... 4-164

Section 5. Editing Graphics

5-1. Section Overview ...... 5-1 5-2. Working with Selected Items and Groups ...... 5-2 5-2.1. Selecting and Deselecting Items ...... 5-3 5-2.2. Selecting Overlaid Items ...... 5-7 5-2.3. Grouping and Ungrouping Items ...... 5-7 5-2.4. Moving an Item or Group ...... 5-9 5-2.5. Resizing an Item or Group...... 5-11 5-2.6. Resizing an Item or Group by a Factor ...... 5-13 5-2.7. Rotating and Inverting Items and Groups ...... 5-14 5-2.8. Deleting Items and Groups ...... 5-15 5-2.9. Copying and Pasting Items and Groups...... 5-15

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C Table of Contents, Cont’d

Section Title Page Section 5. Editing Graphics (Cont’d)

5-3. Editing Attributes ...... 5-20 5-3.1. Display Attributes and Parameters for Editing ...... 5-20 5-3.2. Changing Attributes...... 5-21 5-4. Editing Vertices ...... 5-22 5-4.1. Entering Vertex Edit Mode ...... 5-23 5-4.2. Selecting a New Item for Vertex Edit ...... 5-25 5-4.3. Selecting a Target Item for Vertex Edit...... 5-25 5-4.4. Selecting a New Target Item ...... 5-27 5-4.5. Moving a Vertex ...... 5-27 5-4.6. Adding a Vertex...... 5-27 5-4.7. Deleting a Vertex ...... 5-30 5-4.8. Align X Coordinate of a Vertex...... 5-32 5-4.9. Align Y Coordinate of a Vertex...... 5-34 5-4.10. Snapping One Vertex to Another...... 5-36 5-4.11. Forcing Horizontal/Vertical Movement of Vertices ...... 5-39 5-4.12. Undoing the last edit in Vertex Edit Mode ...... 5-39 5-4.13. Exiting Vertex Edit Mode ...... 5-40 5-5. Using the Snap to Grid Option ...... 5-41 5-6. Undoing and Redoing the Last Edit ...... 5-42 5-7. Aligning/Equi-Spacing Items and Groups ...... 5-43 5-7.1. Center (x And y) ...... 5-44 5-7.2. Center (x only) ...... 5-47 5-7.3. Left Justification ...... 5-49 5-7.4. Right Justification ...... 5-51 5-7.5. Center (y only) ...... 5-53 5-7.6. Top Justification...... 5-56 5-7.7. Bottom Justification...... 5-58 5-7.8. Align origin x...... 5-60 5-7.9. Align origin y...... 5-60 5-7.10. Horizontal Spacing...... 5-61 5-7.11. Vertical Spacing...... 5-66 5-8. Object-to-object Snap ...... 5-70

11/01 5 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C Table of Contents, Cont’d

Section Title Page Section 6. Using the Shape Library

6-1. Section Overview ...... 6-1 6-2. General Shape Information...... 6-2 6-3. Creating Shapes ...... 6-4 6-4. Editing Shapes ...... 6-9 6-4.1. Renaming a Shape ...... 6-10 6-4.2. Changing the Origin of a Shape...... 6-11 6-5. Deleting Shapes ...... 6-13

Section 7. Using the Integrated Source Editor

7-1. Section Overview ...... 7-1 7-2. Introduction to the Integrated Source Editor ...... 7-2 7-2.1. Pull-Down Menu Panel ...... 7-4 7-2.2. Toolbar...... 7-6 7-2.3. Keyboard Shortcuts ...... 7-7 7-2.4. Terms Relating to the Integrated Source Editor ...... 7-8 7-3. Creating and Editing Source Commands ...... 7-10 7-3.1. Adding New Commands ...... 7-11 7-3.2. Adding Lines within a Command ...... 7-15 7-3.3. Editing Commands ...... 7-19 7-3.4. Defining Blocks ...... 7-20 7-3.5. Deleting Text ...... 7-21 7-3.6. Undoing the Last Edit ...... 7-22 7-3.7. Commenting/Uncommenting Commands ...... 7-23 7-4. Moving Text ...... 7-24 7-4.1. Moving Commands — Before...... 7-24 7-4.2. Moving Commands — After ...... 7-26 7-4.3. Moving Blocks — Before ...... 7-27 7-4.4. Moving Blocks — After ...... 7-28 7-5. Copying Text ...... 7-29 7-5.1. Copying Commands — Before ...... 7-29 7-5.2. Copying Commands — After ...... 7-31 7-5.3. Copying Blocks — Before...... 7-32 7-5.4. Copying Blocks — After ...... 7-33 7-6. Printing the Source File ...... 7-34 7-7. Using the Find/Replace Function ...... 7-36

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 6 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C Table of Contents, Cont’d

Section Title Page Appendix A. Custom Files

A-1. Overview...... A-1 A-2. Defining Custom Files ...... A-2 A-3. Editing the Custom Colors File ...... A-3 A-3.1. File Description ...... A-3 A-4. Editing the Custom Font Sizes File ...... A-5 A-4.1. File Description ...... A-5 A-5. Editing the Custom Fill Patterns File ...... A-6 A-5.1. File Description ...... A-6 A-5.2. Procedure ...... A-7 A-6. Creating Custom Line Patterns ...... A-12 A-6.1. File Description ...... A-12 A-6.2. Procedures ...... A-13 A-7. Creating Custom Diagram Background Bitmaps ...... A-18

Appendix B. Troubleshooting

B-1. Overview...... B-1 B-2. Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) ...... B-2

Appendix C. Shape Library Source File

C-1. Overview...... C-1 C-2. Format of Shape Library Source File ...... C-3 C-3. ARC ...... C-5 C-4. DEF_SHAPE ...... C-6 C-5. DOT ...... C-7 C-6. ELLIPSE...... C-8 C-7. END_SHAPE ...... C-9 C-8. LINE ...... C-10 C-9. POLYGON ...... C-11 C-10. RECTANGLE...... C-12 C-11. SHAPELIB ...... C-13 C-12. Source File Errors ...... C-14

11/01 7 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C Table of Contents, Cont’d

Section Title Page Appendix D. Importing Graphics

D-1. Overview...... D-1 D-2. Before Getting Started ...... D-2 D-3. Accessing the Import Graphics Window ...... D-4 D-4. Importing All or Part of a Graphics System ...... D-5

Glossary

Index

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 8 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C Summary of Changes

This revision of “Ovation NT Graphics Builder User Guide” (NT-0090) has been updated with new and corrected information. Some of the changes include the following: ¥ Section 2 now provides information on process point names, pointers, record fields, and OPC points. ¥ Online Help has been added and is discussed in Section 2. ¥ Section 3 discusses the Browse OPC Points function, which is available in the online version of GBNT. ¥ Section 4 discusses the new Macro Notes & Parameter Descriptions function. This section was also updated to include the $COLORn and $OL_COLORn parameters now available in the Color and Macro functions. ¥ The colors.txt file was changed to allow the user to define unlimited custom colors instead of just 233. ¥ A new section, Appendix B, has been added to address frequently asked questions regarding the differences between GBNT and UNIX GB.

The information that was previously found in Appendix B (Using Macros) has been added to Section 4.

All sections include additional miscellaneous clariﬁcations and corrections.

11/01 Changes-1 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C Section 1. Introduction

1-1. Overview

This document describes the procedures for creating and editing process graphics using the Ovation NT Graphics Builder (GBNT).

GBNT resides on the Ovation NT Developer Studio and is used to develop the process diagrams that are displayed on the Ovation NT Operator Station. These process diagrams are software programs which display graphical images that represent actual plant process control equipment.

Two diagram ﬁles (source and object) are created and edited within GBNT. The source (.src) format is a readable ASCII representation of the diagram which adheres to the syntax of the graphics language. The object (.diag) format is the corresponding “executable” diagram ﬁle that is displayed at the Ovation NT Operator Station.

GBNT can be run online from within the Ovation Developer Studio, or it can be run offline as a standalone program. GBNT will only communicate with the database when it is running online; thus, all point names are interpreted as dummy points when running offline. If working offline, an import utility is used to import/merge graphics, macros, bitmap files, shapes, custom colors, custom line patterns, and custom fill patterns into the Ovation Developer Studio environment.

Section 2 discusses the differences between online and ofﬂine GBNT. For purposes of clarity and simplicity, the examples in this manual show the ofﬂine GBNT program.

11/01 1-1 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 1-2. Contents of this Document

1-2. Contents of this Document

This document is organized into the following sections:

Section 1. Introduction describes the organization of the manual and provides a list of additional reference documents.

Section 2. Understanding GBNT discusses the procedures for accessing GBNT (online and ofﬂine) and introduces the user to its menus and windows.

Section 3. Loading, Saving, and Configuring Graphics discusses loading, saving, and compiling ﬁles and conﬁguring diagram variables.

Section 4. Drawing Graphics describes the procedures for drawing graphics and setting the attribute options.

Section 5. Editing Graphics discusses editing graphics, editing vertices, working with selected items and groups, and aligning draw items.

Section 6. Using the Shape Library discusses creating, editing, and deleting shapes in the Shape Library.

Section 7. Using the Integrated Source Editor provides information on creating and editing source commands, using the integrated source editor. For more information on the graphics language commands, see “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091).

Appendix A. Custom Files describes the required conﬁguration ﬁles for custom colors, fonts, and line patterns.

Appendix B. Troubleshooting discusses frequently asked questions regarding the NT Graphics Builder versus the UNIX Graphics Builder.

Appendix C. Shape Library Source File provides information on using the Shape Library source ﬁle.

Appendix D. Importing Graphics provides information on using the Ovation NT Developer Studio Import Graphics program. See “Ovation NT Developer Studio User Guide” (NT-0060).

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 1-2 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 1-3. Additional Reference Documentation

1-3. Additional Reference Documentation

Table 1-1 lists additional reference documentation which may be helpful while using this manual.

Table 1-1. Reference Documentation Document Number Title Description NT-0020 Ovation NT Operator Describes the uses and subsystems of the Ovation Station User’s Guide Operator Station drop. (for use with NT systems) NT-0060 Ovation NT Developer Provides information on configuration, creating Studio User’s Guide points, and security. NT-0091 Ovation NT Graphics Describes the graphics language commands used Language Reference in the source editor. Manual R3-1140 Ovation Record Types Provides information on process points and record Reference Manual fields. R3-1145 Error Codes and Messages Lists and describes the error codes and messages incorporated in the Ovation system.

In addition to the documents listed in Table 1-1, this manual may refer to “applicable vendor documentation”, which is deﬁned on a project basis. These documents may include: • Operating system (Microsoft Windows NTTM) manuals. • Peripheral device documentation.

11/01 1-3 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C Section 2. Understanding GBNT

2-1. Section Overview

This section defines terms that are specific to GBNT and introduces the user to its menus and toolbars. The following topics are included in this section: • Definitions of terms (Section 2-2). • Licensing (Section 2-3). • Entering process point names (Section 2-4). • Comparing the Online and Offline GBNT (Section 2-5). • Introduction to the main GBNT window (Section 2-6). • GBNT Toolbars (Section 2-7). • Keyboard shortcuts (Section 2-8). • Using GBNT Online Help (Section 2-9).

11/01 2-1 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-2. Deﬁnitions of Terms

2-2. Deﬁnitions of Terms

This document assumes that the user is already familiar with certain operating system and window manager terms. Before beginning to use GBNT, it may be helpful to refer to the applicable operating system and window manager documentation.

2-2.1. Outlining Rectangle

The outlining rectangle is the smallest rectangle that could be drawn around an item that includes every point on the item. An outlining rectangle surrounds every draw item on the GBNT:Draw toolbar (see Section 4 for more information on this toolbar). When an item is selected on the drawing canvas, eight handles appear around the item as shown below:

If a line were drawn to connect these handles, it would represent the outlining rectangle around the item.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 2-2 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-2. Deﬁnitions of Terms

2-2.2. Coordinates

GBNT uses two types of coordinates to specify x and y locations and widths and heights. An explanation of each follows:

Screen Coordinates — Screen coordinates are used to deﬁne the location/size of the diagram windows displayed on the Ovation NT Operator Station monitor screen (DIAGRAM and DIAG_DISP commands). They are also used to specify the spacing between strings for the MULTI_TEXT command. Screen coordinates are classic pixels.

Screen coordinates are deﬁned by the pixel resolution of the CRT monitor screen. These coordinates are used in conjunction with the DIAGRAM, DIAG_DISP, and MULTI_TEXT commands only (see “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for more information on these commands).

Virtual Coordinates — Virtual coordinates deﬁne the drawing surface of a diagram. The drawing surface is deﬁned to be 16,384 x 16,384 pixels. Therefore, the virtual coordinate range is 0 through 16,383 and 0 through 16,383 where 0, 0 is the upper left corner of the diagram, and 16,383, 16,383 is the lower right corner of the diagram. All of the graphics commands which draw items on the diagram (ARC, CIRCLE, BAR, LINE, and so forth), specify x, y, w, h parameters in terms of virtual coordinates (see “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for more information on these commands).

Virtual coordinates are required to implement software pan and zoom. For example, since it is not possible to display a diagram that is 16,384 x 16,384 pixels on a CRT screen which is only 1,152 x 900 pixels, virtual coordinates are mapped (scaled) to screen coordinates when items are displayed on the drawing surface. The current zoom level determines the number of virtual pixels which map to a single screen pixel. As the user zooms in further, the number of virtual pixels mapping to a single pixel decreases until one virtual pixel maps to one screen pixel.

Two types of virtual coordinates are supported: • Absolute. • Relative. Absolute virtual coordinates specify a virtual offset from 0, 0 (upper left corner of the diagram). Relative virtual coordinates specify a virtual offset from the previous display item (circle, bar, text, rectangle, and so forth), or from 0, 0 if there is no previous item in the diagram section. Absolute virtual coordinates are speciﬁed as 0 through 16,383. Relative virtual coordinates are speciﬁed as -16,383 through 16,383. Note that relative coordinates must be enclosed in brackets.

11/01 2-3 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-2. Deﬁnitions of Terms

Refer to the examples below:

Example 1: Rectangle speciﬁed with absolute virtual coordinates:

RECTANGLE 4000 4000 6000 2000 1 solid solid

Example 2: Rectangle speciﬁed with relative virtual coordinates:

RECTANGLE [-1000] [3000] 6000 2000 1 solid solid

For this example, the source line in Example 2 immediately follows the source line in Example 1, as shown below:

BACKGROUND

COLOR FG RED

LINE 1000 2000 5000 5000 9000 2000 1 solid

RECTANGLE 4000 4000 6000 2000 1 solid solid

RECTANGLE [-1000] [3000] 6000 2000 1 solid solid

In the example, the second rectangle would be relative to the first rectangle. The second rectangle would be 1,000 pixels left of the first, and 3,000 pixels below the first rectangle. If the user interactively moves the first rectangle, the position of the second automatically shifts also. If the user deletes the first rectangle, the second rectangle becomes relative to the line. If the user then deletes the line, the second rectangle becomes relative to 0, 0. If the user then adds a new item after the color command, the rectangle becomes relative to the new item.

For those commands that have more than one x, y coordinate pair (LINE and POLYGON), only the first x, y coordinate pair is relative to the previous display item. If relative coordinates are specified for any other x, y pair (not the first pair), those relative coordinates are relative to the previous coordinate pair. See example below:

LINE 1000 2000 [5000] [5000] 9000 2000 1 solid

In the example above, the relative coordinates [5000] [5000] are relative to the previous coordinate pair (1000, 2000).

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 2-4 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-2. Deﬁnitions of Terms

The following rules apply to relative coordinates:

1. Items can only be deﬁned with relative coordinates through the source editors (integrated source editor or generic source editor). (See Section 3 for information on the generic source editor, and see Section 7 for information on the GBNT:Integrated Source Editor.) The user cannot interactively drawitems with relative coordinates. The user may interactively draw items and then change to relative coordinates by editing the command in the source editor. Once the item is created with relative coordinates, it may be edited (moved, copied, resized, rotated, inverted, and/or deleted) through the main GBNT window.

2. Items speciﬁed with relative coordinates cannot be interactively grouped, and their Place cannot be changed.

3. Relative coordinates can only be used to specify the x, y position of display items. Relative coordinates cannot be used to specify size (width and height). The user may specify x and y coordinates independently (x may be absolute and y may be relative). Commands with multiple x, y pairs (LINE and POLYGON) may specify any number of coordinates as relative; only the x, y position of the DYNAMIC_LINE and DYNAMIC_POLYGON may be relative (not the individual x, y coordinates).

4. Relative coordinates may only be used to specify the position of the following commands: ARC, BAR, CIRCLE, DATE, DOT, DYNAMIC_LINE, DYNAMIC_POLYGON, ELLIPSE, GTEXT, LINE, MULTI_TEXT, OL_CYLINDER, OL_GAUGE, OL_RECTANGLE, PLOT, POLYGON, PROCESS PT, RECTANGLE, SHAPE, TEXT, TIME, TREND, and XY_PLOT. See the examples below:

ARC [222] [3333] 1989 9999 123 -220 1 solid unfilled

BAR [2222] [3434] 1377 2401 up A100 AV 2 22

CIRCLE [1222] [1111] 898 1 solid unfilled

DATE [999] [233] 1 vector 207 944 1

DOT [444] [555] large

DYNAMIC_LINE [1000] [4000] 2342 1078 0 100 0 100 NOT_FITTED NOSCALE 1 2 \A100\ AV 50 \A200 \ AV 50 1 solid

DYNAMIC_POLYGON [1000] [4000] 3770 2412 \A100\ LL \A100\ HL \A200\ LL \A200\ HL 5 4 12.45 \A200\ AV \A100\ HL 0 20 \A200\ AV 100 \A200\ HL 3 dashed unfilled

ELLIPSE [2323] [1212] 7776 7677 1 solid unfilled

11/01 2-5 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-2. Deﬁnitions of Terms

GTEXT [233] [985] 1 7 horz vector 207 944 1

LINE [111] [2222] [3333] [3434] [3432] [1212] 1 solid

MULTI_TEXT [2000] [2000] 0 0 3 “string1” “string2” “string3” VECTOR 140 257 1

OL_CYLINDER [1000] [-2000] 1000 4000 A100 AV A100 ll a100 HL

OL_GAUGE [-3000] [0] 2000 550 LEFT A100 AV 0 100

OL_RECTANLGE [1234] [5678] 2500 2500 INVOKED

PLOT [222] [3333] 1234 8765 up A100 AV 2 33

POLYGON [2322] [6565] [4545] [5656] [3333] [2323] [454] [233] 1 solid unfilled

PROCESS_PT [2323] [2222] 10 -1 right0 on horz vector 207 944 1 A100 AV

RECTANGLE [2222] [6778] 232 999 1 solid unfilled

SHAPE [222] [3333] 1260 3434 tmp 0 none

TEXT [333] [232] “help” horz vector 207 944 1

TIME [333] [323] 1 vector 207 944 1

TREND [3456] [233] 2865 7654 horz A100 AV 2 33 10 60 scale

XY_PLOT [2222] [3333] 1234 7654 A100 AV 2 44 A200 AV 3 44 scale

5. Items defined with relative coordinates are relative to the previous item. The point on the previous item to which an item is relative depends on the previous item. This point is defined as the origin. For example, the origin of a circle is the center. If a rectangle was specified to be relative to the circle, then the rectangle would be relative to the x, y point at the center of the circle. The origin for each draw item is listed in Table 2-1.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 2-6 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-2. Deﬁnitions of Terms

Table 2-1. Origin by Draw Item Draw Item Relative Origin Arc Starting point of the arc. Bar Upper left corner (down, right or bias). Lower left corner (up). Upper right corner (left). Circle Center. Date Baseline position of the first character of the text string (for bitmap and bitmap_over text). Upper left corner of the outlining rectangle of the text string (for vector and vector_over text). Dot x, y position. Dynamic_line Lower left corner of the outlining rectangle. Dynamic_polygon Lower left corner of the outlining rectangle. Ellipse Center. Entry Field Baseline position of the first character of the text string (for bitmap and bitmap_over text). Upper left corner of the outlining rectangle of the text string (for vector and vector_over text). Gtext Baseline position of the first character of the text string (for bitmap and bitmap_over text). Upper left corner of the outlining rectangle of the text string (for vector and vector_over text). Line First x, y coordinate of the line. Macro Upper left corner of macro outlining rectangle. Multi_text Baseline position of the ﬁrst character of the ﬁrst text string (for bitmap and bitmap_over text). Upper left corner of the outlining rectangle of the entire item (for vector and vector_over text). OL Button Upper left corner of button outlining rectangle (x, y from command syntax).

11/01 2-7 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-2. Deﬁnitions of Terms

Table 2-1. Origin by Draw Item (Cont’d) Draw Item Relative Origin OL Checkbox Upper left corner of checkbox outlining rectangle (x, y from command syntax). OL Choice Upper left corner of choice (x, y from command syntax). OL Cylinder Upper left corner of cylinder outlining rectangle (x, y from command syntax). OL Event Menu Upper left corner of event menu (x, y from command syntax). OL Gauge Upper left corner of gauge outlining rectangle (x, y from command syntax). OL Rectangle Upper left corner (x, y from command syntax). OL Slider Upper left corner of slider outlining rectangle (x, y from command syntax). Plot Top of plot line (down) Bottom of plot line (up) Left end of plot line (right) Right end of plot line (left) Poke Field Upper left corner of poke field. Polygon First x, y coordinate of the polygon. Process Point Baseline position of the first character of the text string (for bitmap and bitmap_over text). Upper left corner of the outlining rectangle of the text string (for vector and vector_over text). Rectangle Upper left corner. Shape Defined origin.

Text Baseline position of the first character of the text string (for bitmap and bitmap_over text). Upper left corner of the outlining rectangle of the text string (for vector and vector_over).

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 2-8 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-2. Deﬁnitions of Terms

Table 2-1. Origin by Draw Item (Cont’d) Draw Item Relative Origin Time Baseline position of the first character of the text string (for bitmap text). Upper left corner of the first character of the text string (for vector). Trend Lower right corner (for horizontal). Upper right corner (for vertical). XY Plot Lower left corner.

Note

The origin of a group is deﬁned as the upper left corner of the group’s outlining rectangle.

11/01 2-9 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-3. Licensing

2-3. Licensing

The GBNT application must be assigned a license key. When GBNT is initially loaded, a trial license is given. After the end of the trial license period, if the user tries to access GBNT without obtaining a regular license, a notice window will appear, and GBNT will not display.

To obtain a license key, the user must contact the Software Licensing Coordinator at WPC. For information on setting up the license information through the License Manager, see “Ovation NT Developer Studio User’s Guide” (NT-0060).

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 2-10 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-4. Entering Process Point Names

2-4. Entering Process Point Names

Point record information is required in many GBNT windows (GBNT:Bar, GBNT:Process Point, GBNT:Poke, and so forth) and also in the integrated source editor window. This section deﬁnes the valid point names and record ﬁelds that can be used. For more information on points, see “Ovation NT Developer Studio User’s Guide” (NT-0060) and “Ovation Record Types Reference Manual” (R3-1140).

Valid point names in the graphics language consist of the following: • Process point names defined in the Point Builder (see “Ovation NT Developer Studio” (NT-0060) for more information). See Section 2-4.1 on valid point names. • Dummy points (Section 2-4.2). • $Pointer variables ($P, $G, $H, $W, and $D) (Section 2-4.3). • Record fields (Section 2-4.4). • OPC points (Section 2-4.5). All of the above types of points can be used in graphics commands wherever point names (or point name and record field pairs) are used.

2-4.1. Valid Point Names

A fully qualiﬁed point name in the Ovation system uses the following format:

“name.unit@network”

This fully qualiﬁed name consists of three parameters: • A 16-character maximum point name. • A six-character maximum unit name. • An eight-character maximum network name. In addition to the above parameters, the “.” and “@” are required and are reserved characters. Therefore, the maximum number of characters in a fully qualiﬁed point name is 32.

11/01 2-11 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-4. Entering Process Point Names

Characters in the name portion may be any combination of alphabetic, numeric (0 - 9), or special punctuation characters. The only characters that are not allowed in the name: *, , @, ., %, $, ~, \, “, ‘, comma, space. Note that the “.” and “@” are part of a fully qualified point name, but are not allowed in the name portion of the fully qualified point name. The name portion cannot be a reserved graphic word (for example: RECTANGLE, COLOR, UP, HORZ, and so forth; see “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual (NT-0091) for more information). The unit and network portions of the fully qualified name are composed of alphanumeric characters only.

Point names are not case sensitive. That is, “Testai01.unit1@wdpf” is the same as “TESTAI01.UNIT1@WDPF”.

Fully qualiﬁed point names must be delimited by backslashes (\) when used in graphics since the “.” and “@” characters are not alphanumerics. Any point name that includes a non-alphanumeric character or that does not begin with an alpha (A - Z) character must be delimited by backslashes in a graphic. For example, you must enter “\Testai01.unit1@wdpf\” for a point name instead of “Testai01.unit1@wdpf”.

GBNT automatically delimits all point names (except the $pointer variables) with backslashes when it generates the associated source command when the user interactively edits an item on a graphic — whether the user delimited the point name on the associated dialog or not. GBNT also automatically delimits point names with backslashes before displaying them in the associated dialog entry ﬁelds when the user does a Properties function (see Section 5) on a selected item on the graphic. Users are encouraged to always delimit point names (other than the $pointer variables) with backslashes in their graphics.

Notes

1. The backslash characters are NOT included in the characters making up the point name. 2. There is no space between the backslashes and the point name characters. Database point names are not required to be fully qualified in a graphic. If a given point name is unique in your database, you do not need to append the unit name and network name. However, if a point name exists in the database in multiple units or multiple networks, it would be necessary to fully qualify the point name to avoid confusion. It is recommended to always fully qualify point names to prevent future ambiguity if a point having the same name is later added to the database. Note that a point name is either fully qualified or not qualified at all. It is never valid to qualify a point name with just the unit or just the network. You must qualify a point name with both a unit and a network name.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 2-12 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-4. Entering Process Point Names

2-4.2. Dummy Points

Dummy points are valid point names that do not exist in the Ovation database (see “Ovation NT Developer Studio” (NT-0060) for a definition of a valid point name). These may be fully qualified with a unit and network name, or they may be unqualified. If the dummy point name does not begin with an alphabetic character, or if it contains any characters other than alphanumerics, it must be delimited with backslashes. If it is a fully qualified name, it must be delimited with backslashes.

Dummy points are used to enable a diagram to be compiled and displayed before the points are added to the Ovation database. When dummy points are displayed in a diagram, they are inactive and have no value. Therefore, ﬁnal testing of the diagram cannot take place until the dummy points are added to the Ovation database, and the diagram is recompiled and redisplayed. All dummy points should be resolved into database points before the diagram is executed at runtime.

Dummy points have no point type associated with them. Since they have no type, some of the error checking that is performed for points in the Ovation database cannot be performed for dummy points. Therefore, when dummy points are added to the Ovation database and the diagram is recompiled, there may be errors that were not detected previously. These errors are caused by the point type assigned to the formerly “typeless” point. To minimize these errors, the user should note the point type that will be assigned to the dummy point, and write the source code as if the dummy point actually has this type.

When a file containing dummy points is loaded and/or saved, the NT Graphics Builder (GBNT) may display a warning message saying that undefined points exist in the diagram. This is not done automatically. The user must chose to be warned of undefined points by configuring the Undefined Points Warning function (see Section 3) for more information). A list showing all the dummy points used in the diagram is then displayed. Checking this list is important because misspellings and invalid identifiers may be interpreted as dummy points by the graphics language.

For example, operands in a conditional statement may be any of the following types: integer, real constant, point name/record field, pointer/offset, or status identifier. An invalid status identifier (such as OFF32) would be handled as a dummy point named OFF32 (see “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for more information on status words). Therefore, unintended dummy points in the list indicate errors in the diagram.

11/01 2-13 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-4. Entering Process Point Names

2-4.3. Pointers

The Graphics Language recognizes the following valid pointers: $P, $G, $H, $W, $O, and $D. Pointers are used as a means of passing data into a diagram. The $W and $D pointers are used as parameters to the diagram. Actual process point names will be passed for these pointer variables before the diagram displays at runtime. $G pointers reference points defined externally to the diagram in the system group library file. $P and $H pointers reference a segment offset in the computer memory in the Operator Station. Pointers are identified by a dollar sign ($).

$P Pointers

The “$P” pointers (valid range = $P1 through $P99) point to locations in memory segments. A maximum of 99 $P pointer variables can be deﬁned in a graphic. $P pointer variables must be initialized to an existing segment and offset in memory using the POINTER command or the PTR_EQUAL command see “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for information on these commands). Data may be passed between graphics using these pointer variables. For example, an area of computer memory is reserved in the Operator Station to store data received from another drop (such as general message data). Using $P pointer variables allows the user to access and display this data by setting a pointer to begin at a speciﬁed segment and offset within the reserved area.

$P variables cannot be combined with the standard two-character ASCII record fields (for example: AV,RS, 1W, and so forth) in the source syntax since $P pointers do not represent actual process points in the database. Instead, $P pointer variables have an associated $offset notation. The valid $offsets for $P pointers are defined below: • $In — represents a 32-bit integer beginning at an offset of n bytes from the associated $P pointer location initialized by the POINTER or PTR_EQUAL command. The “n” must be a multiple of 4 (for example: $I0, $I4, $I8, $I12, and so forth). • $Rn — represents a 32-bit floating point real number beginning at an offset of n bytes from the associated $P pointer location initialized by the POINTER or PTR_EQUAL command. The “n” must be a multiple of 4 (for example: $R0, $R4, $R8, $R12, and so forth). • $Bn — represents a byte beginning at an offset of n bytes from the associated $P pointer location initialized by the POINTER or PTR_EQUAL command (for example, $B0,$B1,$B2,...).

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 2-14 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-4. Entering Process Point Names

• $Sn — represents a 16-bit integer beginning at an offset of n bytes from the associated $P pointer location initialized by the POINTER or PTR_EQUAL command. The “n” must be a multiple of 2 (for example: $S0, $S2, $S4, $S6, and so forth). • $AnXi — represents an ASCII string of length i beginning at an offset of n bytes from the associated $P pointer location initialized by the POINTER or PTR_EQUAL command

where:

n = (0 through 32,767) and m = (0 through 255).

Sample $P pointer variables and associated $offsets are: $P1 $I0, $P23 $R24, $P99 $A10X32, and so forth. Note that you must be aware of the size of the segment that you initialize your $P pointer to using the POINTER or PTR_EQUAL command before/while attempting to access data within that segment. For example, if you assign $P1 to a segment that is only 256 bytes long, unpredictable results occur if you try to access $P1 $B300 because you are accessing memory beyond the total size of the segment you are pointing to see “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for a list of available memory segments and their associated sizes).

$G Pointers

The “$G” pointers (valid range = $G1 through $G250) are used to reference the group points stored in the current point group. The Group Builder program in the Ovation NT Developers Studio is used to build/modify the system point groups (see “Ovation NT Developer Studio User Guide” (NT-0060) for information on the Group Builder function). A given point group can have a maximum of 250 points associated with it ($G1 represents the first point in the current group, $G2 represents the second point, and so forth). The $G1 pointer is reserved for Westinghouse use. Use $G2 - $G250 in your graphics. Since $G pointers reference actual database points, use the standard two-character ASCII point record fields (for example: AV, RS, 1W, and so forth) with them wherever a point name/record field pair is required in a graphic.

11/01 2-15 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-4. Entering Process Point Names

$H Pointers

The “$H” pointers (valid range = $H1 through $H99) are used to reference database points indirectly by looking at a system ID stored in computer memory at the Operator Station. It is a precondition of using $H pointers that when you initialize the $H pointer in memory using the POINTER or PTR_EQUAL command, you must point it to a system ID stored in computer memory somewhere. If the $H pointer does not point to a database point system ID (which you are responsible for guaranteeing), the $H pointer will not work. Since $H pointers reference actual database points, use the standard two-character ASCII point record ﬁelds (for example: AV, RS, 1W, and so forth) with them wherever a point name/record ﬁeld pair is required in a graphic.

$W Pointers

The “$W” pointers (valid range = $W1 through $W99) are used in WINDOW diagrams (diag_type parameter on the DIAGRAM command = WINDOW). The $W pointers mark generic points that will be replaced with valid process points when the window diagram is displayed. A window diagram is displayed either as a result of a DIAG_DISP command, a POKE_FLD (type 8) command, or an OL_BUTTON (poke functionality, type 8) command. Note that all of these commands take a list of database point names as a parameter in the source syntax.

When the window diagram is displayed, the first point passed in the point names list via any of the above commands is substituted for all occurrences of $W1 in the window, the second point passed is substituted for all occurrences of $W2 in the window, and so on up to $W99. Window graphics are often implemented as templates so that the same window can be called from multiple graphics with different sets of points. Since $W pointers will be replaced with actual database points, use the standard two-character ASCII point record fields (for example: AV, RS, 1W, and so forth) with them wherever a point name/record field pair is required in a window graphic. Note that when you call up a window graphic, you only pass the point name to the window (not a point name/record field pair).

The record field is coded into the window graphic and cannot be passed into the window. It is the user’s responsibility to code the window graphic with the appropriate record field for whatever type of point will ultimately be passed to the window to replace the $W pointer. At runtime, on the Operator Station, if the point passed for any $W pointer in the window is incompatible with the coded record field for that instance of the $W pointer, an error is sent to the Error Log window, and the gcode using that $W pointer in the window is skipped (that is, not drawn at runtime).

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 2-16 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-4. Entering Process Point Names

$D Pointers

The “$D” pointers (valid range = $D1 through $D99) are used in macro diagrams. The $D pointers mark generic points that should be replaced with valid process points when the macro is added to a graphic. Valid database points, any of the $pointer variables, dummy points, and/or OPC points can be passed to replace $D points in a macro ﬁle.

The MACRO graphics command takes a macro diagram number, and a list of up to 99 process points as parameters. $D pointers are required because a single macro diagram may be added to several graphics with different process point parameters. When the macro is added to the graphic, each process point parameter is substituted in the macro gcodes for all occurrences of the corresponding $D pointer. That is, the ﬁrst process point is used for $D1, the second process point is used for $D2, and so on. See Section 4 for more information on macros.

Since database points, $W, $G, $H, or $P pointers can be passed to replace $D pointers in the macro, $D pointers can be paired with either the standard two- character ASCII point record fields (for example: AV, RS, 1W, and so forth) OR the $offsets (for example: $I0, $R24, $B3, $A10X16, and so forth) wherever a point name/record field pair is required. Note that when you call up a macro graphic, you only pass the point names to the macro (not the point name/record field pairs). The record fields are coded into the macro graphic and cannot be passed into the macro. It is the user’s responsibility to code the macro graphic with the appropriate record field for whatever type of point will ultimately be passed to the macro to replace the $D pointer.

OPC points have no associated record field. When you create an item in a macro graphic using a $D pointer, even if you do not pair a record field or $offset with the $D pointer, GBNT will automatically assign a default record field of “AV”to the $D pointer for you. GBNT will automatically strip any record field paired to a $D pointer from the macro at compile time if/when you pass an OPC point to the macro, so no error will be generated when substituting an OPC point for a $D pointer/offset pair in a macro.

11/01 2-17 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-4. Entering Process Point Names

$O Pointers

The $On pointers (valid range = $O1 through $O99) are used as a programming tool to pass a two-character ASCII record ﬁeld (for example: AV, RS, 1W, and so forth). to application program #80 (SEND_CA; see “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for information on application programs) using the POKE_FLD (type 7 or 23), RUN_PROGRAMS, FUNC_KEY, or OL_BUTTON (type 7 or 23) command.

Application program #80 performs a change attributes function on some point in the database. You must pass the two-character ASCII point record field that you want to change to this program. The $On pointer is used to do that. Valid application program arguments include strings, integers, real numbers, set variables, status identifiers, and point name/record field pairs. A stand-alone record field is not a valid argument to an applicable program (but a point name/record pair is).

2-4.4. Record Fields

Record fields are predefined in the Ovation system. These record fields vary according to the type of the process point (analog, digital, device, packed group, and packed digital), and are denoted by a two-character ASCII name (AV, DS, 1W, LL, ED, and so forth). A default record field is defined for each point type. If you do not enter a record field in a graphics command when a process point/record field is required, the default record field for that type of point is assumed.

Record ﬁelds are applicable to database points, dummy points, $W, $G, $H, $O, and $D pointers. The $offsets ($I0, $R4, $S0, $B3, $A0X16, and so forth) are only applicable to $P and $D pointer variables (see Section 2-4.3). OPC points do not have associated record ﬁelds or $offsets.

Table 2-2 summarizes the relationship between the type of point and the record ﬁeld (or $offset) expected in the Ovation system.

Table 2-2. Point Types with Associated Record Fields Default Record Field Type of Point Associated Record Field (or $Offset) ($Offset) Database point Two-character ASCII record field (for example: AV, Depends on the type of 1W, AS, HL, LL, and so forth) point (see R3-1140). Dummy point Two-character ASCII record field (for example: AV, AV 1W, AS, HL, LL, and so forth) OPC point None Not Applicable

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 2-18 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-4. Entering Process Point Names

Table 2-2. Point Types with Associated Record Fields (Cont’d) Default Record Field Type of Point Associated Record Field (or $Offset) ($Offset) $P1 - $P99 $Offset (for example: $I0, $R4, $S0, $B3, $A0X16, and $B0 so forth) $G1 - $G250 Two-character ASCII record field (for example: AV, AV 1W, AS, HL, LL, and so forth) $W1 - $W99 Two-character ASCII record field (for example: AV, AV 1W, AS, HL, LL, and so forth) $D1 - $D99 Two-character ASCII record field (for example: AV, AV 1W, AS, HL, LL, and so forth)

$Offset (for example: $I0, $R4, $S0, $B3, $A0X16, and so forth) $O1 - $O99 Two-character ASCII record field (for example: AV, AV 1W, AS, HL, LL, and so forth) $H1 - $H99 Two-character ASCII record field (for example: AV, AV 1W, AS, HL, LL, and so forth)

See “Ovation Record Types Reference Manual” (R3-1140) for more information on record ﬁelds.

11/01 2-19 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-4. Entering Process Point Names

2-4.5. OPC Points

OPC (Ole for Process Control) points are used to access data on OPC servers. This data is external to the Ovation System.

OPC point names (or tags) in graphics will be of the following format:

OPC$servertag$pointtag

where:

OPC$ = The first four characters of any OPC name must be “OPC$”. servertag = Logical name of the OPC server. It is comprised of alphanumeric characters only. $ = Mandatory placeholder. pointtag = Name of the point or tag. This portion can contain any characters (including spaces and backslashes).

The entire OPC name is limited to 130 characters. The maximum source line length in a graphic is 132 characters, and OPC point names must always be delimited by backslashes (therefore, 132 -2 = 130).

The entire OPC point name is case sensitive. The name “OPC$server1$A100.AV” is different from “OPC$server1$a100.av”. Also, the ﬁrst four characters of an OPC name must be “OPC$” (not “opc$”). Note that this is different than database point names, dummy point names, and $pointer variables, which are all case insensitive.

OPC point names must always be delimited by backslashes in graphic source commands and in entry ﬁelds on the GBNT windows that expect a point name or point name/record ﬁeld pair.

OPC points do not have associated record fields (neither the two-character ASCII record fields or the $pointer offset notation). You may pass an OPC point anywhere in a graphic where a point name or point name/record field pair is expected, but do not append a record field after it (even if the entry field label or source syntax label indicates doing so). Enter the OPC point name as defined (delimited by backslashes) when specifying an OPC point name.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 2-20 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-4. Entering Process Point Names

Since backslash characters are used to delimit OPC point names (as well as all other point names), the use of a backslash character in the pointtag portion of an OPC names is not recommended. However, if backslashes are used in the pointtag portion, two backslashes must be used. This is done so that GBNT can differentiate between the delimiting backslash that marks the end of the OPC name and the ones used in the pointtag portion. Any even number of consecutive backslashes within the pointtag portion will be considered part of the name and not the terminating backslash.

For example, if the pointtag portion exists as “A100\SYSTEM1\TEST\AV” in the OPC Server, it must be written in the graphics source ﬁle as follows:

\OPC$servertag$A100\\SYSTEM1\\TEST\\AV\

If it were written as “\OPC$servertag$A100\SYSTEM1\\TEST\AV\”, GBNT would assume that the backslash after A100 is the terminating backslash (that is, that the OPC point name is “\OPC$servertag$A100\”) and would process the rest of the name as extra data on the source line after the OPC name.

Rules for using OPC Points in Graphics

The following is a list of the limitations of OPC point usage in graphics:

1. OPC points cannot be used with a POKE FLD (poke type = 0) command to display Ovation system point information since the OPC point is not part of the Ovation system. Similarly, you cannot poke on the display of a PROCESS PT command built with an OPC point. See “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for information on graphic commands.

2. In the PROCESS PT command, if an OPC point is specified for the point name argument, no record field (or record field conditional) will be allowed, since OPC points do not have associated record fields.

3. OPC points cannot be used in conjunction with CASE or QUALITY conditional expressions in graphics. See “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for information on conditional expressions.

4. OPC point names are not stored in the database with the graphic when running GBNT within the Ovation Developer Studio (see “Ovation NT Developer Studio User Guide” (NT-0060) for more information). Thus, you cannot do a search or a “where used” function on OPC points as you can for database points.

5. OPC point names do not display in the list of dummy points in GBNT. There is not support for getting/printing a list of OPC points used in a graphic in GBNT.

11/01 2-21 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-5. Comparing the Online and Ofﬂine GBNT

2-5. Comparing the Online and Ofﬂine GBNT

GBNT can be run online from within the Ovation Developer Studio or it can be run offline as a stand-alone program. To run online, GBNT will be automatically installed as part of the Ovation Developer Studio. To run offline, a separate installation CD is required to perform the setup (see a WPC Project Engineer for information on setting up the offline version of GBNT).

Note

The user cannot simply execute the online gbnt.exe file in order to run offline because the offline runtime environment is different from the online runtime environment. Both the online and offline versions of GBNT require a license to run. When running GBNT offline, the Import Graphics function (see Appendix D) within the Ovation Developer Studio is used to move your offline graphics and support files into the database (online environment). See “Ovation NT Developer Studio User’s Guide” (NT-0060) for more information.

The appearance and functionality of GBNT are identical between the online and offline versions with the following exceptions: • Database support (Section 2-5.1) • OPC Point Browser support (Section 2-5.2). • File New function (Section 2-5.3) • File Open function (Section 2-5.4) • File Compile function (Section 2-5.5) • File Save/Save As functions (Section 2-5.6) The following sections discuss the online and offline differences. Throughout the remainder of this manual, the examples are from the offline version of GBNT.

2-5.1. Differences with Database Support

GBNT only communicates with the database when it is running online. All point names are interpreted as dummy points when running ofﬂine/stand-alone. On a save of a macro ﬁle, only the online version of GBNT prompts the user to recompile all the graphics using the macro.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 2-22 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-5. Comparing the Online and Ofﬂine GBNT

2-5.2. OPC Point Browser Support

Support for browsing the available OPC servers for OPC point names within GBNT is only provided when running online. Both the associated menu item and the toolbar button for the OPC point browser are inactive when running GBNT ofﬂine. You may still use OPC point names in graphics when running ofﬂine, but you will not be able to browse for them within GBNT. See Section 3 for information on the GBNT:Browse OPC Points dialog.

2-5.3. Differences with File - New Function

In the ofﬂine version of GBNT, the New function is accessed when the user pulls down the File menu on the main GBNT window and selects New.

In the online (Studio) version of GBNT, new diagrams cannot be created from within GBNT (the New menu item on the online GBNT’s File menu is inactive, as well as the associated toolbar button). New diagrams are created from within the Ovation Developer Studio (see “Ovation NT Developer Studio User’s Guide” (NT- 0060) for more information).

To create a newdiagram using the online version of GBNT, followthe steps below:

11/01 2-23 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-5. Comparing the Online and Ofﬂine GBNT

1. From the Ovation NT Developer Studio, in the Overview window, highlight Diagrams or Macros under Graphics in the System tree.

Figure 2-1. Ovation NT Developer Studio

Note

You must initiate the New function from the Macros node when creating a new macro graphic.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 2-24 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-5. Comparing the Online and Ofﬂine GBNT

2. Pull down the Operation menu, and select Insert New.

Figure 2-2. Insert New Diagram -- Ovation NT Developer Studio

Note

The user can also access the Operation menu by highlighting Diagrams or Macros and right-clicking on the Overview window.

11/01 2-25 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-5. Comparing the Online and Ofﬂine GBNT

The Insert New Diagrams window displays (Figure 2-3).

Figure 2-3. Insert New Diagrams Wizard -- Ovation NT Developer Studio

3. Enter the name of the diagram in the Name entry field. Press the Finish button. Do not enter the .src or .diag file name extension in the entry field. The Studio will append the filename extensions for you when the new diagram files are created. The diagram name is not case sensitive.

The New Diagrams window displays (Figure 2-4).

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 2-26 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-5. Comparing the Online and Ofﬂine GBNT

Figure 2-4. New Diagrams Window -- Ovation NT Developer Studio

4. Enter the diagram description/title in the Description entry ﬁeld. The description can be up to 60 characters and can include blanks. This parameter is optional and may be left blank. Press the OK button.

— The diagram name (in Name entry ﬁeld) is carried over from the Insert New Diagrams window and is read-only.

— The diagram type (in Type pull-down menu) is read-only and is deﬁned by the hierarchy node that initiated the Insert New process. That is, if this function was invoked from the Macros node in the Studio hierarchy, then the diagram type will be set to Macro. If it was invoked from any of the Diagrams nodes, the diagram type will be set to Normal. Note that you cannot change from type Normal to type Macro or vice versa.

5. After entering the required data in the New Diagrams window, press the OK or Apply button to create the new graphic in the database and invoke the online GBNT with the new, empty graphic .src ﬁle loaded. The corresponding .diag ﬁle is not created until a Save function is performed.

11/01 2-27 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-5. Comparing the Online and Ofﬂine GBNT

Once a diagram is opened in the online version via the Ovation Developer Studio, the user cannot create a newdiagram in the same window.The only wayto create a newdiagram is via the Ovation NT Developer Studio, in whichcase a newinstance of GBNT will be invoked.

In contrast, newdiagrams can be created in the ofﬂine version of GBNT (either by using the New menu item or the New toolbar button). In the ofﬂine version, when the New function is invoked, any currently loaded diagram will be erased (after prompting to save any changes), and the current instance of GBNT will be re-used to create the new diagram.

See Section 3 for information on using the New function.

2-5.4. Differences with File - Open Function

In the ofﬂine version of GBNT, the Open function is accessed when the user pulls down the File menu on the main GBNT window and selects Open.

In the online (Studio) version of GBNT, diagrams cannot be opened from within GBNT (the Open menu item on the online GBNT’s File menu is inactive, as well as the associated toolbar button). Diagrams are opened from within the Ovation NT Developer Studio (see “Ovation NT Developer Studio User’s Guide” (NT-0060) for more information).

To open a diagram using the online version of GBNT, follow the steps below:

1. From the Ovation NT Developer Studio, in the Overview window, highlight Diagrams or Macros under Graphics in the System tree.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 2-28 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-5. Comparing the Online and Ofﬂine GBNT

A list of the available diagrams appears in the workpad window.

Note

You must initiate the Open function from the Macros node to open a macro graphic. 2. Highlight the diagram to open in the Workpad window.

11/01 2-29 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-5. Comparing the Online and Ofﬂine GBNT

3. Pull down the Operation menu, and select Open.

Note

The user can also double-click on the diagram name in the Workpad window to open the diagram. The Ovation Developer Studio invokes a GBNT main window to display with the speciﬁed diagram already loaded.

Once a diagram is opened in the online version via the Ovation NT Developer Studio, the user cannot open a new diagram in the same window. The only way to open a new diagram is via the Ovation NT Developer Studio, in which case a new GBNT main window will be invoked.

In contrast, diagrams can be opened in the ofﬂine version of GBNT (either by using the Open menu item or the Open toolbar button). In the ofﬂine version, the user can change to another diagram from the GBNT:Open window, and the user will always re-use the same instance of GBNT.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 2-30 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-5. Comparing the Online and Ofﬂine GBNT

Note that the online version of GBNT loads the source version of a graphic when opening it; there is no way to load the corresponding .diag file from within the Ovation Developer Studio. Since there is no support for loading the .diag versions of graphics from within the Ovation Developer Studio, it is imperative not to lose source files as they cannot be recreated from the .diag files as in the offline version. Either the source or the object format of a graphic may be loaded into the offline version of GBNT. Also note that the user cannot take a .diag file generated from the online version and load it into the offline version of GBNT to recreate the .src file if it has any System IDs compiled into it because the offline version of GBNT cannot access the database to translate the stored System ID into a point name.

See Section 3 for information on using the Open function.

2-5.5. Differences with File - Compile Function

In the ofﬂine version of GBNT, the Compile function is accessed when the user pulls down the File menu on the main GBNT window and selects Compile.

In the online (Studio) version of GBNT, diagrams cannot be compiled from within GBNT other than by saving the currently loaded graphic (the Compile menu item on the online GBNT’s File menu is inactive, as well as the associated toolbar button). Diagrams must be compiled from within the Ovation Developer Studio (see “Ovation NT Developer Studio User’s Guide” (NT-0060) for more information).

To compile a diagram using the online version of GBNT, follow the steps below:

1. From the Ovation NT Developer Studio, in the Overview window, highlight Diagrams or Macros under the Graphics node in the System tree.

A list of the available diagrams appears in the Workpad window.

2. Highlight the diagram to compile in the Workpad window. (To compile all of the diagrams, just highlight the Graphics folder under the System tree.)

3. Pull down the Operation menu, and select Compile.

The Ovation Developer Studio invokes a newinstance of GBNT to do the compile in the background. The GBNT window will not display, but the GBNT:Compilation Output window will display to show the compilation status. All compile output is written to both the window and to a list file.

11/01 2-31 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-5. Comparing the Online and Ofﬂine GBNT

In contrast, diagrams can be compiled within the offline version of GBNT (either by using the Compile menu item or the Compile toolbar button). In the offline version, the user can compile one or more diagrams by selecting them on the GBNT:Compile window, which will use the same instance of GBNT to perform the compile.

See Section 3 for information on using the Compile function.

2-5.6. Differences with File - Save/Save As Functions

In the ofﬂine version of GBNT, the Save function is accessed when the user pulls down the File menu on the main GBNT window and selects Save or Save As.

Diagrams are saved in both the online and ofﬂine versions of GBNT by selecting the Save menu item on the File menu and/or by selecting the associated toolbar button. Behind the scenes, the online version updates the database by storing any System IDs used in the diagram and any macros used in the diagram. If the diagram being saved is a macro, the online version also gives the user the option to recompile all graphics which use that macro. No such option exists in the ofﬂine version and it is the user’s responsibility to recompile graphics which call a macro after changing the macro.

However, the Save As function differs between the online and ofﬂine versions. The online Save As function displays a different window than the ofﬂine version (see Figure 2-5). The online version only allows the user to specify a new name (not a new path) for the diagram (the new diagram will always be created in the same hierarchy node in the Ovation Developer Studio).

Figure 2-5. Online version of GBNT:Save As Window

In contrast, the user can save to any ﬁle name or directory in the ofﬂine version.

See Section 3 for information on using the Save and Save As functions.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 2-32 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-6. Introduction to the Main GBNT Window

2-6. Introduction to the Main GBNT Window

When GBNT is started, the main GBNT window displays in the workspace. In the ofﬂine version, the main GBNT window allows the user to create new diagram ﬁles as well as edit existing ones. This window consists of a base frame with a pull-down menu panel, toolbars, drawing canvas, horizontal and vertical scrollbars, and a footer for displaying messages.

The GBNT window title bar reads “GBNT” when no graphic is currently loaded. If a graphic is currently loaded, the loaded filename (less the file path and file extension) is appended to the window title bar. If a diagram name is defined, it also is appended. The filename and diagram name will be separated by a dash and will be in parenthesis. For example, if the currently loaded graphic is 1800.src and the name is “System Status Diagram,” the window title bar will read, “GBNT (1800 — System Status Diagram).” If no name for 1800.src was defined, the window title bar would read, “GBNT (1800).”

Note

GBNT is displayed on a CRT, and a cursor positioning device (mouse or trackball) is used to access the menus and windows. For editorial simplicity, the cursor positioning device will be referred to as a “mouse” throughout this manual. Figure 2-6 shows the main GBNT window.

11/01 2-33 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-6. Introduction to the Main GBNT Window

Figure 2-6. Main GBNT Window

The following sections list the functions and windows available on the main GBNT window.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 2-34 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-6. Introduction to the Main GBNT Window

2-6.1. Pull-Down Menu Panel

The pull-down menu panel displays the following items: • File • Edit • View • Options • Help

Unless otherwise noted, most File, View and Options menu items are discussed in detail in Section 3. The Edit menu functions are discussed in Section 5. Help is explained in Section 2-9.

File

The File pull-down menu is used to load, save, print, and compile graphics. • New — Erases the graphic currently loaded, thereby clearing the canvas. It also resets the GBNT window title to reﬂect that no diagram is currently loaded. This function is not available in the online version of GBNT (see Section 2-5).

• Open — Accesses the GBNT:Open window for loading a new graphic into the main GBNT window. This function is not available in the online version of GBNT (see Section 2-5). • Save — Saves the currently loaded graphic. Writes both the .src and the .diag format of the graphic. If no diagram is currently loaded, this menu item works like the Save As function (discussed below). • Save As — Saves the currently loaded graphic (or what is currently displayed in the main GBNT window) to the file name specified in the GBNT:Save As window. Save As is used to save a graphic for the first time or to save an existing diagram to a different name. This function varies depending on whether GBNT is running in online or offline mode. See Section 2-5 for more information. • Print — Prints the GBNT drawing canvas to the printer. No title/header is appended to the printout — it is just the canvas drawing area. • Print Preview — Allows the user to see what will be printed before actually printing. This option is useful in determining when or if the print setup should be changed (for example, change from portrait to landscape mode).

11/01 2-35 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-6. Introduction to the Main GBNT Window

• Print Setup — Displays the Print Setup window which allows the user to specify a printer, paper size, print mode (portrait versus landscape), and so forth. However, the user cannot print from this window. • Restore Original — Restores the last manually saved version of the current graphic. This function overrides any auto-saves that may have occurred since the last load or manual save. That is, if the Auto Save function is turned on, and N auto-save operations have occurred, the original version of the file that was last loaded or manually saved will be restored when the Restore Original menu item is selected. See Section 3 for more information on AutoSave.

• Compile — Displays the GBNT:Compile window for compiling one or more graphic .src files. This function varies depending on whether GBNT is running in online or offline mode. See Section 2-5 for more information. • Exit — Quits GBNT. This function first checks for unsaved changes and prompts the user to save before closing.

Edit

The Edit pull-down menu displays some of the conﬁgurable parameters for the current edit session in GBNT. These items are discussed in Section 5. • Undo — Undoes the last edit. Only the last edit can be undone. Selecting this option again after an undo has the affect of redoing the original operation. • Cut — Erases all of the currently selected items on the screen and copies them to the internal buffer for pasting later. This menu item is inactive (grayed out) if no items are currently selected. • Copy — Copies all of the currently selected items on the screen to the internal buffer for pasting later. This menu item is inactive (grayed out) if no items are currently selected. • Paste — Prompts the user (in the left footer of the GBNT window) to press the left mouse button and drag a “paste” rectangle. The paste rectangle is sized to what was previously copied to the internal buffer via the Cut or Copy functions. Release the left mouse button to add (paste) the copied or cut items to the current graphic. • Delete — Erases all of the currently selected items on the screen. This menu item is inactive (grayed out) if no items are currently selected. • Duplicates — Used to make anywhere from 1 to 10 equi-spaced copies of the selected item or group. This is only valid when a single item or group is selected.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 2-36 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-6. Introduction to the Main GBNT Window

• Properties — Displays the current drawing attributes (color, line/ﬁll pattern, and so forth) in the associated attribute window for the currently selected item. This menu items is inactive if no item is selected or if more than one item is selected. • Attributes — Displays a pull-right menu where the user can select an attribute window (color, blink, text, line width, ﬁll pattern, or line pattern) for viewing or for changing attributes and their conditionals. • Select Mode — Cancels out of any edit in progress and returns the user to the default select mode. If you are currently drawing or moving an item, and you select this menu item, that edit will be aborted and the screen will be refreshed. Note that this is not an undo, which cancels the previously completed edit. This cancels the edit currently in progress. • Select All — Selects all of the items on the graphic. • Group — Internally combines all of the selected items into a single entity (group) in the current edit session. Grouping is only effective during the current edit session. When a new graphic is loaded, grouping status is reset. Once grouped, the items cannot be edited individually. This menu item is inactive if no items are selected, or if only one item is selected.

• Ungroup — Separates a group (created using the Group menu item) into individual items which can be individually edited. This menu item is only valid if one or more groups are selected. Note that this menu item does not dissociate macros. • Unshape — Separates a shape displayed on a graphic into individual items which can be individually edited. This menu item is only active if one or more shapes are currently selected. • Resize-by-factor — Used to resize the selected item or group as deﬁned by the factors on the GBNT: Scale Factors window (accessed from the Options menu). • Vertex edit — Used to edit the vertices of the Line and Polygon items. Vertex edit can also be done on Rectangles, OL Rectangles, Bars, Plots, Trends, OL Gauges, OL Cylinders, XY Plots, Dynamic Lines/Polygons, Pokes, and OL Sliders. However, these items have a very limited scope. • Object-to-object snap — Enables one object to be snapped to a point on another object. • Snap to Grid — Snaps the origin of the item to the nearest grid point. In order for this option to be active, the grid must be turned on/displayed.

11/01 2-37 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-6. Introduction to the Main GBNT Window

• Align/Equi-space — Provides the user with a set of functions to align and space items or groups on the diagram.

View

The View pull-down menu displays other windows related to GBNT. There are also certain options that allowthe user to change the display of the drawingcanvas (grid, handle/drag color, and so forth). • Toolbars — Lists each toolbar that is available in the main GBNT window. If there is a checkmark to the left of the menu item, that toolbar is currently displayed. If there is no checkmark beside the menu item, that toolbar is currently not displayed.

• Diagram Configuration — Accesses the GBNT:Diagram Conﬁguration window which sets the display variables for the diagram. The variables deﬁned here affect how the diagram appears at the Ovation NT Operator Station.

• Integrated Source — Accesses the GBNT:Integrated Source Editor window which allows the user to edit the graphics source file. See Section 7. • Generic Text Editor — Accesses TextEdit, a generic, independent text editor package written specifically to be used to edit graphic source files. TextEdit provides a means to edit graphic source files in a more conventional editor package that supports cut and paste and free-form editing.

• Shape Lib — Accesses the GBNT:Shape Library window which allows the user to display, create, edit, and delete shapes in the Shape Library. See Section 6. • Zoom — Displays the Zoom menu which is used to zoom in and out of a graphic area. • Keyboard repaint order — Speciﬁes the order in which the Keyboard section should be displayed on a refresh of the screen in relation to the Background, Foreground, and Trigger sections.

• Handle/drag color — Displays the GBNT:Drag/Handle Color window. This allows the user to choose the color of the handles around a selected item. • Coordinate display — Deﬁnes if or where the current pointer coordinates should display on the main GBNT window. • Grid — Allows the user to display a grid on the screen. • Grid Options — Displays the GBNT:Grid Options window which allows the user to choose the display features of the grid.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 2-38 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-6. Introduction to the Main GBNT Window

• Save Defaults — Used to save the current GBNT working environment. • Browse OPC Points — Displays the GBNT:Browse OPC Pts dialog which is used to browse the available OPC servers for OPC points in order to then drag- n-drop the selected OPC point name to any point entry ﬁeld on any of the GBNT dialogs. This menu item is only available when running GBNT online from the Ovation Developer Studio.

Options

The Options pull-down menu items define some of the configurable parameters for the current edit session. Unlike the GBNT:Diagram Command window, the variable settings here apply only to the GBNT edit session. • Resize pin point — Determines whether the center of a draw item remains pinned (fixed) during a resize or the opposite corner/side remains fixed. • Resize aspect ratio — Determines whether or not the aspect ratio (ratio of width and height) of any display item or group should be maintained on a resize operation.

• Resize scale factors — Displays the GBNT: Scale Factors window, which sets the width and height scale factors that are used in conjunction with the Resize- by-factor edit function from the Edit menu. • Drag/draw constraint — Speciﬁes the restrictions on dragging an item or group during Move and Duplicate edit functions, and/or on line and polygon draw functions. • Multi-draw mode — Allows the user to draw several items of one type without selecting the button each time.

• Undefined Pts — Displays the GBNT:Dummy Point List window which lists the system IDs used in the graphic but not defined in the Ovation NT database. • Undefined Pts Warnings — Allows the user the choose if or when to be informed of undefined points in a graphic. • Auto Save — Saves all changes to a loaded graphic after the number of edits specified in the GBNT:AutoSave Frequency window.

• Auto Save Frequency — Displays the GBNT:AutoSave Frequency window, which speciﬁes how many edit operations must occur before the graphic saves.

11/01 2-39 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-6. Introduction to the Main GBNT Window

• Conditional word wrap — Displays the conditional word wrap menu. This menu gives the user the ability to control howmany characters willbe displayed per line in any of the conditional text ﬁelds when a conditional is displayed on a window.

• Macro Notes/Parameter Descriptions — Displays the GBNT:Macro Notes & Parameter Descriptions dialog. It is used to interactively create/edit the macro parameter descriptions/labels, and to interactively create/edit macro notes/ comments. • Undefined Description Warnings — Allows you to display a warning message if you attempt to save a macro graphic when there are undeﬁned descriptions/labels for the macro parameters.

2-6.2. Error Handling

Errors detected while doing any of the interactive editing functions (that is, draw, rotate, resize, and so forth) are displayed in pop-up error dialogs which must be acknowledged before any other actions can be taken within GBNT. These error dialogs are blocking to the GBNT process only. Errors may also be displayed in the footer area of the window.

In addition to the error message, beeps are generated when source editor errors are detected.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 2-40 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-7. GBNT Toolbars

2-7. GBNT Toolbars

Toolbars provide quick access to the more frequently used GBNT windows and functions. The main GBNT window supports eight toolbars (see Section 2-7.1) and the Integrated Source Editor supports one toolbar (see Section 7).

Each toolbar button has an associated “tooltip” for that button. A tooltip is a short descriptive text string describing the button function. To see the tooltip for a particular button, pause the mouse pointer over the toolbar button.

Toolbar buttons, like their associated menu items, can be active or inactive. If a function is currently not valid (for example, the delete function requires one or more items to be currently selected), the associated toolbar button and menu item will be inactive. If a function is valid, both the toolbar button and the menu item will be active. All toolbar button functions can be accessed via a menu with the exception of the GBNT:Draw toolbar buttons. Draw functions are only available through the toolbar.

The display of toolbars can be toggled from the View menu — Toolbars pullright menu (see Section 3). This menu contains a menu item for each toolbar. If there is a check to the left of the menu item, that toolbar is currently displayed. It may be docked or ﬂoating. If there is no check beside the menu item, that toolbar is currently not displayed.

Each of the toolbars is dockable and ﬂoatable. A toolbar is docked if it is attached to one of the sides of the GBNT window. A toolbar is floating if it is displayed as a pop-up window with a title and a window close button in the upper right corner. A ﬂoating toolbar can move anywhere on the screen. The Drawing Attributes toolbar can only be docked to the top or bottom of the GBNT window (left or right docking is not available). The other toolbars can be docked to the left, right, top, or bottom on the GBNT window.

To move a docked toolbar, grab the toolbar background (that is, not on a button). Press and hold the left mouse button with the mouse pointer on the toolbar background. The toolbar outline will be highlighted. Drag the toolbar to the desired place/position. Release the mouse button, and the toolbar will be docked to that side.

To float a toolbar, drag it to the center of the diagram, outside the GBNT window, or anywhere on the screen that is not along the edge of the GBNT window and release the mouse button. The toolbar changes to a pop-up window. Note that when a toolbar is floating, it is resizable. That is, the user can grab a side of the floating toolbar with the mouse and resize the toolbar to change the layout. This configuration is only maintained while the toolbar is floating. If you dock the toolbar now, it will be restored to its original layout (a single row of buttons).

11/01 2-41 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-7. GBNT Toolbars

The current toolbar state, including which toolbars are displayed, whether they are docked or ﬂoating, and where they are positioned, is saved when GBNT exits. When GBNT restarts, the saved toolbar state is restored. The toolbar states are saved automatically on exiting GBNT and are not affected by the user selecting the Save Defaults option (see Section 3).

If running GBNT online (from the Ovation Developer Studio), and your toolbars are unexpectedly being repositioned when opening graphics, it is because the default diagram width and height stored as part of the Save Defaults function (Section 3) is smaller than the graphic you are loading. To correct this, follow the steps below:

1. Open the largest graphic (in the width dimension) in the Studio.

2. Hand-place the toolbars as you want them.

3. Execute the Save Defaults function to store the current diagram width and height as the default width and height.

4. Exit GBNT to re-save the toolbar state.

You should nowbe able to re-open your graphics in the Studio and have the toolbars positioned where you placed them.

2-7.1. Main Window Toolbars

The main GBNT window supports the following eight toolbars:

Main toolbar

Figure 2-7. GBNT:Main Toolbar

The Main toolbar options are, from left to right: New, Open, Save, Compile, Print, Integrated Source, Generic Text Editor, Shapelib, OPC Point Browser.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 2-42 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-7. GBNT Toolbars

Align/Equi-space toolbar

Figure 2-8. GBNT:Align/Equi-space Toolbar

The Align/space toolbar options are, from left to right: Align left, Align right, Align tops, Align bottoms, Align centers, Align centers horizontally, Align centers vertically, Horz equi-space, Vert equi-space, Set horz/vert spacing, Align x origins, Align y origins, Object-to-object snap mode, Vertex edit mode, Toggle grid, Grid options, Snap-to-grid

Draw toolbar

Figure 2-9. GBNT:Draw Toolbar

The Draw toolbar options are, from left to right: Toggle multi-draw mode, Macro, Macro Notes & Parameter Descriptions, Arc, Rubberband Arc, Line, Rubberband Line, Circle, Ellipse, Polygon, Rectangle, Dot, OL Rectangle, OL Gauge, Ol Cylinder, Bar, Plot, XY Plot, Dynamic Line/Polygon, Trend, Time, Date, Pt Group Text, Process Point, Text, Shape, Poke, Entry Field, OL Slider, OL Check Box, OL Choice, OL Button, OL Event Menu, Function Key

11/01 2-43 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-7. GBNT Toolbars

Drawing attributes toolbar

Figure 2-10. GBNT:Drawing Attributes Toolbar

The Drawing Attributes toolbar options are, from left to right: Display/set active place (pull-down menu), Sets/shows source line # (entry ﬁeld), Change place, Color, Font Attributes, Fill Patterns, Line Patterns, Line Width

Edit toolbar

Figure 2-11. GBNT:Edit Toolbar

The Edit toolbar options are, from left to right. Cut, Copy, Paste, Delete, Undo, Properties, Select Mode, Group, Ungroup

Invert/Rotate toolbar

Figure 2-12. GBNT:Invert/Rotate Toolbar

The Invert/Rotate toolbar options are, from left to right: Invert horizontally, Invert vertically, Rotate clockwise, Rotate counterclockwise

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 2-44 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-7. GBNT Toolbars

Resize toolbar

Figure 2-13. GBNT:Resize Toolbar

The Resize toolbar options are, from left to right: Pin center on resize, Pin opposite handle on resize, Unconstrained resize, Maintain aspect ratio resize, Resize-by-factor, Set scale factors

Zoom toolbar

Figure 2-14. GBNT:Zoom Toolbar

The Zoom toolbar options are, from left to right: Full view, Zoom by corners, Zoom in, Zoom out, Recall backwards

11/01 2-45 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-8. Keyboard Shortcuts

2-8. Keyboard Shortcuts

Keyboard shortcuts allow the GBNT windows and functions to be accessed by keystroke combinations instead of selecting the item with the mouse. The main GBNT window must have the keyboard focus to use the keyboard shortcuts (a window with keyboard focus is the window that keyboard events go to and is indicated by the top bar of the window being highlighted). Also, the associated menu item must be active at the time the user presses the keyboard shortcut. For example, if no items are currently selected, the Group menu item is not active. Therefore, the “Group” shortcut key is also inactive.

Table 2-3 through Table 2-6 list the keyboard shortcuts for functions as they are listed under their pull-down menu for the main GBNT window.

Table 2-3. Keyboard Shortcuts by Pull-Down Menu - File Menu Menu Item Keyboard Shortcut NewCtrl + N Open Ctrl + O Save Ctrl + S Save As Ctrl + A Print Ctrl + P Compile Shift + C

Table 2-4. Keyboard Shortcuts by Pull-Down Menu - Edit Menu Menu Item Keyboard Shortcut Undo Ctrl + Z Cut Ctrl + X Copy Ctrl + C Paste Ctrl + V Delete Del Properties Shift + A Select Mode Esc Group Ctrl + G

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 2-46 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-8. Keyboard Shortcuts

Table 2-4. Keyboard Shortcuts by Pull-Down Menu - Edit Menu (Cont’d) Menu Item Keyboard Shortcut Ungroup Shift + G Unshape Ctrl + U Resize-by-factor Ctrl + R Vertex edit Shift + V Object-to-object snap Shift + O Snap to Grid Ctrl + Y

Table 2-5. Keyboard Shortcuts by Pull-Down Menu - View Menu Menu Item Keyboard Shortcut Toolbars (no keyboard shortcuts) Diagram Conﬁg Shift + D Integrated Source Shift + S Generic Text Editor Shift + T Shape Lib Shift + H Zoom (see individual items on menu) Full ViewShift + F Zoom by Corners Shift + Z Zoom By Box Shift + B Zoom In Shift + I Zoom Out Shift + U Zoom In/Out Factor Shift + P

11/01 2-47 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-8. Keyboard Shortcuts

Table 2-6. Keyboard Shortcuts by Pull-Down Menu - Options Menu Menu Item Keyboard Shortcut Resize scale factors Shift + R Multi-draw mode Ctrl + M

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 2-48 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-9. Using GBNT Online Help

2-9. Using GBNT Online Help

GBNT provides help for most topics. To access online help, go to the main GBNT window, pull down the Help menu, and select Topics.

A pop-up window appears showing information about the items contained in the window (see Figure 2-15).

11/01 2-49 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-9. Using GBNT Online Help

Figure 2-15. GBNT Help Window — Contents Tab

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 2-50 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-9. Using GBNT Online Help

2-9.1. Help Search Methods

From the main Help window, information can be found by using the Contents, Index, or Search tabs.

Contents Tab

The Contents tab is a directory tree structure of the contents of the help file for the current application. It follows the same scheme as Windows Explorer. Each subject is represented by a book icon that contains individual files. The individual file contains the help text (see Figure 2-15).

To access the information in the dialog box, click on the subject in the left-hand window. The right-hand window will be populated with the corresponding help information.

Index Tab

The Index tab dialog box has a text entry ﬁeld to search the index for speciﬁc information. The system will search the index for an entry as you type the information. As you type, it will highlight index help topics that alphabetically match your entry the closest.

To search using the Index tab, choose a topic and click the Display button at the bottom of the windowto viewhelp text. The right-hand windowwillbe populated with the corresponding help information (see Figure 2-16).

11/01 2-51 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-9. Using GBNT Online Help

Figure 2-16. GBNT Help Window — Index Tab

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 2-52 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-9. Using GBNT Online Help

Search Tab

The Search tab dialog box enables selection by entering a key word into the keyword to ﬁnd entry ﬁeld and clicking the List Topics button. Topics will then be shown that match the keyword. Choose a topic and click the Display button at the bottom of the window to view the topic. The right-hand window will be populated with the corresponding help information (see Figure 2-17).

Figure 2-17. GBNT Help Window — Search Tab

11/01 2-53 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-9. Using GBNT Online Help

2-9.2. Help Menu Icons

You can set viewing preferences with the icons on the menu bar. The following functions are available: • Hide/ Show — toggle according to the current view. These icons are used to hide or show the Contents, Index, and Search tabs. • Back — displays the previous help selection. • Forward — displays the next help selection. • Print —prints the current help screen. Several other viewing preferences are available in the Contents view by right- clicking in the topic area. A menu will appear on the screen with available options (Figure 2-18).

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 2-54 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 2-9. Using GBNT Online Help

Figure 2-18. Right-Click Help Menu

• Open All — opens all topics in a book. • Close All — closes all topics in a book. • Print — allows you to print the selected topic or print the selected heading and all subtopics.

• View Entry — not available. • Jump to URL — not available.

11/01 2-55 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C Section 3. Loading, Saving, and Conﬁguring Graphics

3-1. Section Overview

This section discusses the procedures for accessing GBNT, loading and saving files, and configuring diagram and GBNT variables as they are listed on the pull-down menus. The following topics are included in this section: • File menu options (Section 3-2). — Displaying a new graphic (Section 3-2.1). — Opening a graphic (Section 3-2.2). — Saving a graphic (Section 3-2.3). — Printing (Section 3-2.4). — Restoring the original diagram (Section 3-2.5). — Compiling (Section 3-2.6). • View menu options (Section 3-3). — Toolbars (Section 3-3.1). — Diagram Configuration (Section 3-3.2). — Integrated Source Editor (Section 3-3.3). — Generic Text Editor (Section 3-3.4). — Shape Library (Section 3-3.5). — Zoom (Section 3-3.6). — Keyboard Repaint Order (Section 3-3.7). — Handle/Drag Color (Section 3-3.8). — Coordinate Display (Section 3-3.9). — Grid (Section 3-3.10).

— Grid Options (Section 3-3.11). — Save Defaults (Section 3-3.12).

11/01 3-1 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C — Browse OPC Points (Section 3-3.13). • Option menu items (Section 3-4). — Resize Pin Point (Section 3-4.1). — Resize Aspect Ratio (Section 3-4.2). — Resize Scale Factors (Section 3-4.3). — Drag/Draw Constraint (Section 3-4.4). — Multi-Draw Mode (Section 3-4.5). — Undefined Points (Section 3-4.6). — Undefined Points Warning (Section 3-4.7). — AutoSave (Section 3-4.8). — AutoSave Frequency (Section 3-4.9). — Conditional Word Wrap (Section 3-4.10). — Macro Notes/Parameter Descriptions (Section 3-4.11). — Undefined Description Warnings (Section 3-4.12).

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 3-2 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-2. File Menu Options

3-2. File Menu Options

The File pull-down menu is used to load, save, print, and compile graphics. Section 3-2.1 through Section 3-2.6 discuss the various File menu items.

Figure 3-1 shows the File menu.

Figure 3-1. File Menu

11/01 3-3 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-2. File Menu Options

3-2.1. Displaying a New Graphic

The New menu item erases the GBNT canvas in preparation for creating a new graphic. It essentially “unloads” the current graphic. It does not delete the diagram ﬁle.

Use the following procedure to start a new graphic.

1. Pull down the File menu on the main GBNT window.

2. Select New from the File menu. (If using the toolbars, Newis the ﬁrst button on the GBNT:Main toolbar; see Section 2)

The GBNT drawing canvas clears.

Note

If changes have been made to the diagram since the last save, a window displays asking the user to verify the unload operation. This function is not available in the online version. See Section 2.

3-2.2. Opening a Graphic

The GBNT:Open window is used to display a graphics file. This window shows the diagram directory where diagram files are stored and a scrolling list of the files already present in the directory. Note that this dialog is a blocking dialog, which means that once this dialog is displayed, you cannot do anything else in GBNT while the dialog is displayed.

Use the following procedure to open an existing graphic.

1. Pull down the File menu on the main GBNT window.

2. Select Open from the File menu. (If using the toolbars, Open is the second button on the GBNT:Main toolbar; see Section 2).

The GBNT:Open window appears (Figure 3-2).

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 3-4 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-2. File Menu Options

Figure 3-2. GBNT:Open Window

3. To specify the directory from which to open the ﬁle, pull down the Look in menu, and select a directory. The subdirectories for this directory will display in the list.

The buttons to the right of the Look in menu are, from left to right: • Go up one directory — goes to the directory above the current directory in the hierarchy. • Create a new folder — creates a newdirectory under the current directory. • List — Displays only the file names in the window. • Detail — Gives detailed information on the files in the list such as size of file, type, and date last modified.

4. Specify the file to open by selecting a file from the scrolling list, or type the name in the File name entry field.

5. Pull down the Files of type menu and select the type of ﬁles that will appear in the list. The only choice is Diag and Source ﬁles (*.diag and *.src).

11/01 3-5 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-2. File Menu Options

6. Select the Open button to load the ﬁle into GBNT. To quit the window without opening a ﬁle, select the Cancel button.

If an object format file (.diag file extension) was specified, a warning window will pop up asking the user to verify the load since comments and macros will be lost. Press Yes to continue with the load, and press No to abort the load.

If the user elected to be notified of undefined points on the load operation, a window will pop up at this time showing the undefined points (if any exist) in the graphic being loaded (see Section 3-4.7).

Note

The Open function is not available in the online version. See Section 2.

3-2.3. Saving a Graphic

GBNT provides two functions for saving a graphic. These options are discussed below.

Using the Save Function

The Save function is used to save a currently loaded graphic. It writes both the .src and the .diag format of the graphic. If this option is used to save a previously saved file to the same name and directory, no window will display. For a first time save of a file, this option behaves identical to the Save As function (see description below).

If running GBNT online, the database information stored for each graphic is updated when it is saved. This information includes the system IDs used in the graphic and the macros used in the graphic, as well as the diagram name/description contained in the DIAGRAM graphic command (see “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for more information).

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 3-6 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-2. File Menu Options

Using the Save As Function

The Save As function saves the currently loaded graphic to the file name specified on the GBNT:Save As window. The GBNT:Save As window is used to save a previously saved graphic to a newdirectory or file name. This windowalso appears when the user selects the Save function for a first-time save of a graphic. This dialog is a blocking dialog, which means that once this dialog is displayed, you cannot do anything else in GBNT while the dialog is displayed.

Use the following procedure to save a graphic with the GBNT:Save As window:

1. Pull down the File menu on the main GBNT window.

2. Select Save (for a ﬁrst-time save of a graphic) or Save As (to save a previously saved ﬁle to a new directory/name). (If using the toolbars, Save is the third button on the GBNT:Main toolbar; see Section 2)

The GBNT:Save As window appears (Figure 3-3). Note that this window appears in a different way in the online version of GBNT (see Section 2).

Figure 3-3. GBNT:Save As Window

3. To specify the directory from which to save the ﬁle, pull down the Look in menu, and select a directory. The subdirectories for this directory will display in the list.

11/01 3-7 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-2. File Menu Options

4. Specify the file to save by selecting a file from the scrolling list, or type the name in the File name entry field. The file name must end with a “.src” or “.diag” extension. If saving an existing diagram, select the file to overwrite from the Files scrolling list.

It is recommended that the user choose a number as the diagram name. The valid diagram ranges are listed below:

Diagram Number Diagram Type Screen Type 1 - 699 System Window 700 - 989 Customer Window 990 - 999 System Window 1000 - 1999 System Main 2000 - 3999 Customer Main 4000 - 4999 System Main 5000 - 6999 Customer Main 7000 - 8499 Customer Window 8500 - 8999 System Window Note 1. Diagram 299 is a standard blank window. 2. Diagram 4999 is a standard blank main window.

Note

The file name extension (.src or .diag) is required for the save operation. Either format (.diag or .src) may be selected for the save. Both file formats will be written. For example, the user could enter “5432.src” or “5432.diag” in the File name entry field and “5432.src” and “5432.diag” would both be written.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 3-8 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-2. File Menu Options

5. Pull down the Save as type menu and select the type of ﬁle that it will be saved as. The only choice is Diag and Source ﬁles (*.diag and *.src).

6. Select the Save button to load the ﬁle into GBNT. To quit the window without opening a ﬁle, select the Cancel button.

Both the source and object file formats are saved. After the save is complete, the diagram remains on the screen until the user loads another graphic or manually unloads the current graphic with the New function (see Section 3-2.1).

If the user elected to be notified of undefined points on the load operation, a window will pop up at this time showing the undefined points if any exist in the graphic being loaded (see Section 3-4.7).

3-2.4. Printing

GBNT provides three print options that can be used together.

Prints the GBNT drawing canvas to the printer. No title/header is appended to the printout — it is just the drawing canvas area. The user simply pulls down the File menu, and selects Print.

The standard NT print mechanism is used to perform the print. It is assumed that you have a printer properly conﬁgured on your system.

Print Preview

Allows the user to see what will be printed before actually printing. This option is useful in determining when/if a change to the print setup is needed. Note that while the print preview window is displayed, the user cannot quit GBNT or resize the window.

11/01 3-9 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-2. File Menu Options

Print Setup

Displays the standard NT Print Setup window which allows the user to specify a printer, paper size, print mode, and so forth. See Figure 3-4

Figure 3-4. Standard NT Print Setup Window

The window has the following options:

• Name pull-down menu — Lists the names of the printers that are available for printing.

• Status — Gives status of printing (ready, processing, and so forth). • Type — Shows the type of printer to be used for the print. • Where — Shows the location of the printer being used. • Comment — Gives any comments about the printer. • Size pull-down menu — Lists size of the paper available to be used for printer (letter, 11 x 14, and so forth).

• Source pull-down menu — Determines the source of the paper (from where the paper is coming from). The choices are Automatically Select, Cassette, or Manually Feed.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 3-10 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-2. File Menu Options

• Orientation choice buttons — Allows the user to choose between Portrait (prints vertically) or Landscape (prints horizontally)

• Properties button — Displays another window that deﬁnes the ﬁelds on the Print Setup window.

• Network button — Displays another window that shows the network connections for the printers deﬁned.

Note that pressing the OK button does NOT send the ﬁle to print. It only conﬁrms the settings on the Print Setup window. To print, pull down the File menu, and select Print. To exit the Print Setup window without saving any changes, press the Cancel button.

3-2.5. Restoring the Original Diagram

The Restore Original menu item, found on the File menu, is used to restore the current graphic back to the last version loaded or manually saved. If no graphic is currently loaded, this menu item is inactive (grayed out). The last loaded/saved version will be restored no matter how many edits have occurred. Note that this overrides any autosaves that may have occurred since the last load or manual save (see Section 3-4.8 on Autosave).

Use the following procedure to use the Restore Original option.

1. Pull down the File menu on the main GBNT window.

2. Select Restore Original from the File menu.

The last manually saved version of the diagram displays.

3-2.6. Compiling Graphics

Compiling a ﬁle translates the source version (*.src) to the object version (*.diag). The following sections discuss compiling graphics ofﬂine. For information on compiling graphics online through the Ovation NT Developer Studio, see Section 2.

In the ofﬂine mode, the Compile menu item (on the File menu) displays the GBNT:Compile window for compiling one or more graphic .src ﬁles. This menu item and window are not available when running GBNT from within the Ovation Developer Studio.

11/01 3-11 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-2. File Menu Options

Use the following procedure to compile a graphic ofﬂine.

1. Pull down the File menu on the main GBNT window

2. Select Compile from the File menu. (If using the toolbars, Compile is the fourth button on the GBNT:Main toolbar; see Section 2).

The GBNT:Compile window appears (Figure 3-5).

Figure 3-5. GBNT:Compile Window

3. To specify the directory from which to ﬁnd the ﬁle to compile, pull down the Look in menu, and select a directory. The subdirectories for this directory will display in the list.

4. Specify the file to compile by selecting a file from the scrolling list, or type the name in the File name entry field.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 3-12 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-2. File Menu Options

5. Select a type of ﬁle to compile from the Files of type pull-down menu. The choices are:

Source files (*.src) — specifies a source file. If this is selected, only files with the “.src” file extensions are displayed in the list when directories are set/ changed.

Batch files (*.cmp) — specifies a batch file. If this is selected, only files with the “.cmp” file extensions are displayed in the list when directories are set/ changed.

If specifying a batch file, only one “.cmp” can be selected at a time for compile. However, the user can select multiple source files. To toggle a file’s selection status in the list, press the Control key and left-click. To select all files from the last selected file up to and including the current file, press the Shift key and left- click (standard file selection).

6. At the List Points check box, select this option to get a list of all the SYSIDs (process points) used in each graphic as part of the compile. Once selected, a checkmark appears in the box. To deselect this option, click on it again, and the checkmark disappears.

7. At the List Gcodes (hex) check box, select this option to get a hexadecimal listing of all of the source codes making up the output “.diag” ﬁle as part of the compile. Once selected, a checkmark appears in the box. To deselect this option, click on it again, and the checkmark disappears.

8. Select the Compile button to compile the ﬁle(s). To quit the window without opening a ﬁle, select the Cancel button.

11/01 3-13 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-2. File Menu Options

Once the Compile button is selected, the GBNT:Compilation Output window displays (Figure 3-6). Note that the List Gcodes box was checked in this example.

Figure 3-6. GBNT:Compilation Output Window

All compile output is written to both this window and to a list file. The list file name is displayed at the top of the GBNT:Compilation Output window. The list file name is derived from the file/file(s) being compiled. It is NOT configurable. As each file is being compiled, the full path filename is displayed in the output window.

If any errors are found, they are displayed immediately after the file name. If no errors are found, the name of the next diagram to compile displays. If the list points and/or the list gocodes (hex) check boxes are checked, the output is listed before a newdiagram is compiled. When all specified files have been compiled, the message “compilation complete” displays in the window footer.

3-2.7. Exit

Closes the GBNT application, checking for unsaved changes before exiting.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 3-14 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-3. View Menu Options

3-3. View Menu Options

The View menu options allow the user to display other windows related to GBNT. There are also certain options that allow the user to change the display of the drawing canvas (grid, handle/drag color, and so forth).

Figure 3-7. View Menu

11/01 3-15 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-3. View Menu Options

3-3.1. Toolbars

Toolbars provide quick access to the more frequently used GBNT windows and functions. The Toolbars pull-right menu allows the user to toggle the display of any of the toolbars. If there is a checkmark to the left of the menu item, that toolbar is currently displayed. If there is no checkmark, the toolbar is not displayed.

For more information on toolbars, see Section 2.

3-3.2. Diagram Conﬁguration

The GBNT:Diagram Conﬁguration window (see Figure 3-8) sets the display variables for the diagram. The variables deﬁned here affect how the diagram appears at the Ovation NT Operator Station.

To access the GBNT:Diagram Conﬁguration window, pull down the View menu on the main GBNT window, and select Diag Conﬁg.

Figure 3-8. GBNT:Diagram Conﬁguration Window

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 3-16 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-3. View Menu Options

The GBNT:Diagram Conﬁguration window displays the following options.

Type

Allows the user to define the diagram’s type. Choose one of the following options: • Main is the primary area for a diagram. Main screen diagrams can be resized at the Ovation NT Operator Station. • Subwindow displays a subwindow. On the NT platform, they are displayed within the main window in a split screen format. The user can configure the subwindow to be displayed in the top or bottom portion of the main screen. The initial width of the subwindow will correspond to the width of the main screen. The initial height will be a fixed 80 pixels. The user will have the ability to resize the width and height of the subwindow once displayed, but the aspect ratio of the diagram will be maintained. • Window displays menus, data entry fields, or other diagrams associated with a main diagram. Once the dimensions are set, the user cannot resize a window diagram at the Ovation NT Operator Station. • Control is used in conjunction with the Control Builder. See “Ovation NT Developer Studio User’s Guide” (NT-0060) for more information.

The default entry for Type is Main.

Associated Subwin #

If Subwindow is selected for Type, this is the number associated with the subwindow.

Name

Deﬁnes the name of the diagram. A maximum of 60 characters may be used.

Revision

Deﬁnes the revision level of the diagram. Valid range is 0 through 2,147,483,647.

11/01 3-17 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-3. View Menu Options

Update Rate

Deﬁnes how often the process diagram will update on the Ovation NT Operator Station. The update rate is the rate at which the foreground section of a graphic updates. The user may specify the update rate in seconds (1 through 60 is the valid range) using the entry ﬁeld when the Update Rate drop-down menu is set to seconds.

The user may also choose a deﬁned rate in tenths of a second (0.1 through 0.9) from the Update Rate drop-down menu. The default value is 1 second.

Position

Deﬁnes the position of the graphic window. The choice buttons determine whether or not the diagram will display at the same position as the last diagram displayed on the particular Ovation NT Operator Station window. Once the diagram initially displays, the user can move the diagram as desired.

Fixed — the diagram will not display at the same position. X and y coordinates must be entered (see below).

Default —the diagram will display at the same position. X and y coordinates are ignored.

x — x coordinate for the position of the upper left corner of the graphic window on the Ovation NT Operator Station at run-time. This parameter is ignored at run-time if the Default option is selected. Valid range is 0 through 1151.

y — y coordinate for the position of the upper left corner of the graphic window on the Ovation NT Operator Station at run-time. This parameter is ignored at run-time if the Default option is selected. Valid range is 0 through 899.

Size

Deﬁnes the size of the graphic window. The choice buttons determine whether or not the diagram will be sized to the dimensions of the last displayed graphic on the particular Ovation NT Operator Station window. Once the diagram initially displays, the user can resize the diagram as desired.

Fixed — the diagram will not be sized to the same dimensions. W and h dimensions must be entered (see below).

Default — the diagram will be sized to the same dimensions. W and h dimensions are ignored.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 3-18 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-3. View Menu Options

w — width of the canvas area of the graphic. This parameter is ignored at run-time if the Default option is selected. Valid range is 100 through 3200.

h — height of the canvas area of the graphic. This parameter is ignored at run-time if the Default option is selected. Valid range is 100 through 1200.

Background

Allows the user to select either a solid color for the background of a diagram or a bitmap image. The selection here determines the background of the NT Graphics Builder drawing canvas as well as the background of the diagram at the Ovation NT Operator Station. The default for this option is solid color white.

Color — Select any of the eight standard colors (black, blue, green, cyan, red, magenta, yellow, and white) or select a custom color (see Appendix A).

Bitmap — Bitmap background filename less the “.bmp” extension. When running GBNT in the offline mode, these files reside in [InstallationPath]/mmi/graphics/ cstfiles (where “InstallationPath” is a user-defined directory). When running GBNT from the Ovation Developer Studio, these files must be imported using the Import Graphics program (See Appendix D).

Zoomable (check box)

Determines whether or not zoom is permitted when a diagram displays on the Ovation NT Operator Station. If this check box is checked, zoom is permitted; if the box is not checked, zoom is not permitted. The default for this option is checked (zoomable).

Setting/Changing the Diagram Command Parameters

Use the following procedure to set or change the parameters on the GBNT:Diagram Conﬁguration window.

1. Pull down the View menu on the main GBNT window, and select Diagram Conﬁguration.

The GBNT:Diagram Conﬁguration window displays (see Figure 3-8).

2. From the Type drop-down menu, select one of the following diagram types: • Main window • Window

11/01 3-19 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-3. View Menu Options

• Control (not to be used by the user)

3. Enter the name of the diagram in the Name entry ﬁeld.

4. Enter a revision level for the diagram in the Revision entry ﬁeld.

5. From the Update Rate drop-down menu, select one of the following

Select one of the frequencies listed on the Update Rate menu. From this menu, the user only has the option of the fractional update rates listed.

-OR-

If the update rate is to be a whole number of seconds, select seconds on the Update Rate menu. Enter the seconds in the entry ﬁeld to the right of the menu. The entry ﬁeld is inactive (grayed out) if the user selects one of the fractional update rates.

6. Deﬁne the position of the graphic window with the Position choice buttons. The choices are:

Fixed —the diagram will not display at the same position. X and y coordinates must be entered (see below).

Default — the diagram will display at the same position. X and y coordinates are ignored.

(x) — x coordinate for the position of the upper left corner of the graphic window on the Ovation NT Operator Station at run-time.

(y) — y coordinate for the position of the upper left corner of the graphic window on the Ovation NT Operator Station at run-time.

7. Deﬁne the size of the graphic window with the Size choice buttons. The choices are:

Fixed — the diagram will not be sized to the same dimensions. W and h dimensions must be entered (see below).

Default —the diagram will be sized to the same dimensions. W and h dimensions ignored.

(w) — width of the canvas area of the graphic.

(h) — height of the canvas area of the graphic.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 3-20 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-3. View Menu Options

8. From the Background drop-down menu, select one of the following options:

• solid color — The Color scrolling list becomes active (the Bitmap list is grayed out). Select any of the eight standard colors (black, blue, green, cyan, red, magenta, yellow, and white) or any of the custom colors (seeAppendix A for more information on deﬁning custom colors).

• bitmap — Bitmap background filename less the “.bmp” extension. When running GBNT in the offline mode, these files reside in [InstallationPath]/ mmi/graphics/cstfiles (where “InstallationPath” is a user-defined directory). When running GBNT from the Ovation Developer Studio, these files must be imported using the Import Graphics program (See Appendix D).

9. At the zoomable toggle option, determine whether or not zoom is permitted when a diagram displays on the Ovation NT Operator Station. • Click on the option and a checkmark appears in the box. Zoom is permitted. • Click on the option again, and the checkmark disappears. Zoom is not permitted.

10. After all of the options on the GBNT:Diagram Conﬁguration window have been set, choose one of the following buttons:

Ok — Saves the selected settings, and quits the GBNT:Diagram Conﬁguration window.

Apply — Saves the selected settings, but the GBNT:Diagram Conﬁguration window remains open.

Cancel — Quits the GBNT:Diagram Conﬁguration window without saving any changes.

3-3.3. Integrated Source

This option displays the Integrated Source Editor which is discussed in detail in Section 7.

11/01 3-21 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-3. View Menu Options

3-3.4. Generic Text Editor

TextEdit is a generic, independent text editor package written to be used specifically to edit graphic source files. It is invoked solely from GBNT, but it is not part of GBNT. TextEdit is designed to provide a means to edit graphic source files in a more conventional editor package that supports cut-and-paste and free-form editing. Note that the GBNT:Integrated Source Editor is a command-based editor that requires inserting/editing a single command at a time and does not support cut-and-paste of source from other graphics.

TextEdit supports standard File, Open, Save, and Print functions, as well as Cut, Copy, Paste, and Undo. The standard Find and Replace functions have been enhanced to search in a circular loop (that is, it will NOT quit searching at the end of the ﬁle). Line number support has been added to TextEdit, as well as support for viewing graphic compile errors and support for subsequent recompilation.

Note

TextEdit is NOT part of GBNT; it is only invoked by GBNT. Once it is invoked, GBNT and TextEdit NEVER communicate again. When changes are made in TextEdit, the GBNT main window and the Integrated Source Editor do not update accordingly. To view the changes in GBNT, the graphics source file must be reloaded in GBNT. Recompiling the file from within TextEdit does NOT update a version of the file currently displayed/loaded in GBNT. TextEdit is designed to work only with graphic source files. Graphic Source files have a “.src” file extension. If the user attempts to open or save a file which does not have a “.src” file extension, an error will be generated and the open/save will be aborted. In the Ovation Developer Studio environment, TextEdit gives the user the ability to edit the graphic source files in the database without having to know where the files reside on disk. TextEdit can only be invoked from a graphic in the data base. It is not possible to bring up TextEdit with no graphic loaded, nor is it possible to create/ open a new graphic or switch to another graphic from within the TextEdit (online). Once TextEdit is running in the Ovation Developer Studio, the user only has access to the graphic from which it was invoked. When running GBNT offline, the user can open/create new graphics and/or switch to other graphics from within TextEdit.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 3-22 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-3. View Menu Options

Follow the steps below to access TextEdit from GBNT:

1. Pull down the View menu on the main GBNT window.

2. Select Generic Text Editor from the View menu. The TextEdit window appears (see Figure 3-9).

Figure 3-9. TextEdit Window

11/01 3-23 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-3. View Menu Options

If a graphic is currently loaded in GBNT when TextEdit is invoked, the graphic source file will be automatically compiled and then loaded into TextEdit. Any errors in the file are displayed in TextEdit’s Compile Output window. Almost all errors give a line number to the left of the error. Although line numbers are not displayed in the TextEdit view pane, line number support exists in the program. Go to the Search menu button, and select the Goto line# menu item to display the Goto Line# dialog. The total number of lines in the file is displayed in the dialog. Pressing the Goto button pages the TextEdit viewpane to the specified line, moves the cursor to the first character of the line, and highlights the given line in reverse video. Note that a blank line in the source has 0 characters, so the cursor will move to that line but nothing will be highlighted.

The Goto Line# dialog can be used in conjunction with the Compile Output dialog to view/correct errors. Go to the given line of an error, correct the error, repeat for the next error, and so on, until all errors are corrected. Then, press the Recompile button on the Compile Output window to recompile the entire file. All errors have been fixed when only the loaded filename displays in the compile output listbox. The file is automatically saved when the Recompile button is pressed.

Table 3-1 shows the differences between TextEdit and the Integrated Source Editor.

Table 3-1. Differences Between TextEdit and Integrated Source Editor TextEdit Integrated Source Editor Allows the user to make as many changes as Forces the user to add/edit a single command at a desired, without having to select/deselect time, and that command is compiled automatically one command at a time. Compilation after when the user deselects the command. Only the making changes in TextEdit occurs on affected command is compiled. demand by pressing the Recompile button on the Compile Output window. At that time, the entire file is compiled. Supports cut and paste of graphic source Does not support cut and paste of graphic source code. code. No handshaking occurs between GBNT and Constant handshaking occurs between the main TextEdit. In fact, there is no way to have any GBNT window and the Integrated Source Editor. GBNT window update after making When a change is made in the integrated source changes in TextEdit other than by saving the editor, the display in GBNT updates as soon as the file in TextEdit and then re-opening the command is deselected and compiled. When a updated file in GBNT. command is selected in the integrated source editor, special handles are displayed around the associated item (if applicable) in GBNT.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 3-24 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-3. View Menu Options

Table 3-1. Differences Between TextEdit and Integrated Source Editor (Cont’d) TextEdit Integrated Source Editor The Replace function does not prompt the The Replace function gives the user the choice to user before making the replace. be prompted at each occurrence found before the replace. Does not display line numbers in the view Displays line numbers in the view pane. pane. TextEdit does not contain an auto-save GBNT (and therefore the integrated source editor) feature. contains an auto-save feature. This may prevent the user from losing hours of changes if the program were to exit ungracefully.

3-3.5. Shape Library

This option displays the Shape Library which is discussed in detail in Section 6.

11/01 3-25 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-3. View Menu Options

3-3.6. Zoom

The Zoom menu (located off of the View menu on the main GBNT window) allows the user to change the magniﬁcation for viewing all or part of a graphic (see Figure 3-10).

Figure 3-10. Zoom Menu

Full View

Displays the entire graphic in the GBNT canvas. This the default view. It is what is displayed when the diagram is initially loaded.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 3-26 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-3. View Menu Options

Zoom by Corners

Zoom by Corners prompts the user to drag a rectangle to specify the area of a graphic to zoom in on. Aspect ratio of the graphic is not maintained. If this menu item is inactive (grayed out), you have already zoomed in as far as you can.

Use the following procedure to zoom by corners.

1. Pull down the View menu on the main GBNT window (Figure 3-10). Go to Zoom, and pull right to display another menu. Select Zoom by Corners.

2. Place the pointer on the drawing canvas. Press and hold the left mouse button, and drag a rectangle around the area in which to zoom.

3. Release the mouse button, and the desired area expands to the visible drawing canvas dimensions.

4. To return the diagram to its original setting, select the Full View menu option on the Zoom menu.

Zoom by Box

Zoom by Box displays a “view box” which, when placed over sections of the diagram, allows the user to expand that particular area. This method of zoom maintains the aspect ratio of the graphic because the zoom rectangle has the same aspect ratio as the graphic.

Use the following procedure to zoom by box.

1. Pull down the View menu on the main GBNT window (Figure 3-10). Go to Zoom, and pull right to display another menu. Select Zoom by Box.

11/01 3-27 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-3. View Menu Options

A small box displays with the pointer as shown below.

Note

The user can increase the size of the view box by pressing down the Control key and left-clicking when the view box initially displays. The user can decrease the size of the view box by right-clicking when the view box initially displays. 2. Without pressing any mouse buttons, move the box (by moving the pointer) to the area in which to zoom. As you move the mouse pointer on the GBNT canvas, the center of the zoom rectangle follows the mouse. You cannot move the zoom rectangle off the canvas.

3. When the box is positioned over the selected area, left-click on the drawing canvas.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 3-28 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-3. View Menu Options

The area that has been shown in the box expands to the zoom dimensions (see Zoom In/Out Factor for more information on zoom dimensions). See the ﬁgure below.

4. To return the diagram to its original setting, select the Full View menu option on the Zoom menu.

Zoom In

Zoom In allows the user to zoom in on the current view by a percentage (10%, 50%, and so forth; see Zoom In/Out Factor for more information on setting the zoom percentage). The center of the current view remains constant. Use the following procedure to zoom in on a graphic.

1. Pull down the View menu on the main GBNT window (Figure 3-10). Go to Zoom, and pull right to display another menu. Select Zoom In.

The entire drawing canvas expands by the percentage set on the GBNT:Zoom In/Out Factor (%) window. Note that increasing the zoom percentage causes the Zoom In function to zoom in by a larger amount and vice versa.

11/01 3-29 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-3. View Menu Options

Zoom Out

Zoom Out performs the opposite function of the Zoom In function. It allows the user to zoom out by a percentage (10%, 50%, and so forth; see Zoom In/Out Factor for more information on setting the zoom percentage). The center of the current view remains constant. Use the following procedure to zoom out on a graphic.

1. Pull down the View menu on the main GBNT window (Figure 3-10). Go to Zoom, and pull right to display another menu. Select Zoom Out.

The view zooms out from the current view based on the percentage set on the GBNT:Zoom In/Out Factor (%) window. Note that increasing the zoom percentage causes the Zoom Out function to zoom out by a larger amount and vice versa.

Note

You must Zoom In, Zoom by Box, Zoom by Corners, Zoom to Area, and so forth, before you can Zoom Out.

Zoom In/Out Factor

Zoom In/Out Factor allows the user to set the percentage of magniﬁcation for the Zoom In and Zoom Out functions. For example, a zoom factor of 25 indicates that the current view will increase in size by 25% each time the Zoom In function is selected.

Use the following procedure to change the zoom factor:

1. Pull down the View menu on the main GBNT window (Figure 3-10). Go to Zoom, and pull right to display another menu. Select Zoom In/Out Factor.

The GBNT:Zoom In/Out Factor (%) window displays (see Figure 3-11).

Figure 3-11. GBNT:Zoom In/Out Factor (%) Window

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 3-30 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-3. View Menu Options

2. To change the zoom percentage, position the pointer on the slidebar. Press and hold the left mouse button, and drag to move the slide on the zoom scale (to the right to increase, to the left to decrease). The zoom factor percentage updates as the slidebar moves.

3. After adjusting the slidebar, the zoom factor percentage change is immediate (that is, no OK or Apply button is necessary). To quit the GBNT:Zoom In/Out Factor (%) window, press the “x” button in the upper right corner of the window.

Recall

Recall displays the viewthat wasshownbefore or after the current viewwithinthe zoom queue. This menu item is inactive until the user performs a zoom operation. The user can repeatedly recall backward until the initial view is displayed or the ﬁrst entry in the queue is reached.

The maximum zoom queue size is ﬁve views. The zoom queue is emptied when the user loads a diagram, erases a diagram, or when the user starts up GBNT. A view is added to the end of the queue when the user performs one of the following actions: • Zoom In/Out. • Zoom by Box. • Zoom by Corners. • Zoom To Area. • Zoom to full view. When the queue is full and a newviewis selected, the viewat the beginning of the queue is removed to make room for the new view.

Use the following procedure to use the Recall function.

1. Pull down the View menu on the main GBNT window (Figure 3-10). Go to Zoom, and pull right to display another menu.

11/01 3-31 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-3. View Menu Options

2. Select the Recall menu item, and drag the pointer to the right to display another menu (see below).

3. Select one of the following options:

Backward — displays the previous view.

Forward — displays the newview.This menu item is not active (grayed out) if the user did not previously select Backward.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 3-32 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-3. View Menu Options

Deﬁne Area

Deﬁne Area allows the user to save the current view for quick retrieval. To use this option, follow the steps below.

1. Pull down the View menu on the main GBNT window (Figure 3-10). Go to Zoom, and pull right to display another menu.

2. Select the Deﬁne Area menu item, and drag the pointer to the right to display another menu. A list of numbers between 1 and 5 appears. See the ﬁgure below.

3. Select the area number for the deﬁned area (1 through 5).

The user may define up to five areas (these areas do not need to be sequentially saved). Once an area is defined, it may be accessed through the Zoom to Area option described below.

11/01 3-33 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-3. View Menu Options

Note

The deﬁned areas are only for the current editing session of a graphic. When the graphic is saved and exited (from GBNT), the deﬁned areas are lost.

Zoom to Area

Zoom to Area accesses the areas deﬁned in the Deﬁne Area option. To use this option, follow the steps below:

1. Pull down the View menu on the main GBNT window (Figure 3-10). Go to Zoom, and pull right to display another menu.

2. Select Zoom to Area from the Zoom menu, and drag the pointer to the right to display another menu. A list of numbers between 1 and 5 appears. See the ﬁgure below.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 3-34 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-3. View Menu Options

3. Select the desired area number. Only area numbers that have been deﬁned are active on this menu.

The retrieved view is placed within the zoom queue so that it will be included when Recall is selected.

3-3.7. Keyboard Repaint Order

Speciﬁes the order in which the keyboard section should be displayed on a refresh in relation to the background, foreground, and trigger diagram sections.

Use the following procedure to set Keyboard Repaint Order.

1. Pull down the View menu and select Keyboard Repaint Order. Pull right to display another menu.

2. Select one of the following choices:

• First indicates that the keyboard items (poke ﬁelds, OL buttons, OL choices, entry ﬁelds, and so forth) should be displayed before the background, foreground, and trigger sections (that is, the keyboard items will be displayed beneath background, foreground, and trigger sections).

• Last indicates that keyboard items should be displayed after the background, foreground, and trigger sections (that is, the keyboard items will be displayed on top of background, foreground, and trigger sections).

The default for this option is first. The user can change the ordering of the keyboard at any time during the edit session.

3-3.8. Handle/Drag Color

Displays the GBNT:Drag/Handle Color window, which is used to change the color of the display handles on selected items and to drag rectangles, lines, text, and so forth during the draw process. Sometimes, depending on the background color of the graphic or the items on the graphic, the handles are difﬁcult to see. This window can be used to select another color which will yield better contrast on the graphic.

Use the following procedure to set the drag/handle color.

1. Pull down the View menu, and select Handle/Drag Color.

11/01 3-35 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-3. View Menu Options

The GBNT:Drag/Handle Color window appears (see Figure 3-12).

Figure 3-12. GBNT:Drag/Handle Color Window

2. Select one of the colors from the color list (if other than the default is desired). The user can select any of the eight standard colors (black, blue, green, cyan, red, magenta, yellow, and white) or any of the custom colors (see Appendix A for more information on deﬁning custom colors).

Note

The drag/handle color is a function of the color selected and the color of what is on the graphic under the handle/drag lines. Therefore, selecting a new drag/handled color is a trial-and-error process. 3. After selecting a color in Step 2, the result is immediate (that is, no OK or Apply button is necessary). To quit the GBNT:Drag/Handle Color window, press the “x” button in the upper right corner of the window.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 3-36 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-3. View Menu Options

3-3.9. Coordinate Display

Deﬁnes where the current pointer coordinates should display on the main GBNT window, or if they should display at all.

Use the following procedure to set the Coordinate Display.

1. Pull down the View menu, and select Coordinate Display. Pull right to display another menu.

2. Select one of the following choices:

• Off indicates that the coordinates will not display on the main GBNT window. This is the default.

• Footer indicates that the coordinates will display in the lower right corner of the main GBNT window.

• Pop-up indicates that the coordinates will display in a pop-up window (GBNT:Coords window). This window can be moved anywhere on the main GBNT window and will remain open until the user closes it.

3-3.10. Grid

Allows the user to display a grid on the screen. This grid is not part of the ﬁnished graphic.

Since this option is a toggle, it is either on or off. To use this option, perform one of the following steps:

• To turn this feature on, pull down the View menu, and select Grid. A checkmark appears next to the item. A grid appears on the drawing canvas.

• To turn this feature off, pull down the View menu, and select Grid again. The checkmark disappears. The grid disappears.

To set the display parameters of the grid, select Grid Options from the View menu (see Section 3-3.11).

Note

When the Grid option is turned on, Snap is automatically turned on as well. If a grid is not used, snap is not used either.

11/01 3-37 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-3. View Menu Options

Snap

Snapping only occurs during drawoperations whena grid is displayed. No snapping occurs on move or copy functions. The Snap to Grid function (see Section 5) can be used to snap items currently not on grid points to the grid, but it is only available when a grid is displayed. When a grid is turned on, snapping is automatically enabled on future draw operations, and the Snap to Grid function becomes active when one or more items are selected. When a grid is turned off, snapping is automatically disabled and the Snap to Grid function becomes inactive.

When a grid of dots is displayed, all x, y mouse events on the drawing canvas snap to the nearest grid point during drawoperations. When a grid of lines is displayed, all x, y mouse events snap to the nearest intersection point of the grid lines during draw operations. For example, when drawing a rectangle, the user presses down with the left mouse button to mark the upper left corner of the rectangle. The position of the mouse pointer (and therefore the position of the upper left corner of the rectangle) will be mapped to the nearest grid point. As the user drags the pointer to deﬁne the lower right corner of the rectangle, the position of the pointer snaps to the nearest grid pint with each successive drag event. When drawing a line or polygon, each time the user moves the pointer, the position of the pointer snaps to the nearest grid point.

If one or more items are currently selected on the screen at the time a grid is displayed (turned on), those items will not automatically get snapped to the grid. The Snap to Grid function can be used to do this. Turning on the grid only affects future draw operations — it does not affect existing items.

The source editor functions are not affected by the grid. No snapping occurs if a new command is typed into the source editor window — even if a grid is currently displayed. For example, if the user enters a RECTANGLE command via the integrated source editor, the x, y, width, and height are used as entered (not snapped to grid points).

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 3-38 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-3. View Menu Options

3-3.11. Grid Options

The GBNT:Grid Options window allows the user to choose the display features of the grid.

Use the following procedure to set the grid options on the GBNT:Grid Options window.

1. Pull down the View menu on the main GBNT window, and select Grid Options.

The GBNT:Grid Options window displays (Figure 3-13).

Figure 3-13. GBNT:Grid Options Window

2. Choose if or how the grid will be displayed from the Display options. The choices are off, lines,ordots. The default is off. If off is selected, go to Step 8.

3. From the Order options, select ﬁrst if the grid is to be displayed beneath the items on the graphic. Select last if the grid is to be displayed on top of the items on the graphic. The default is first.

4. Choose a color for the grid lines/dots form the Color scrolling list. The user can select any of the eight standard colors (black, blue, green, cyan, red, magenta, yellow, and white) or any of the custom colors (see Appendix A for more information on deﬁning custom colors). The default for this option is black.

11/01 3-39 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-3. View Menu Options

5. Specify the type of pixels to use for the grid at the Units option. The choices are virtual and screen.

Virtual pixel grid cell dimensions change appropriately when you zoom/resize the graphic. Items snapped to the virtual cell grid will remain on the grid after a zoom/resize. When the virtual grid is displayed, virtual grid line/dot locations are converted to screen pixels. Due to the rounding that occurs when converting virtual to screen pixels, it is probable that the grid lines will not be evenly spaced as with the screen pixel grid. This will guarantee that items drawn to the grid at full view remain on the grid when zoomed in.

Screen pixel grids do not change when you zoom/resize the diagram. This means that if you snap items to the grid, they are not guaranteed to be on the grid after a zoom/resize.

6. Enter the width of the grid cells in width entry ﬁeld. The minimum screen grid cell width is 6 pixels; the minimum virtual grid cell width is the equivalent of 6 screen x pixels. These equivalents vary based on the canvas width and height. The maximum screen grid cell width is 1/4 the canvas width. The maximum virtual pixel grid cell width is 1/4(16,384) = 4096.

7. Enter the height of the grid cells in height entry ﬁeld. The minimum screen grid cell height is 6 pixels; the minimum virtual grid cell height is the equivalent of 6 screen y pixels. These equivalents vary based on the canvas width and height. The maximum screen grid cell height is 1/4 the canvas height. The maximum virtual pixel grid cell height is 1/4(16,384) = 4096.

8. After all of the options on the GBNT:Grid Options window have been set, choose one of the following buttons:

Ok — Saves the selected settings, and quits the GBNT:Grid Options window.

Apply — Saves the selected settings, but the GBNT:Grid Options window remains open.

Cancel — Quits the GBNT:Grid Options window without saving any changes.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 3-40 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-3. View Menu Options

3-3.12. Save Defaults

Used to save the current GBNT working environment. This includes the current windows displayed, the positions of the windows displayed, the parameters on the GBNT:Diagram Conﬁguration window, the current load/save directory, and the initial values for the following GBNT options: grid, drag/handle color, keyboard repaint order, coordinate display, autosave, undeﬁned points warnings, resize options, drag/draw constraint, and multi-draw mode.

After executing the Save Defaults function, these settings/windows will be restored the next time GBNT is started. The Windows NT registry is used to store and restore these values.

Follow the steps below to use the Save Defaults function:

1. Select the desired parameters on the GBNT:Diagram Conﬁguration window. Deﬁne what windows to display and the placement of these windows. Set any applicable GBNT options as desired.

2. Pull down the View menu on the main GBNT window.

3. Select Save Defaults from the View menu.

The deﬁned settings are saved. The next time GBNT opens, the settings will be used.

3-3.13. Browse OPC Points

Displays the GBNT:Browse OPC Pts dialog which is used to browse the available OPC servers for OPC points in order to then drag-n-drop the selected OPC point name to any point entry ﬁeld on any of the GBNT dialogs (see Section 2 for information on OPC points). This menu item is only available when running GBNT online from the Ovation Developer Studio.

To access the GBNT:Browse OPC Pts dialog, follow the steps below:

11/01 3-41 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-3. View Menu Options

1. From the online GBNT main window, pull down the View menu, and select Browse OPC Pts.

Note

The Main toolbar (Section 2) also shows the Browse OPC Pts icon when GBNT is running online. The GBNT: Browse OPC Pts window appears (see Figure 3-14).

Figure 3-14. GBNT:Browse OPC Pts Window

2. Select an OPC server from the Available OPC servers scrolling list.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 3-42 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-3. View Menu Options

The Available OPC Servers scrolling list contains all of the OPC servers you have access to from your computer. The available OPC servers are added to the NT Registry as part of the Ovation Developers Studio installation. If an entry in the list is grayed-out, that means that it is deﬁned in the NT Registry, but GBNT could not successfully connect to it.

3. Press the Browse OPC button to bring up the OPC Item Browser dialog (Figure 3-15).

Figure 3-15. OPC Item Browser Dialog

The OPC Item Browser dialog allows you to browse the currently selected OPC server from the list of available OPC servers. The information is implemented in a hierarchy. Click on the plus/minus signs to expand groups. Left-click on a leaf (the rightmost element that does not have a plus/minus sign to the left of it), to select an OPC point.

4. Select an OPC point in the hierarchy. The name will display in the Item ID ﬁeld at the bottom of the window. Press the OK button on the window to complete the browse.

5. Once the OK button is pressed, the OPC point name is copied to the OPC Point ﬁeld on the GBNT:Browse OPC Pts window. GBNT prepends the OPC point name with the expected “OPC$server$” string (where server is the selected OPC server) before making the copy (see Section 2 for information on point names).

11/01 3-43 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-3. View Menu Options

6. Once the fully qualified OPC point name is copied to the OPC Point field, you can drag-n-drop it into any valid entry field on any of the GBNT dialogs. The required leading and trailing backslash characters which specify a point name in graphics will be automatically added during the drag-n-drop operation. Note that if you cut-n-paste from the OPC Point field instead of performing a drag- n-drop, you will have to add the required backslash characters yourself in the GBNT entry fields. Also note that the OPC Point field is a read-only field; you cannot type into it.

Note

You cannot drag point names from the Item ID ﬁeld; only from the OPC Point ﬁeld. 7. To close the GBNT: Browse OPC Pts window, press the “x” button at the top right corner of the dialog.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 3-44 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-4. Conﬁguring Options Menu Items

3-4. Conﬁguring Options Menu Items

The Options pull-down menu defines some of the configurable parameters for the current edit session. Unlike the GBNT:Diagram Configuration window, the variable settings here apply only to the GBNT edit session.

Figure 3-16. Options Pull-Down Menu

11/01 3-45 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-4. Conﬁguring Options Menu Items

3-4.1. Resize Pin Point

Displays the resize pin point menu. The pin point speciﬁes what point on an object remains ﬁxed when the user drags a handle for resize.

Use the following procedure to set resize pin point.

1. Pull down the Options menu, and select Resize Pin Point. Pull right to display another menu.

2. Select one of the following choices:

• Center of object indicates that the center of the object remains ﬁxed. • Opposite handle indicates that the opposite side/corner remains ﬁxed.

3-4.2. Resize Aspect Ratio

Determines whether or not the aspect ratio (ratio of width and height) of any display item or group should be maintained on a resize operation. If this option is activated, the outlining rectangle will continually snap to the nearest coordinate that will maintain its proportions.

Use the following procedure to set resize aspect ratio.

1. Pull down the Options menu, and select Resize Aspect Ratio. Pull right to display another menu.

2. Select one of the following choices:

• Ignore indicates that the aspect ratio will not be maintained. • Maintain indicates that the aspect ratio will be maintained.

3-4.3. Resize Scale Factors

Sets the width and height scale factors which are used in conjunction with the Resize-by-factor function from the Edit menu (see Section 5 for more information). These factors determine the amount by which the selected item will be sized in the width and the height dimensions when the Resize-by-factor function is selected (you can only resize one item or group at a time by a factor). These factors are independent of one another, and can be set to any positive real number other than 0.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 3-46 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-4. Conﬁguring Options Menu Items

For example, if the width factor is set to 2.000 and the height factor is set to 0.500, then the item’s width will double and the height will be halved when resized by factor. The default for both of these factors is 2.000.

Use the following procedure to set the resize scale factors.

1. Pull down the Options menu, and select Resize Scale Factors. The GBNT:Scale Factors window displays.

Figure 3-17. GBNT: Scale Factors Window

2. Set the width by entering a positive real number, greater than 0, in the width entry ﬁeld.

3. Set the height by entering a positive real number, greater than 0, in the height entry ﬁeld.

4. After both of the options on the GBNT:Scale Factors window have been set, choose one of the following buttons:

Ok — Saves the selected settings, and quits the GBNT:Scale Factors window. (In addition, if exactly 1 item/group is currently selected, that item/group is scaled accordingly.)

Apply — Saves the selected settings, but the GBNT:Scale Factors window remains open. (In addition, if exactly 1 item/group is currently selected, that item/group is scaled accordingly.)

Cancel — Quits the GBNT:Scale Factors window without saving any changes.

11/01 3-47 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-4. Conﬁguring Options Menu Items

Note

3-4.4. Drag/Draw Constraint

This function controls the direction that the mouse pointer can be moved during Move and Duplicate functions, and/or on line and polygon draw functions.

Drag/Draw Constraint does not affect dragging/drawing rectangle-based items (bars, rectangles, poke ﬁelds, and so forth) or text-based items (text, process points, entry ﬁelds, and so forth). It does not affect dragging for resize or paste operations, and it has no affect when the user is in vertex edit mode (the vertex edit menu contains its own constraint pull-right menu; see Section 5).

Use the following procedure to set the drag/draw constraint.

1. Pull down the Options menu, and select Drag/Draw Constraint. Pull right to display another menu.

2. Select one of the following choices:

• None allows the user to drag an item or group without any restrictions during move/duplicate functions. It also allows the user to drag vertices without any restrictions during line/polygon drawing.

• Horz only allows horizontal dragging during move/duplicate functions. It also allows only horizontal AND vertical line segments (determined by whether delta x or delta y is greater) to be drawn during line/polygon draw mode. This option is identical to Vert for line/polygon drawing.

• Vert only allows vertical dragging during move/duplicate functions. It also allows only horizontal AND vertical line segments (determined by whether delta x or delta y is greater) to be drawn during line/polygon draw mode. This option is identical in function to Horz for line/polygon drawing.

The default for this option is none.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 3-48 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-4. Conﬁguring Options Menu Items

3-4.5. Multi-draw Mode

The Multi-draw Mode option allows the user to draw several items of one type without selecting the button on the GBNT:Draw toolbar each time. The default for this option is off, which means that only one item is drawn and then draw mode is cancelled. When Multi-drawMode is off, the toolbar button must be selected again if the user wishes to draw another of the same item.

If this option is on, the user may continue to drawthe selected item repeatedly until deselecting the Multi-draw Mode option. If the draw item has an associated parameter dialog, it allows you to repeatedly draw the item without having to press the OK/Apply buttons on the parameter dialog.

To turn Multi-draw mode on, left-click the ﬁrst button (from left) on the GBNT:Draw toolbar.

If Multi-draw Mode is on and the user selects a new button from the GBNT:Draw toolbar, the multi-draw option remains in effect with the newly speciﬁed item. Whenever a button is selected (whetherin multi-drawmode or regular drawmode), a message appears in the left footer of the main window displaying the current draw mode. As soon as the user exits draw mode, the message clears.

When Multi-drawmode is turned on, the user cannot select or deselect items, move items, resize items, and so forth until exiting out of drawmode. The only events that are processed during draw mode are those used to draw the current item.

You can manually exit multi-draw mode and return to normal selection by one of the following methods:

• Press the Esc (Escape) key on the keyboard. • Select the Select Mode menu item on the Edit menu. • Press the Select Mode toolbar button on the Edit toolbar.

11/01 3-49 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-4. Conﬁguring Options Menu Items

3-4.6. Undeﬁned Points

Displays the GBNT:Dummy Point List window with a list of the system IDs used in the graphic, but not yet defined in the Ovation NT database. When running GBNT offline, GBNT is not communicating with any database, so all point names (other than $pointer names and OPC points) are interpreted as dummy points. These may be fully qualified with a unit and network name or they may be unqualified (see Section 2). If the dummy point name does not begin with an alphabetic character, or if it contains any characters other than alphanumerics, it must be delimited with backslashes. If it is a fully qualified name, it must be delimited with backslashes.

Dummy points allow a diagram to be created and compiled before the points are added to the Ovation database. When dummy points are displayed in a graphic at runtime, they are inactive and have no value. Therefore, ﬁnal testing of the diagram cannot take place until the dummy points are added to the Ovation database and the diagram is recompiled and redisplayed. All dummy points should be resolved into database points before the diagram is executed at runtime.

Follow the steps below to access the GBNT:Dummy Point List window.

1. Pull down the Options menu on the main GBNT window.

2. Selected Undeﬁned Pts from the Options menu.

The GBNT:Dummy Point List window displays (Figure 3-18).

Figure 3-18. GBNT:Dummy Point List Window

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 3-50 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-4. Conﬁguring Options Menu Items

This window contains a scrolling list of the undeﬁned points currently used in the graphic. Press the Print button to print this list to the printer via the standard NT print mechanism. Press the Update Button to recheck the graphic for dummy points and rebuild the list. The count ﬁeld in the upper right corner of the window shows how many points exist in the scrolling list.

This list is updated at the following times:

• Every time the GBNT:Dummy Point List window is displayed. • When the diagram is saved/loaded depending on the setting for the Undeﬁned Points Warning (Section 3-4.7).

• On demand when the user presses the Update button.

In addition, the GBNT:Dummy Point List window is cleared when the New menu item is selected from the File menu.

If conﬁgured, GBNT displays a notice window on all save/load operations if the graphic contains undeﬁned points (see Section 3-4.7). The user must acknowledge the notice window before the load or save occurs.

11/01 3-51 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-4. Conﬁguring Options Menu Items

3-4.7. Undeﬁned Points Warning

Allows the user to choose if or when to be informed of undeﬁned points in a graphic.

Use the following procedure to set the undeﬁned points warning.

1. Pull down the Options menu, and select Undeﬁned Pts Warning.

2. Pull to the right to display another menu with four choices:

• off — do not inform the user of undefined points. • load only — inform the user during the file load/open process only. • save only — inform the user during the file save process only. • both — inform the user during both file save and load/open.

3-4.8. AutoSave

Saves all changes to an opened graphic after the number of edits speciﬁed in the GBNT:AutoSave Frequency window has been met (Section 3-4.9).

Since this option is a toggle, it is either on or off. To use this option, perform one of the following steps:

• To turn this feature on, pull down the Options menu, and select Autosave. A checkmark appears next to the item. Changes will automatically be saved to the graphic.

• To turn this feature off, pull down the Options menu, and select Autosave again. The checkmark disappears. Changes will not be automatically saved.

The default for this option is off.

Note

Select the Restore Original menu item (Section 3-2.5) on the File menu to override any autosaves that have occurred since you last loaded the graphic.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 3-52 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-4. Conﬁguring Options Menu Items

3-4.9. AutoSave Frequency

Speciﬁes how many edit operations must occur before the graphic saves. This option is only valid when the Autosave option is on (Section 3-4.8).

Use the following procedure to set the autosave frequency.

1. Pull down the Options menu, and select AutoSave Frequency.

The GBNTAutoSave Frequency window appears (see Figure 3-19).

Figure 3-19. GBNT:AutoSave Frequency Window

2. Enter a value in the # edits entry ﬁeld. Use the increment/decrement buttons to adjust the value, if necessary. Valid range is 1 through 100 (the default is 25).

3. Select the Ok button to save the setting and quit the GBNT:AutoSave Frequency window. Press Cancel to quit the window without saving any settings.

11/01 3-53 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-4. Conﬁguring Options Menu Items

3-4.10. Conditional Word Wrap

The Conditional Word Wrap menu gives the user the ability to control how many characters will be displayed per line in one of the following windows when it is displayed from the Properties function:

GBNT:Color, GBNT:Blink, GBNT:Fill Pattern, GBNT:Line Patterns, GBNT:Text, GBNT:Process Point, and GBNT:Shape Library (when not out for edit).

Note

This function is NOT used to control the word wrap when the user is typing a conditional in the window fields. It is NOT used in the integrated source editor. It is only used for displaying existing conditionals on windows during a Properties function. See Section 5 for information on the Properties function. To set the conditional word wrap, pull down the Options menu on the main GBNT window, and select Conditional word wrap. Pull-right to display the following choices: • width of field (word wrap at the number of columns available in the given conditional text field. Note that each conditional text field is a different width) • 60 columns • 80 columns • 91 columns • 100 columns • max columns (132) The currently selected setting has a black dot to the left of the menu item. There are no corresponding toolbar buttons for this menu.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 3-54 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 3-4. Conﬁguring Options Menu Items

Setting conditional word wrap is a cosmetic issue only. When a conditional is displayed on the window, the conditional text is translated from the source code in the object file. During this process, the conditional is fully parenthesized and one long contiguous text string is generated. The word wrap setting determines the initial line break point(s) in the translated conditional string when it is being displayed. Tokens are never split between lines, so if the initial line break point would split a token, the algorithm that splits the conditional scans back to find the first break point that would not split a token. If that is not possible, the algorithm scans ahead from the initial break point. This setting does not specify an absolute number of columns/characters per line. It specifies a request for a certain number of columns when displaying.

In addition, complex conditionals (that is, conditionals that begin/end with {,}) have some special formatting that overrides this setting. Each individual conditional within the complex conditional begins on a new line. These individual conditionals will word wrap according to the current word wrap setting, but the overall complex conditional does not.

3-4.11. Macro notes and Parameter Descriptions

The GBNT:Macro Notes & Parameter Descriptions dialog is used to interactively create/edit the macro parameter descriptions/labels, and to interactively create/edit macro notes/comments. This item is discussed in detail in Section 4-28.

3-4.12. Undeﬁned Description Warnings

GBNT can display a warning message if you attempt to save a macro graphic when there are undefined descriptions/labels for the macro parameters (remember that description/labels are not required). This will happen even if you never open the GBNT:Macro Notes & Parameter Descriptions window (if you configure GBNT to give these warnings). These warnings can be enabled/disabled via the Undefined description warnings menu item.

Follow the steps below to use this menu item:

1. Pull down the Options menu on the main GBNT window.

2. Select Undeﬁned description warnings. (Note that this menu item will be inactive (grayed out) whenever the Macro Notes/Param Descriptions menu item is inactive.

If there is a check mark beside the menu item, the warnings are enabled. If there is no check beside the menu item, the warnings are disabled.

11/01 3-55 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C Section 4. Drawing Graphics

4-1. Section Overview

This section describes the procedures for setting the attribute options and drawing graphics. The following topics are discussed: • Setting drawing attributes (Section 4-2). — Drawing Attributes Toolbar Elements (Section 4-2.1). — Deﬁning Place (Section 4-2.2). — Setting Color (Section 4-2.3). — Setting Font Attributes (Section 4-2.4). — Setting Fill Attributes (Section 4-2.5). — Setting Line Patterns (Section 4-2.6). — Setting Line Widths (Section 4-2.7). — Setting Blink (Section 4-2.8). • Draw button reference list for background, foreground, and trigger items (Section 4-3). • Draw items (background, foreground, trigger) (Section 4-4 through Section 4-28). • Draw button reference list for keyboard items (Section 4-29). • Draw items (keyboard) (Section 4-30 through Section 4-37).

11/01 4-1 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-2. Setting Drawing Attributes

4-2. Setting Drawing Attributes

The GBNT:Drawing Attributes toolbar is used to set the attributes of the display items on the graphic. Default settings exist for all of the attributes.

4-2.1. Drawing Attributes Toolbar Elements

The GBNT:Drawing Attributes toolbar contains the following elements, illustrated in Figure 4-1 and described in Table 4-1.

3 5 7

1 2 4 6 8

Figure 4-1. GBNT:Drawing Attributes Toolbar

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-2 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-2. Setting Drawing Attributes

Table 4-1. Drawing Attributes Toolbar Elements Key Description 1 Display/Set Active Place– Allows the user to set the desired place to draw graphics. See Section 4-2.2 for information on defining place. 2 Sets/Shows Source Line #– Allows the user to specify a source line number within the place specified. This source line number and the place must always match. 3 Change Place– Allows the user to change the place originally specified for selected drawitems. One or more drawitems must be selected on the main GBNT window drawing canvas. Once this button is pressed, GBNT puts the item(s) on the source line number. If the user changes the place, the source line number updates to the last line of that section. Note that no warning message will display; the change will be immediate. 4 Color – Displays the GBNT:Color window used to set the color attribute. See Section 4-2.3. 5 Font Attributes – Displays the GBNT:Font Attributes window which is used to set the font attributes. See Section 4-2.4. 6 Fill Patterns – Displays the GBNT:Fill Pattern window which is used to set the fill pattern attribute. See Section 4-2.5. 7 Line Patterns – Displays the GBNT:Line Patterns window which is used to set the line pattern attribute. See Section 4-2.6. 8 Line Width – Displays the GBNT:Line Width window which is used to set the line width attribute. See Section 4-2.7.

11/01 4-3 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-2. Setting Drawing Attributes

4-2.2. Deﬁning Place

The Place of an item in a graphic is deﬁned by the section where the associated command exists in the source ﬁle and/or by the source line number within that section.

There are five different sections which make up graphic files: Diagram, Background, Foreground, Trigger, and Keyboard. See Table 4-2 for a definition of each section.

Table 4-2. Place Options Place Deﬁnition Background The commands in the background section are executed when the diagram is ﬁrst displayed, and every time a window expose event is generated for the given graphic on the Ovation NT Operator Station. Items placed in the background section do not update periodically. Note that Background is the default place.

The following draw items from the GBNT:Draw toolbar can be used in the Background section: Arc, Rubberband Line/Arc, Line, Rubberband Line, Circle, Ellipse, Polygon, Rectangle, Dot, OL Rectangle, OL Gauge, OL Cylinder, Bar, Plot, XY Plot, Dynamic Line/Polygon, Trend, Time, Date, Group Text, Process Point, Text, Shape, Macro. These items are described in Section 4-4 through Section 4-27. Diagram The commands in the diagram section are executed only one time — when the diagram is initially displayed. Diagram initialization commands, (such as POINTER, PTR_VALUE,DEF_QUAL, and so forth) are typically in this section (see “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for information on these commands). Display items are not allowed in this section, with the exception of macros. The Macro draw item is the only item that can be used in the Diagram section. Macro display items are transparently dissociated into the individual foreground, background, trigger and keyboard sections. See Section 4-27 for more information on macros.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-4 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-2. Setting Drawing Attributes

Table 4-2. Place Options (Cont’d) Place Deﬁnition Foreground The commands in the foreground section of the diagram are executed when the diagram initially displays and periodically thereafter depending on the setting for Update Rate on the GBNT: Diagram Conﬁguration window (see Section 3 for more information on this window). Foreground should be selected for items (such as process point, date, time, and so forth) that should update on a diagram.

The following draw items from the GBNT:Draw toolbar can be used in the Foreground section: Arc, Rubberband Line/Arc, Line, Rubberband Line, Circle, Ellipse, Polygon, Rectangle, Dot, OL Rectangle, OL Gauge, OL Cylinder, Bar, Plot, XY Plot, Dynamic Line/Polygon, Trend, Time, Date, Group Text, Process Point, Text, Shape, Macro. These items are described in Section 4-4 through Section 4-27. Trigger The commands in a trigger section are executed on demand only. A trigger section can be invoked from an application program (122 -Exec Trigger), or from the TRIG_ON command (see “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for more information on TRIG_ON and Exec Trigger). A trigger section is executed once per demand. If the TRIG_ON command or the call to run program 122 is in the foreground section of the diagram, then the trigger can be executed periodically just like the foreground. There can be a maximum of 254 trigger sections (trigger 1 ... trigger 254). A trigger number is associated with each trigger section, and that number is a parameter to program 122 and the TRIG_ON command.

The following draw items from the GBNT:Draw toolbar can be used in the Trigger section: Arc, Rubberband Line/Arc, Line, Rubberband Line, Circle, Ellipse, Polygon, Rectangle, Dot, OL Rectangle, OL Gauge, OL Cylinder, Bar, Plot, XY Plot, Dynamic Line/Polygon, Trend, Time, Date, Group Text, Process Point, Text, Shape, Macro. These items are described in Section 4-4 through Section 4-27. Keyboard The Keyboard section defines the operator interfaces to the diagram. Poke fields, entry fields, OL choices, OL check boxes, OL sliders, OL event menus, OL buttons, and macros can be placed in this section.

The following draw items from the GBNT:Draw toolbar can be used in the Keyboard section: Macro, Poke Field, Entry Field, OL Slider, OL Check Box, OL Choice, OL Button, OL Event Menu, Function Key These items are described in Section 4-29 through Section 4-37.

11/01 4-5 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-2. Setting Drawing Attributes

The Display/Set Active Place pull-down menu and the Line # entry field are used to set the place for current and future draw operations. The pull-down menu specifies which section new items will be added to in the graphic; the source line number entry field specifies where in the given section new items will be added (that is, the line on which the new command will be added).

The Line # entry field updates accordingly when the diagram section/place that is defined in the drop-down menu changes. The line number automatically updates to the end of the selected diagram section. The line number must be within the valid range for the selected diagram section. This field specifies which line within the given section future drawoperations willoccur on. The user may manually insert a drawitem at a certain line in the source code by entering the applicable number in the entry field. However, if the desired line number is within a different section/ place, the user must change the place drop-down menu first, and then set the number within that place.

The Change Place button allows the user to change the place originally speciﬁed for selected draw items. To use this function, select the items that you want to change the place for. Then, set the Display/Set Active Place pull-down menu and/ or the Line # entry ﬁeld to where you want to move the selected items to. Then press the Change Place button. The selected items will be automatically moved to that section.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-6 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-2. Setting Drawing Attributes

4-2.3. Setting Color

The GBNT: Color dialog is used to interactively set or change the current drawing colors for items on a graphic. The color values and optional conditionals are set/ changed from this window. This dialog is also used to set/change the default $COLORn and $OL_COLORn variable display values used by GBNT.

There are four different types of color available in graphics: • Foreground (FG) Color — primary color for most items on a graphic. It is used for all solid line drawings, for all solid fills, for the characters in text, for the set bits (that is, bits = 1) of line and fill patterns, and to display bar, plot, trend, etc. current values. • Background (BG) Color — used for the clear bits (that is, bits = 0) in line and fill patterns and for the background of each character cell in vector_over and bitmap_over type text. Vector and bitmap type text does not use BG color. • Erase (ER) Color — used only at runtime to erase dynamic items (bars, shapes, OL Checkboxes, OL Sliders, and OL Cylinders) as their value changes. It is used to draw the unfilled (invisible) portion of a bar. It is used to erase the existing shape when a shape changes as a result of a conditional expression change. It is used to erase the portion of a checkmark which extends outside of the box for the OL checkbox when the user selects a new box. It is used to erase the slider control as the user drags/moves the control for the OL Slider. It is used to erase some intermediate drawing for the OL Cylinder. It is never used by GBNT to display items. • OL (3D item) Color — used to draw OL Rectangles, OL Cylinders, OL Sliders, OL Checkboxes, OL Event Menus, OL Gauges, OL Choices, and OL Buttons.

The FG, BG, and ER colors can be set to any of the eight standard colors (black, blue, green, cyan, red, magenta, yellow, and white) or any color listed in the system colors.txt file. This file is read at the startup of GBNT, and all of the color scrolling lists in GBNT are generated from this file. The FG, BG, and ER colors are specified by color names (red, green, blue, and so forth). The number of colors specified in the colors.txt file is unlimited.

The OL color choices are also read from the colors.txt file at startup. However, GBNT limits you to five OL color choices. The OL color choices in the file can be any of the standard eight colors or any of the color names defined in the file. The OL color in a graphic is specified by an ordinal index (0 through 4) as defined in the colors.txt file as opposed to an ASCII name.

11/01 4-7 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-2. Setting Drawing Attributes

Use the following procedure to set the color attribute.

1. From the GBNT:Drawing Attributes toolbar, select the Color button (#4 in Figure 4-1).

The GBNT:Color window displays (see Figure 4-2).

Figure 4-2. GBNT:Color Window

2. A type pull-down menu exists for each of the four color types. From the type pull-down menu you can set the FG, BG, and ER color to a $COLORn variable instead of a color name. You can also set the OL color to a $OL_COLORn variable instead of the standard 0 - 4 index.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-8 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-2. Setting Drawing Attributes

$COLORn and $OL_COLORn variables are used to tagout colors which will be input parameters to a macro (see Section 4-27 for information on macros).

When you select the $COLORn choice from the FG, BG, or ER type pull-down menu, the scrolling list of color names is replaced by a scrolling list of $COLORn variables. Likewise, when you select $OL_COLORn from the type pull-down menu, the choice of OL colors is replaced by a a scrolling list of $OL_COLORn variables. In both cases, the ﬁnd entry ﬁeld is removed (see below).

11/01 4-9 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-2. Setting Drawing Attributes

3. The find entry field is used to locate a color in the associated scrolling list by typing the name instead of manually scrolling and selecting. If you know the color name, enter it in the entry field. If GBNT finds the color in the list, it will automatically scroll to that color and select it.

The find entry field will not locate a color in the list unless you type it completely. GBNT does not attempt to finish the color name for you as you enter it.

GBNT will warn you if there is an invalid color name in the FG, BG, or ER find fields when you press the OK or Apply buttons. The warning message states that what is in the find field will be ignored, and the currently selected color in the scrolling list will be used instead. A color will always be selected in the scrolling list.

4. To set the foreground color, pull down the type menu and select either color or $COLORn. Then select a color name or color variable from the scrolling list. (Use the ﬁnd entry ﬁeld to type in a color name, if desired.) The default FG color is black.

The color names listed in the scrolling list are from the system colors.txt file. The number of colors specified in the colors.txt file is unlimited. There is a maximum of 100 $COLORn variables available. $COLORn variables are used to tagout colors which will be input parameters to a macro.

5. To set the background color, pull down the type menu and select either color or $COLORn. Then select a color name or color variable from the scrolling list. (Use the ﬁnd entry ﬁeld to type in a color name, if desired.) The default BG color is white.

6. To set the erase color, pull down the type menu and select either color or $COLORn. Then select a color name or color variable from the scrolling list. (Use the ﬁnd entry ﬁeld to type in a color name, if desired.)

The default ER color is white if a bitmap is specified for the diagram background on the GBNT:Diagram Configuration window at startup (see Section 3). If a color is specified for the diagram background at startup, that color is used as the default ER color.

Erase color has no meaning within GBNT. It is used for the display of bars and shapes on the process diagram at the Ovation NT Operator Station. Erase color is used to clear/erase the previous value of a bar graph when the value changes. It also erases the previous shape displayed when a shape conditional becomes true.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-10 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-2. Setting Drawing Attributes

7. To set the OL color, pull down the type menu, and select either OLcolor or $OL_COLORn.

If type is set to OLcolor, select one of the five (numbered 0 through 4) OL color choice buttons. The black dot in the middle of one of the boxes indicates the selected OL color. The colors and numbers are defined by the OL color choice index in the colors.txt file (see Appendix A for more information on this file). The default OL color is that which is defined for OL_COLOR 0 in the colors.txt file.

If type is set to $OL_COLORn, select a variable from the scrolling list. There is a maximum of 100 such variables available. $OL_COLORn variables are used to tagout OL colors which will be input parameters to a macro.

8. A conditional statement allows the value of a parameter in a graphics command to change based upon a speciﬁed condition. Conditional statements can be entered for FG, BG, ER, and OL colors.

— To deﬁne a conditional, place the cursor in the entry ﬁeld beside the scrolling list of the desired color placement (FG, BG, ER, or OL). — Enter the conditional statement according to the rules in “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091).

— To clear or erase the conditional statement, press the applicable clear button beside the entry ﬁeld. 9. After all colors have been selected, and conditional statements have been entered, select one of the following buttons:

Ok — Saves the selected settings, and quits the GBNT:Color window.

Apply — Saves the selected settings, but the GBNT:Color window remains open.

Fg <...> Bg — Swaps the foreground and background colors. It also swaps foreground and background conditionals if they exist. If any items are currently selected on the graphic when this button is pressed, the color change is automatically applied to them.

Cancel — Quits the GBNT:Color window without saving any changes.

Help — Displays help information on this topic.

11/01 4-11 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-2. Setting Drawing Attributes

Hide ER/Show ER Button and Hide OL/Show OL Buttons

These buttons give you the ability to toggle on/off the display of the ER and/or OL color items on the GBNT:Color window. The default GBNT:Color window will display all four color choices. The ER and OL color will always be deﬁned and active whether they are currently displayed on the color dialog or not.

If the ER and OL color data is currently displayed on the dialog, the Hide ER and Hide OL buttons are used to hide the ER and OL color data respectively. When ER and OL color data is hidden, the button labels change to Show ER and Show OL respectively.

Use the Save Defaults function on the View menu (Section 3) to store the ER and OL display states on the color dialog and to restore the settings each time GBNT is invoked.

$color values Button

This button is used to set/change the default $COLORn variable display values. Unlike any of the other types of parameters that can be tagged out in a macro (for example, $Dn, $Tn, $SETn, and so forth), $COLORn tagouts must be assigned values in order to display the macro graphic in GBNT (otherwise, GBNT would not know what color to use for the variables). In addition, you must conﬁgure the default colors to display the $COLORn items in the macro itself.

To set or change $COLORn values, follow the steps below:

1. Press the $color values button on the GBNT:Color window. The $COLORn display values window displays (Figure 4-3).

Figure 4-3. $COLORn Display Values Window — showing default values

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-12 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-2. Setting Drawing Attributes

GBNT defaults the display values for all $COLORn tagouts to black.

2. Click on the $COLORn value that you want to change and a button displays at the right of the value column as shown below.

3. Click on the button, and the Select $COLORn value window displays (Figure 4-4).

Figure 4-4. Select $Colorn value Window

In the Select $COLORn value window, notice that the current color setting is selected in the scrolling list.

11/01 4-13 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-2. Setting Drawing Attributes

4. Select a color from the scrolling list, and press the OK button.

The new color will be displayed in the table of the default $COLORn settings (see below).

5. Execute the Save Defaults function (Section 3) after setting the display values for $COLORn so that you will not have to reset the values each time you bring up GBNT.

$OL_color values Button

This button is used to set/change the default $OL_COLORn variable display values. Unlike any of the other types of parameters that can be tagged out in a macro (for example, $Dn, $Tn, $SETn, and so forth), $OL_COLORn tagouts must be assigned values in order to display the macro graphic in GBNT (otherwise, GBNT would not know what color to use for the variables). In addition, you must conﬁgure the default colors to display the $OL_COLORn items in the macro itself.

To set or change $OL_COLORn values, follow the steps below:

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-14 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-2. Setting Drawing Attributes

1. Press the $ol_color values button on the GBNT:Color window. The $OL_COLORn display values window displays (Figure 4-5).

Figure 4-5. $OL_COLORn Display Values Window — showing default values

GBNT defaults the display values for all $OL_COLORn tagouts to OL color 0.

2. Click on the $OL_COLORn value that you want to change and a button displays at the right of the value column as shown below.

11/01 4-15 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-2. Setting Drawing Attributes

3. Click on the button, and the Select $OL_Colorn value window displays (Figure 4-6).

Figure 4-6. Select $OL_Colorn value Window

In the Select $OL_COLORn value window, notice that the current OL color choice is selected on the dialog.

4. Select a color from the color indices, and press the OK button.

The new color will be displayed in the table of the default $OL_COLORn settings (see below).

5. Execute the Save Defaults function (Section 3) after setting the display values for $OL_COLORn so that you will not have to reset the values each time you bring up GBNT.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-16 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-2. Setting Drawing Attributes

4-2.4. Setting Font Attributes

The GBNT:Font Attributes dialog is used to set the text/font attributes for the following items: Text, Time, Date, Multi-Text, Group Library Text, Process Point, Entry Field, OL Event Menu, OL Choice, and OL Button. Font attributes are only applicable to OL Choice and OL Button items which have text (as opposed to shape) labels.

Two font types are available for graphics: bitmap and vector text.

Bitmap Text — Bitmap text does not scale on a zoom/resize operation.

The available bitmap text sizes are defined by the eight font sizes found in the fonts.txt file. The user may change the font sizes (valid range for font sizes is 1 pt. to 200 pt. text type) if eight sizes are defined in the file. See Appendix A for more information on this file.

Bitmap_Over Text — Bitmap_Over text is the same as bitmap text but uses the overstrike option. This means that both the foreground and background of each character cell making up the text string are drawn. If the overstrike option is not used, only the foreground of each character cell making up the text string is drawn on the canvas.

The overstrike option should always be used with changing characters such as process point values and text conditionals. A conditional may be written to have text change on the process diagram depending on the conditions in the plant. If the overstrike option is not used, the new text will not cover the old text (the lines for the old text will still be seen because only the foreground of the text is drawn). If the overstrike option is used, the new text will cover the old text since it has a background associated with it.

Vector Text — Vector text scales on zoom/resize operations. Users specify the font size for vector text by deﬁning the pixel dimensions (width and height) of the character cells. The valid virtual pixel range for characters is 3 through 16,383.

Vector_Over Text —Vector_Over text is the same as vector text but uses the overstrike option. This means that both the foreground and background of each character cell making up the text string are drawn. If the overstrike option is not used, only the foreground of each character cell making up the text string is drawn on the canvas.

11/01 4-17 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-2. Setting Drawing Attributes

Note

When GBNT attempts to create/get a font of a particular size in NT, it is only a request. The NT font mapper attempts to ﬁnd the font in the requested size, but will provide the closest match if the exact font is not found. GBNT has no control over this. The font mapper searches by height ﬁrst and then by width. If the height exists, the font mapper returns that font whether it matches the width or not.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-18 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-2. Setting Drawing Attributes

Using Bitmap and Bitmap_Over Text

1. From the GBNT:Drawing Attributes toolbar, select the Font button (#5 in Figure 4-1).

The GBNT:Font Attributes window displays.

2. Pull down the Type menu, and select the type of text used for the graphic. For these procedures, select Bitmap.

3. When Bitmap is selected for Type, the GBNT:Font Attributes window appears as shown below. Note that while the font is not conﬁgurable for bitmap text, the font that will be used is “Courier New”.

Figure 4-7. GBNT:Font Attributes Window — Showing Bitmap Font Type

4. Go to the overstrike checkbox and check this box if you want both the foreground and background of a character cell drawn when the text is displayed. If this box is not checked, only the foreground displays. This box should always be used with text conditionals.

5. Pull down the Size menu, and select a number that corresponds to a point size defined in the custom file, fonts.txt (see Appendix A for more information on this file). The menu choices are 1 through 8.

11/01 4-19 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-2. Setting Drawing Attributes

As you select a new font size from this list, the display in the sample area updates to showyou whatthe current font looks like in this size. The character width and height (in virtual pixels) associated with each of the eight sizes in the list displays in the char w and char h entry ﬁelds when you select a new entry in the list. This occurs whether or not the char w and char h ﬁelds are active.

6. At the Sample entry ﬁeld, the user can type words/letters to see how the font will appear on the drawing canvas. The sample string may be up to 20 characters. The sample that was typed in the entry ﬁeld appears in the Sample Area below it.

7. After Type and Size have been set, select one of the following buttons:

Apply All — Saves all of the selected settings on the GBNT:Font Attributes window and applies it to the graphic.

Reset — Returns the GBNT:Font Attributes window to its last saved settings (that is, what was saved by the Save Defaults function; see Section 3).

Cancel — Quits the GBNT:Font Attributes window without saving any changes.

Help — Displays help information on this topic.

Using Vector and Vector_over Text

1. From the GBNT:Drawing Attributes toolbar, select the Font button (#5 in Figure 4-1).

The GBNT:Font Attributes window displays.

2. Pull down the Type menu, and select the type of text used for the graphic. For these procedures, select Vector.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-20 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-2. Setting Drawing Attributes

3. If Vector is selected for Type, the GBNT:Font Attributes window appears as shown below.

Figure 4-8. GBNT:Font Attributes Window — Showing Vector Font Type

If one of the eight standard font sizes is not desirable, pull down the Size menu and select other. Once other is selected, the user may deﬁne a character width and height (see Step 6 and 7).

6. Enter a width for the text character in the char w entry ﬁeld. Valid range is 3 through 16,383.

7. Enter a height for the text character in the char h entry ﬁeld. Valid range is 3 through 16,383.

8. Pull down the Font menu, and select a font from the list (choices may include Courier, Roman, Helvetica, and so forth).

11/01 4-21 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-2. Setting Drawing Attributes

GBNT allows you to use any font available on the computer where GBNT is running. All the available fonts are listed in this combo box by name. GBNT appends a “*” to the name of any font that is a ﬁxed-width font. You should use a ﬁxed-width font for all conditional text because you want all text to be the same length.

Note

Different fonts may be available on different computers. Third-party packages installed on a computer often install their own fonts. If building a graphic on one computer, the fonts used to build the graphic must also be available on the computer where the graphic executes at runtime. 9. Pull down the Style menu, and select a style from the list (choices include bold, italic, regular, and bold_italic).

10. At the Sample entry ﬁeld, the user can type words/letters to see how the font will appear on the drawing canvas. The sample string may be up to 20 characters. The sample that was typed in the entry ﬁeld appears in the Sample Area below it.

11. After all of the choices have been made, select one of the following buttons:

Apply All — Saves all of the selected settings on the GBNT:Font Attributes window and applies it to the graphic.

Apply Font/Style — Only saves the Font and Style settings on the GBNT:Font Attributes window and applies those settings to the graphic.

Reset — Returns the GBNT:Font Attributes window to its last saved settings (that is, what was saved by the Save Defaults function; see Section 3).

Cancel — Quits the GBNT:Font Attributes window without saving any changes.

Help — Displays help information on this topic.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-22 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-2. Setting Drawing Attributes

4-2.5. Setting Fill Attributes

The GBNT:Fill Pattern dialog is used to set and/or change the active fill pattern and/ or fill pattern conditional used for items on a graphic. The following items on the Draw toolbar may have an associated fill pattern: polygon, circle, ellipse, dynamic polygon, rectangle, and arc.

Graphic fill patterns are monochrome patterns. When GBNT displays a fill pattern, the set bits of the pattern are displayed in the active FG (foreground) color, and the clear bits are displayed in the active BG (background) color. GBNT provides nine standard fill patterns: unfilled, solid, back_slash, slash, vert_slash, horz_slash, asterisks, blocks, and west_logo. In addition, to the nine standard fill patterns, the user can create custom fill patterns (see Appendix A).

Use the following procedure to set the ﬁll attribute:

1. From the GBNT:Drawing Attributes toolbar, select the Fill button (#6 in Figure 4-1).

The GBNT:Fill Pattern window displays (Figure 4-9).

Figure 4-9. GBNT:Fill Pattern Window

11/01 4-23 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-2. Setting Drawing Attributes

2. Select the desired ﬁll pattern from the scrolling list. The default ﬁll pattern is unfilled.

3. A conditional statement allows the value of a parameter in a graphic command to change based upon a specific condition. To create a fill pattern conditional, place the cursor in the Conditional entry field below the fill pattern scrolling list. Enter the conditional statement according to the rules in “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091).

To clear or erase the conditional statement, press the clear button above the Conditional entry ﬁeld.

4. After the ﬁll pattern and conditional (if applicable) have been set, select one of the following buttons:

Ok — Saves the selected settings, and quits the GBNT:Fill Pattern window. (In addition, it changes the ﬁll pattern for all applicable currently selected items.)

Apply — Saves the selected settings, but the GBNT:Fill Pattern window remains open. (In addition, it changes the ﬁll pattern for all applicable currently selected items.)

Cancel — Quits the GBNT:Fill Pattern window without saving any changes.

Help — Displays help information on this topic.

4-2.6. Setting Line Patterns

The GBNT:Line Patterns dialog operates in two different modes: In one mode, it is used to edit the system line patterns ﬁle (that is, add, delete, change custom line patterns). In the other mode, it is used to set/change the active line pattern and line pattern conditional for current and future draw operations.

The mode of operation is determined by the setting for the Line patterns out for edit checkbox at the top of the window. If this box is checked, the dialog can only be used to edit the system custom line pattern ﬁle. If this box is not checked, the window can only be used to set/change the current line pattern and line pattern conditional for items on the graphic.

This section discusses using the dialog to set/change the current line pattern for a graphic. For information on adding, deleting, or changing the custom line pattern ﬁle, see Appendix A.

The draw items that use a line pattern are: line, polygon, rectangle, arc, circle, ellipse, rubberband arc, rubberband line, dynamic line, and dynamic polygon.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-24 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-2. Setting Drawing Attributes

Use the following procedure to set the line patterns:

1. From the GBNT:Drawing Attributes toolbar, select the Line Pattern button (#7 in Figure 4-1).

The GBNT:Line Patterns window displays (Figure 4-10).

Figure 4-10. GBNT:Line Patterns Window

2. Select the desired line pattern from the line pattern scrolling list. The red box around the name is the currently selected pattern.

The ﬁrst nine line patterns are the default patterns: solid, dashed, sm_dash, big_dots, dotted, dash_dot, near_solid, sparse, and dot_dash. Custom line patterns read from the system line_patterns.txt ﬁle at startup are added to the list after the standard nine patterns. The default line pattern is solid.

3. A conditional statement allows the value of a parameter in a graphic command to change based upon a speciﬁc condition. To create a line pattern conditional, place the cursor in the Conditional entry ﬁeld below the line pattern scrolling list. Enter the conditional statement according to the rules in “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091).

To clear or erase the conditional statement, press the clear button above the Conditional entry ﬁeld.

11/01 4-25 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-2. Setting Drawing Attributes

4. After the line pattern and conditional (if applicable) have been set, select one of the following buttons:

Ok — Saves the selected settings, and quits the GBNT:Line Patterns window. (In addition, it changes the line pattern for all applicable currently selected items.)

Apply — Saves the selected settings, but the GBNT:Line Patterns window remains open. (In addition, it changes the line pattern for all applicable currently selected items.)

Cancel — Quits the GBNT:Line Patterns window without saving any changes.

Help — Displays help information on this topic.

4-2.7. Setting Line Width

GBNT offers 16 line widths from which to choose. The order of the line widths corresponds to an array index that is used in the source editor to specify line widths. Neither the size of the line widths nor the line width array index is conﬁgurable. Belowis a list of the line widtharray index numbers and their corresponding pixel line width.

Array Index Numbers Width of Line in Pixels 11 22 34 46 58 510 712 814 916 10 18 11 20 12 22 13 24

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-26 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-2. Setting Drawing Attributes

Array Index Numbers Width of Line in Pixels 14 26 15 28 16 30

Use the following procedure to set the line width.

1. From the GBNT:Drawing Attributes toolbar, select the Line Width button (#8 in Figure 4-1).

The GBNT:Line Widths window displays (Figure 4-11).

Line Width 1 Line Width 4

Line Width 13 Line Width 16

Figure 4-11. GBNT:Line Widths Window

Once a line width is selected, the choice will appear indented (see Figure 4-11).

11/01 4-27 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-2. Setting Drawing Attributes

The first line width on the GBNT:Line Widths window (first row, first button) is assigned the number 1 in the source syntax. The second line width (first row, second button) is assigned the number 2, and so on, reading the line widths from left to right. The last button on the GBNT:Line Widths window (fourth row, fourth button) is assigned the number 16 in the source syntax.

Note

Line width does not scale on resize or zoom operations. 2. After selecting a line width from Step 1, the result is immediate (that is, no OK or Apply button is necessary). To quit the GBNT:Line Widths window, press the “x” button in the upper right corner of the window.

4-2.8. Setting Blink

Use the following procedure to set the blink attribute.

1. Pull down the Edit menu and go to Attributes. Pull right and select blink. The GBNT:Blink window appears (see Figure 4-12). Note that blink is not available on the GBNT:Drawing Attributes toolbar.

Figure 4-12. GBNT:Blink Window

Note

Using blink may adversely affect the diagram update rate. It should be used sparingly.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-28 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-2. Setting Drawing Attributes

2. To set foreground blink, select the FG check box. A check mark displays in the box.

To remove the foreground blink, select the FG check box again. The check mark disappears. The default for foreground blink is off (no check mark in the box).

3. To set background blink, select the BG check box. A check mark displays in the box.

To remove the background blink, select the BG check box again. The check mark disappears. The default for background blink is off (no check mark in the box).

4. A conditional statement allows the value of a parameter in a graphics command to change based upon a speciﬁed condition. Conditional statements can be entered for FG and BG blink.

— To deﬁne a conditional, place the cursor in the entry ﬁeld beside the desired blink placement (FG or BG). — Enter the conditional statement according to the rules in “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091).

— To clear or erase the conditional statement, press the applicable clear button beside the entry ﬁeld. 5. After the desired blink has been set, and conditional statements have been entered, select one of the following buttons:

Ok — Saves the selected settings, and quits the GBNT:Blink window. (In addition, it changes the blink setting for all applicable selected items.)

Apply — Saves the selected settings, but the GBNT:Blink window remains open. (In addition, it changes the blink setting for all applicable selected items.)

Cancel — Quits the GBNT:Blink window without saving any changes.

11/01 4-29 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-3. Draw Button Reference List for Background, Foreground, and Trigger Items

4-3. Draw Button Reference List for Background, Foreground, and Trigger Items

The following sections discuss the GBNT draw items that are valid in the background, foreground, and trigger sections of a diagram:

Draw Item Section Number Arc Section 4-4 Rubberband Line/Arc Section 4-5 Line Section 4-6 Rubberband Line Section 4-7 Circle Section 4-8 Ellipse Section 4-9 Polygon Section 4-10 Rectangle Section 4-11 Dot Section 4-12 OL Rectangle Section 4-13 OL Gauge Section 4-14 OL Cylinder Section 4-15 Bar Section 4-16 Plot Section 4-17 XY Plot Section 4-18 Dynamic Line/Polygon Section 4-19 Trend Section 4-20 Time Section 4-21 Date Section 4-22 Group Text Section 4-23 Process Point Section 4-24

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-30 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-3. Draw Button Reference List for Background, Foreground, and Trigger Items

Draw Item Section Number Text Section 4-25 Shape Section 4-26 Macro Section 4-27 Macro Notes/Parameters Section 4-28 Description

11/01 4-31 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-4. Arc

4-4. Arc

The Arc button draws a filled or unfilled circular arc. The arc must have three points (a start point, midpoint, and end point). The user may specify a line and/or fill pattern for the arc. See Section 4-2.5 and Section 4-2.6 for information on using fill patterns and line patterns.

1. Select the Arc button on the GBNT:Draw toolbar. This item may be placed in the Background, Foreground, or Trigger section.

Arc

2. Move the pointer onto the drawing canvas and click to mark one end point for the arc.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-32 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-4. Arc

3. Move the pointer on the drawing canvas, and click again to mark the other end point for the arc.

11/01 4-33 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-4. Arc

4. Move the pointer (without pressing any buttons on the mouse) to drag the arc between the end points to the desired size (see ﬁgure below). As soon as the pointer moves, the line between points 1 and 2 is erased, and the arc (with points 1 and 2 and passing through point 3) is drawn.

5. Click again to complete the drawing process.

Note

The initial draw of an arc always creates a circular arc. Once the arc is drawn on the graphic, it can be resized into an elliptical arc (assuming the Resize Aspect Ratio option is not set to “maintain”; see Section 3).

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-34 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-5. Rubberband Line/Arc

4-5. Rubberband Line/Arc

The Rubberband Line/Arc button draws a line that appears as a curve (or non- circular, non-elliptical arc). It is drawn using the same steps as the standard arc. However, after this item is drawn, a LINE command appears in the source editor window, not an ARC command (see “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for more information on the LINE and ARC commands).

Note

Just as a line cannot be ﬁlled, neither can the Rubberband Line/Arc. However, the user can specify a line pattern for this item. See Section 4-2.6 for information on using line patterns. To draw the Rubberband Line/Arc, select the Rubberband Line/Arc button on the GBNT:Draw toolbar. This item may be placed in the Background, Foreground, or Trigger section. Follow the procedures for Arc in Section 4-4.

Rubberband Line/Arc

11/01 4-35 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-6. Line

4-6. Line

The Line button draws a straight line or a series of lines on the diagram. The user selects a line pattern for the line. See Section 4-2.6 for information on using line patterns.

Note

A line must have at least two points. 1. Select the Line button on the GBNT:Draw toolbar. This item may be placed in the Background, Foreground, or Trigger section.

Line

2. Move the pointer onto the drawing canvas, and click to mark the start point of the line.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-36 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-6. Line

3. Move the pointer on the drawing canvas, and click again to mark another point for the line as shown below.

4. Continue to move and click to mark all vertex points of the line.

11/01 4-37 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-6. Line

5. Hold down the Control key and left-click to select the ﬁnal vertex point and complete the drawing process.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-38 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-7. Rubberband Line

4-7. Rubberband Line

The Rubberband Line button draws a curved line or lines on the diagram. It is drawn using the same steps as the standard line. The user can select the line pattern for the Rubberband Line. See Section 4-2.6 for information on using line patterns.

1. Select the Rubberband Line button on the GBNT:Draw toolbar. This item may be placed in the Background, Foreground, or Trigger section.

Rubberband Line

2. Move the pointer onto the drawing canvas, and click to mark the start point of the rubberband line.

3. Move the pointer on the drawing canvas, and click again to mark another point for the rubberband line.

Note

At least three points are required to draw a Rubberband Line. Nothing will appear on the drawing canvas until the user clicks on the second vertex point and moves the pointer. 4. After marking the second vertex point, move the pointer (up, down, left, or right). The line bends as desired.

5. Continue to move and click to mark all vertex points of the rubberband line.

6. Hold down the Control key and left-click to select the ﬁnal vertex point and complete the drawing process.

11/01 4-39 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-8. Circle

4-8. Circle

The Circle button draws a circle on the diagram. The user can specify a ﬁll and line pattern for the circle. See Section 4-2.5 and Section 4-2.6 for information on using ﬁll patterns and line patterns.

1. Select the Circle button on the GBNT:Draw toolbar. This item may be placed in the Background, Foreground, or Trigger section.

Circle

2. Move the pointer onto the drawing canvas. Press and hold the left mouse button, and drag the radius to the desired size. Do not release the mouse button while drawing the circle.

3. Release the mouse button to complete the draw operation.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-40 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-9. Ellipse

4-9. Ellipse

The Ellipse button draws an ellipse on the diagram. The user can specify a ﬁll and line pattern for the ellipse. See Section 4-2.5 and Section 4-2.6 for information on using ﬁll patterns and line patterns.

1. Select the Ellipse button on the GBNT:Draw toolbar. This item may be placed in the Background, Foreground, or Trigger section.

Ellipse

2. Move the pointer onto the drawing canvas. Press and hold the left mouse button, and drag the radius to the desired size. Do not release the mouse button while drawing the ellipse. See the ﬁgure below.

3. Release the mouse button to complete the draw operation.

11/01 4-41 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-10. Polygon

4-10. Polygon

The Polygon button draws a polygon on the diagram. The user can specify a ﬁll and line pattern for the polygon. See Section 4-2.5 and Section 4-2.6 for information on using ﬁll patterns and line patterns.

Note

A polygon must have at least three points. 1. Select the Polygon button on the GBNT:Draw toolbar. This item may be placed in the Background, Foreground, or Trigger section.

Polygon

2. Move the pointer onto the drawing canvas, and click to mark the start point of the polygon.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-42 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-10. Polygon

3. Move the pointer on the drawing canvas, and click again to mark the next point for the polygon.

4. Continue to move and click to mark all vertex points of the polygon.

11/01 4-43 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-10. Polygon

5. Hold down the Control key and left-click to select the ﬁnal vertex point. The polygon automatically closes.

Note

A line segment will automatically be drawn between the last vertex and the ﬁrst vertex to close the polygon.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-44 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-11. Rectangle

4-11. Rectangle

The Rectangle button draws a rectangle on the diagram. The user can specify a ﬁll and line pattern for the rectangle. See Section 4-2.5 and Section 4-2.6 for information on using ﬁll and line patterns.

1. Select the Rectangle button on the GBNT:Draw toolbar. This item may be placed in the Background, Foreground, or Trigger section.

Rectangle

2. Move the pointer onto the drawing canvas. Press and hold the left mouse button, and drag the pointer to mark the lower right corner of the rectangle. Do not release the mouse button while drawing the rectangle.

3. Release the mouse button to complete the draw operation.

11/01 4-45 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-12. Dot

4-12. Dot

The Dot button draws a dot on the diagram. The user can choose between a small, medium, or large dot.

1. Select the Dot button on the GBNT:Draw toolbar. This item may be placed in the Background, Foreground, or Trigger section.

Dot

The GBNT:Dot window appears (see Figure 4-13).

Figure 4-13. GBNT:Dot Window

2. From the Size choice buttons, select a dot size. The choices are small, medium, and large.

3. Select one of the following buttons:

Ok — Saves the selected settings, and quits the GBNT:Dot window.

Apply — Saves the selected settings, but the GBNT:Dot window remains open.

Cancel — Quits the GBNT:Dot window without saving any changes.

4. Move the pointer onto the drawing canvas. Click the left mouse button to position the dot on the graphic. The dot displays on the canvas.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-46 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-13. OL Rectangle

4-13. OL Rectangle

The OL Rectangle button draws a rectangle on the diagram except that OL Rectangle gives a three-dimensional look to the rectangle on the diagram. This item is for display purposes only (it cannot be pressed or released like a button or a poke ﬁeld). This item may be displayed in the normal (raised) or the invoked (depressed) state.

1. Select the OL Rectangle button on the GBNT:Draw toolbar. This item may be placed in the Background, Foreground, or Trigger section.

OL Rectangle

The GBNT:OL Rectangle window appears (see Figure 4-14).

Figure 4-14. GBNT:OL Rectangle Window

2. From the State choice buttons, select one of the following options:

Normal — rectangle appears raised.

Invoked — rectangle appears pressed in.

11/01 4-47 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-13. OL Rectangle

3. Select one of the following buttons:

Ok — Saves the selected settings, and quits the GBNT:OL Rectangle window.

Apply — Saves the selected settings, but the GBNT:OL Rectangle window remains open.

Cancel — Quits the GBNT:OL Rectangle window without saving any changes.

4. Move the pointer onto the drawing canvas. Press and hold the left mouse button, and drag the pointer to mark the lower right corner of the OL rectangle. Do not release the mouse button while drawing the OL rectangle.

Normal Invoked (raised)

5. Release the mouse button to complete the draw operation.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-48 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-14. OL Gauge

4-14. OL Gauge

The OL Gauge button defines a gauge on a diagram that is partially filled based upon a process point value. The gauge can be filled bottom up, top down, right to left, left to right, or up or down from the center (bias) depending on the gauge direction. The actual process point value is scaled between the low and high scales on the gauge. The gauge is filled from the lowlimit end in the direction specified up to the scaled process point value on the process diagram. The bias gauge is filled from position 0 up or down to the scaled process point value. For all directions except the bias gauge, the low limit end of the gauge is marked by the endcap.

1. Select the OL Gauge button on the GBNT:Draw toolbar. This item may be placed in the Background, Foreground, or Trigger section.

OL Gauge

The GBNT:OL Gauge window appears (see Figure 4-15).

Figure 4-15. GBNT:OL Gauge Window

2. Enter the process point name and record field in the Pt Name/Rec Fld entry field. See “Ovation Record Types Reference Manual” (R3-1140) for more information on process points and record fields.

11/01 4-49 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-14. OL Gauge

3. Enter the lowlimit for the process point value in the Low Limit entry ﬁeld. Valid values are point names/record ﬁelds, pointers/offsets, real constants, and integers in the range -2,147,483,647 through 2,147,483,647. See “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for more information on valid values.

4. Enter the high limit for the process point value in the High Limit entry ﬁeld. Valid values are point names/record ﬁelds, pointers/offsets, real constants, and integers in the range -2,147,483,647 through 2,147,483,647. See “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for more information on valid values.

5. From the Direction choice buttons, select the OL Gauge direction. The choices are (from left to right): up, down, left, right, or bias.

6. Select one of the following buttons:

Ok — Saves the selected settings, and quits the GBNT:OL Gauge window.

Apply — Saves the selected settings, but the GBNT:OL Gauge window remains open.

Cancel — Quits the GBNT:OL Gauge window without saving any changes.

7. Move the pointer to the drawing canvas. Press and hold the left mouse button, and drag a rectangle representing the maximum dimensions of the OL Gauge. Do not release the mouse button while drawing the OL Gauge.

8. Release the mouse button, and the OL Gauge displays.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-50 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-14. OL Gauge

The figure below shows the five possible OL Gauge orientations when displayed in GBNT. Notice that all of the OL Gauges are filled to the same level. When the OL Gauge is displayed in the process diagram at the Ovation NT Operator Station, the OL Gauge will fill to a variable amount, depending on the value of the process point specified.

DownLeft Right UP Bias

11/01 4-51 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-15. OL Cylinder

4-15. OL Cylinder

The OL Cylinder button defines a cylindrical bar graph on a diagram that is partially filled based upon a process point value (the cylinder has a three-dimensional appearance). The cylinder is filled bottom up. The actual process point value is scaled between the low and high scales of the cylinder. The low limit end of the cylinder is the bottom; the high limit end is the top.

1. Select the OL Cylinder button on the GBNT:Draw toolbar. This item may be placed in the Background, Foreground, or Trigger section.

OL Cylinder

The GBNT:OL Cylinder window displays (see Figure 4-16).

Figure 4-16. GBNT:OL Cylinder Window

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-52 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-15. OL Cylinder

5. Select one of the following buttons:

Ok — Saves the selected settings, and quits the GBNT:OL Cylinder window.

Apply — Saves the selected settings, but the GBNT:OL Cylinder window remains open.

Cancel — Quits the GBNT:OL Cylinder window without saving any changes.

6. Move the pointer to the drawing canvas. Press and hold the left mouse button, and drag a rectangle representing the maximum dimensions of the cylinder. Do not release the mouse button while drawing the cylinder.

11/01 4-53 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-15. OL Cylinder

7. Release the mouse button, and the cylinder displays (see the ﬁgure below).

Note

In order to display the OL Cylinder correctly at runtime, erase color must be set to the same color as the diagram background color. GBNT does not use the erase color to display the OL Cylinder. See Section 3 (setting diagram background color) and Section 4-2.3 (setting erase color).

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-54 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-16. Bar

4-16. Bar

The Bar button defines a rectangle on a diagram that is partially filled based upon a process point value. The bar can be filled bottom up, top down, right to left, left to right, or up or down from the 0 value (bias). The actual process point value is scaled between the low and high scales of the bar. The bar is filled from the low limit end in the direction specified, up to the scaled process point value on the process diagram. The bias bar is filled from the position/value 0 up or down to the scaled process point value.

1. Select the Bar button on the GBNT:Draw toolbar. This item may be placed in the Background, Foreground, or Trigger section.

Bar

The GBNT:Bar window appears (see Figure 4-17).

Figure 4-17. GBNT:Bar Window

11/01 4-55 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-16. Bar

5. From the Direction choice buttons, select a bar direction. They are (from left to right): up, down, left, right, or bias.

6. Select one of the following buttons:

Ok — Saves the selected settings, and quits the GBNT:Bar window.

Apply — Saves the selected settings, but the GBNT:Bar window remains open.

Cancel — Quits the GBNT:Bar window without saving any changes.

7. Move the pointer to the drawing canvas. Press and hold the left mouse button, and drag a rectangle representing the maximum dimensions of the bar. Do not release the mouse button while drawing the bar.

8. Release the mouse button, and the bar displays.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-56 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-16. Bar

The figure below shows the five different types of bars when displayed in GBNT. Notice that all of the bars are filled to the same level. When the bar is displayed in the process diagram at the Ovation NT Operator Station, the bar will fill to a variable amount, depending on the value of the process point specified.

Down Up Right Left Bias

Note

An outlining rectangle does not appear with the bar on the process diagram at the Ovation NT Operator Station — only the amount of ﬁll appears.

11/01 4-57 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-17. Plot

4-17. Plot

The Plot button shows the current value of a process point plotted over time and scaled between a low and high value on the process diagram. The process point value is always plotted along a straight line. The orientation of the line may be up, down, left, or right. The user also speciﬁes a plot character for each value and how to join successive values plotted over time.

1. Select the Plot button on the GBNT:Draw toolbar. This item may be placed in the Background, Foreground, or Trigger section.

Plot

The GBNT:Plot window appears (see Figure 4-18).

Figure 4-18. GBNT:Plot Window

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-58 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-17. Plot

5. From the Dir choice buttons, select a direction for the plot. The choices are (from left to right): up, down, left, or right.

6. From the Type drop-down menu, select a plot type. The choices are:

none — invisible cursor position moves to plot the point, but nothing visible is plotted.

lines — draws a line between successive plotted values.

squarewave — plots a dot at each plot point and then draws a horizontal and/ or vertical line between successive plotted values (diagonal lines are not drawn).

shape — uses a speciﬁed shape from the Shape Library to plot the point. When this option is selected, the shape-speciﬁc items are added to the window as shown below.

11/01 4-59 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-17. Plot

7. If shape is selected for Type — Enter the required information that appears on the updated GBNT:Plot window: • Enter the shape name, width (w), and height (h) in the applicable entry ﬁelds.

• Pull down the rot menu and select either 0, 90, 180, 270, -90, -180, or -270. • Pull down the inv menu and select either NONE (no inversion), TTB (top to bottom), RTL (right to left), or BOTH (top to bottom and right to left).

Shape names must exist in the Shape Library (see Section 6 for information on the Shape Library; also see “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for information on the Shape command).

8. Select one of the following buttons:

Ok — Saves the selected settings, and quits the GBNT:Plot window.

Apply — Saves the selected settings, but the GBNT:Plot window remains open.

Cancel — Quits the GBNT:Plot window without saving any changes.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-60 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-17. Plot

9. Move the pointer onto the drawing canvas. Press and hold the left mouse button to mark one end of the plot, and drag either a horizontal or vertical line (depending on the selected orientation) to mark the maximum length of the plot line. Do not release the mouse button while drawing the plot.

10. Release the mouse button when the plot line is at the desired maximum length.

11/01 4-61 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-18. XY Plot

4-18. XY Plot

The XY Plot button is used to plot two points sampled over time against one another on the process diagram. One point is scaled along the x-axis, the other point is scaled along the y-axis, and the point of their intersection is plotted. The user defines the rectangular area for the entire plot. The XY Plot is defined in a single orientation where 0, 0 is the lower left corner of the rectangular plot area. The user specifies the low and high scale values for each axis.

1. Select the XY Plot button on the GBNT:Draw toolbar. This item may be placed in the Background, Foreground, or Trigger section.

XY Plot

The GBNT:XY Plot window displays (see Figure 4-19).

Figure 4-19. GBNT:XY Plot Window

2. Enter the process point name and record field associated with the x-axis in the (x-axis) Pt Name/Rec Fld entry field. See “Ovation Record Types Reference Manual” (R3-1140) for more information on process points and record fields.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-62 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-18. XY Plot

3. Enter the process point name and record field associated with the y-axis in the (y-axis) Pt Name/Rec Fld entry field. See “Ovation Record Types Reference Manual” (R3-1140) for more information on process points and record fields.

4. Enter the lowlimit for the x-axis process point value in the (x-axis) Low Limit entry ﬁeld. Valid values are point names/record ﬁelds, pointers/offsets, real constants, and integers in the range -2,147,483,647 through 2,147,483,647. See “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for more information on valid values.

5. Enter the lowlimit for the y-axis process point value in the (y-axis) Low Limit entry ﬁeld. Valid values are point names/record ﬁelds, pointers/offsets, real constants, and integers in the range -2,147,483,647 through 2,147,483,647. See “Ovation NT Graphics Language Manual” (NT-0091) for more information on valid values.

6. Enter the high limit for the x-axis process point value in the (x-axis) High Limit entry ﬁeld. Valid values are point names/record ﬁelds, pointers/offsets, real constants, and integers in the range -2,147,483,647 through 2,147,483,647. See “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for more information on valid values.

7. Enter the high limit for the y-axis process point value in the (y-axis) High Limit entry ﬁeld. Valid values are point names/record ﬁelds, pointers/offsets, real constants, and integers in the range -2,147,483,647 through 2,147,483,647. See “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for more information on valid values.

8. Enter the number of seconds after which the XY Plot will update in the Update Rate entry ﬁeld. Use the increment/decrement buttons to adjust the value, if necessary. Valid range is 1 through 32,767.

11/01 4-63 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-18. XY Plot

9. At the Shape Plot check box, select or deselect the box. Selecting the box will plot a shape instead of a dot. If the box is not selected/checked, the dot will be plotted. When the box is selected/checked, the GBNT:XY Plot window appears as shown below.

10. If shape plot is selected — Enter the required information that appears on the updated GBNT:XY Plot window: • Enter the name of the shape to be plotted to represent the current value in the shape entry ﬁeld in the current value box. This must be a name from the active Shape Library (see Section 6).

• Enter the width and height to scale the current shape in the (W) and (H) entry ﬁelds. Use the increment/decrement buttons to adjust the value if necessary. The width and height are in virtual coordinates. Valid range is 1 through 16,383.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-64 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-18. XY Plot

• Select a rotation for the current shape from the Rot (rotation) drop-down menu. The choices are in degrees (only increments of 90 degrees are supported). Negative degrees represent clockwise rotation; positive degrees represent counterclockwise rotation.

• Select an inversion for the current shape from the Inv (inversion) drop-down menu. The choices are NONE (no inversion), TTB (top to bottom inversion), RTL (right to left inversion), BOTH (top to bottom and right to left inversion).

• Enter the name of the history shape in the shape entry ﬁeld in the history values box. The history shape is the shape from the shape library used to display past values of the xy plot. Remember that the xy plot does not clear the past values. The history shape may be the same shape as the current shape. • Select a width (w), height (h), rotation, and inversion for the history value as for the current value. • Enter the maximum number of history shapes which may be plotted on the xy plot in the count entry ﬁeld. Use the increment/decrement buttons to adjust the value if necessary. Valid range is 0 through 255.

11. Select one of the following buttons:

Ok — Saves the selected settings, and quits the GBNT:XY Plot window.

Apply — Saves the selected settings, but the GBNT:XY Plot window remains open.

Cancel — Quits the GBNT:XY Plot window without saving any changes.

12. Move the pointer to the drawing canvas. Press and hold the left mouse button, and drag a rectangle representing the maximum dimensions of the XY Plot. Do not release the mouse button while drawing the XY Plot.

11/01 4-65 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-18. XY Plot

13. Release the mouse button, and the XY Plot displays.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-66 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-19. Dynamic Line/Polygon

4-19. Dynamic Line/Polygon

The dynamic line/polygon button is used to plot a line or polygon which may have dynamic (that is, changing) endpoints. The endpoints may be speciﬁed as integers, real constants, or process points. The x and y coordinates of each vertex are independent. X may be absolute and y may be dynamic or vice versa. Dynamic coordinates are speciﬁed as process points. Both x and y coordinates are scaled between low and high values for the given axis.

1. Select the Dynamic Line/Polygon button on the GBNT:Draw toolbar. This item may be placed in the Background, Foreground, or Trigger section.

Dynamic Line/Polygon

11/01 4-67 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-19. Dynamic Line/Polygon

2. The GBNT:Dynamic Line/Polygon window appears (see Figure 4-20).

Figure 4-20. GBNT:Dynamic Line/Polygon Window

3. From the Item choice buttons, select line or polygon.

4. At the Fitted curve check box, determine whether a curve or a straight line will join the vertices. • Click on the option and a checkmark appears in the box. A best-ﬁt curve will be drawn, joining the vertices. • Click on the option again, and the checkmark disappears. A straight line will be drawn, joining the vertices.

5. Enter the low limit for scaling the x coordinates of the line/polygon in the low entry ﬁeld in the x-axis limits box. Valid values are point names/record ﬁelds, pointers/offsets, real constants, and integers in the range -2,147,483,647 through 2,147,483,647. See “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for more information on valid values.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-68 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-19. Dynamic Line/Polygon

6. Enter the high limit for scaling the x coordinates of the line/polygon in the high entry ﬁeld in the x-axis limits box. Valid values are point names/record ﬁelds, pointers/offsets, real constants, and integers in the range -2,147,483,647 through 2,147,483,647. See “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for more information on valid values.

7. Enter the low limit for scaling the y coordinates of the line/polygon in the low entry ﬁeld in the y-axis limits box. Valid values are point names/record ﬁelds, pointers/offsets, real constants, and integers in the range -2,147,483,647 through 2,147,483,647. See “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for more information on valid values.

8. Enter the high limit for scaling the y coordinates of the line/polygon in the high entry ﬁeld in the y-axis limits box. Valid values are point names/record ﬁelds, pointers/offsets, real constants, and integers in the range -2,147,483,647 through 2,147,483,647. See “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for more information on valid values.

9. Enter the number of seconds after which the foreground will update in the Update Rate entry ﬁeld. Use the increment/decrement buttons to adjust the value if necessary. Valid range is 1 through 32,767.

10. Enter the x, y coordinate pairs in the x y coordinate pairs scrolling list. Enter one x and y coordinate pair per line. Do not enter a comma between x and y. Valid values for x, y coordinates are integers, real constants, process point/ record ﬁelds, or pointers/offsets.

Note

For a dynamic polygon, at least three coordinates must be entered.

11/01 4-69 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-19. Dynamic Line/Polygon

The ﬁgure belowshowsthe GBNT:Dynamic Line/Polygon window complete with all applicable information.

11. Select one of the following buttons:

Ok — Saves the selected settings, and quits the GBNT:Dynamic Line/Polygon window.

Apply — Saves the selected settings, but the GBNT:Dynamic Line/Polygon window remains open.

Cancel — Quits the GBNT:Dynamic Line/Polygon window without saving any changes.

12. Move the pointer to the drawing canvas. Press and hold the left mouse button, and drag a rectangle representing the maximum dimensions of the dynamic line or polygon. Do not release the mouse button while drawing the dynamic line or polygon.

13. Release the mouse button, and the dynamic line or polygon displays.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-70 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-19. Dynamic Line/Polygon

The ﬁgure below shows a dynamic line (on left) and a dynamic polygon (on right).

11/01 4-71 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-20. Trend

4-20. Trend

The Trend button displays a graph that shows the current value of a process point sampled over time on the process diagram. The process point value is scaled between low and high limits. The user defines the number of values to display and the time interval between successive values. The user may trend the point showing time along the x or the y axis (horizontal or vertical orientation). The trend area is defined by an outlining rectangle, and the spacing between successive values is determined by dividing the length of the x or y axis by the number of values to trend. Multiple trends may exist in the same area of the diagram but with undesirable interaction.

1. Select the Trend button on the GBNT:Draw toolbar. This item may be placed in the Background, Foreground, or Trigger section.

Trend

The GBNT:Trend window displays (see Figure 4-21).

Figure 4-21. GBNT:Trend Window

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-72 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-20. Trend

5. Enter the time interval (time in seconds between successive readings of the values) in the Interval Time entry ﬁeld. Use the increment/decrement buttons to adjust the value if necessary. Valid range = 1 through 10,000.

6. Enter the number of samples (value readings) to show in the trend in the # of Samples entry ﬁeld. Use the increment/decrement buttons to adjust the value if necessary. Valid range = 1 through 60.

7. Select the trend direction using the Orientation choice buttons. The ﬁrst option is time on the horizontal axis. The second option is time on the vertical axis.

8. Select one of the following buttons:

Ok — Saves the selected settings, and quits the GBNT:Trend window.

Apply — Saves the selected settings, but the GBNT:Trend window remains open.

Cancel — Quits the GBNT:Trend window without saving any changes.

9. Move the pointer to the drawing canvas. Press and hold the left mouse button, and drag a rectangle representing the maximum dimensions of the trend. Do not release the mouse button while drawing the trend.

11/01 4-73 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-20. Trend

10. Release the mouse button, and the trend displays.

Note

The x and y axes do not appear on the process diagram at the Ovation NT Operator Station.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-74 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-21. Time

4-21. Time

The Time button displays the current time on the process diagram. The user may select the format for the time display.

For all text items (time, date, text, entry ﬁeld, and so forth), the user may select the size of the text characters used to display the string and may display the text in either a vector or bitmap font (see Section 2 for information on vector and bitmap fonts; also see Section 4-2.4 for information on setting font attributes).

1. Select the Time button on the GBNT:Draw toolbar. This item may be placed in the Background, Foreground, or Trigger section.

Time

The GBNT:Time window displays (see Figure 4-22).

Figure 4-22. GBNT:Time Window

2. From the drop-down menu, select a time format. The choices are: • hh:mm:ss • hh:mm:ss:t • hh:mm where: • hh = hour (00 through 23) • mm = minute (00 through 59)

11/01 4-75 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-21. Time

• ss = second (00 through 59) • t = tenth of a second (0 through 9) 3. Select one of the following buttons:

Ok — Saves the selected settings, and quits the GBNT:Time window.

Apply — Saves the selected settings, but the GBNT:Time window remains open.

Cancel — Quits the GBNT:Time window without saving any changes.

4. Move the pointer onto the drawing canvas. Press and hold the left mouse button to display the time string on the canvas. Move the pointer to the desired location. Do not release the mouse button while moving the string.

5. Release the mouse button to position the time string.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-76 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-22. Date

4-22. Date

The Date button displays the current date on the process diagram. The user may select the format for the date display.

1. Select the Date button on the GBNT:Draw toolbar. This item may be placed in the Background, Foreground, or Trigger section.

Date

The GBNT:Date window displays (see Figure 4-23).

Figure 4-23. GBNT:Date Window

2. From the drop-down menu, select a date format. The choices are: • mm/dd/yy • mmm dd, yyyy • mm/dd • mm-dd-yy • dd/mm/yy

11/01 4-77 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-22. Date

where: • mm = month (1 through 12) • dd = date (1 through 31) • yy = year (0 through 99; the ﬁrst two digits are 20) • mmm = month (JAN, FEB, MAR, APR, MAY, JUN, JLY, AUG, SEP, OCT, NOV, DEC)

3. Select one of the following buttons:

Ok — Saves the selected settings, and quits the GBNT:Date window.

Apply — Saves the selected settings, but the GBNT:Date window remains open.

Cancel — Quits the GBNT:Date window without saving any changes.

4. Move the pointer onto the drawing canvas. Press and hold the left mouse button to display the date string on the canvas. Move the pointer to the desired location. Do not release the mouse button while moving the string.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-78 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-22. Date

5. Release the mouse button to position the date string.

11/01 4-79 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-23. Point Group Text

4-23. Point Group Text

The Point (Pt) Group Text button displays one of the three group text strings deﬁned in the point group displayed with the diagram at the Ovation NT Operator Station. See “Ovation NT Developer Studio User Guide” (NT-0060) for more information on building groups. The user may select the orientation of the text.

1. Select the Pt Group Text button on the GBNT:Draw toolbar. This item may be placed in the Background, Foreground, or Trigger section.

Pt Group Text

The GBNT:Pt Group Text window displays (see Figure 4-24).

Figure 4-24. GBNT:Pt Group Text Window

2. From the Pt Group Text Str choice buttons, select a group text string number. Valid range is 1 through 3.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-80 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-23. Point Group Text

3. Enter the number of characters in the string in the Fld Width entry ﬁeld. Use the increment/decrement buttons to adjust the value, if needed. Valid range is 1 through 80.

4. From the Orientation choice buttons, select one of the following:

horz displays the group text string horizontally.

vert displays the group text string vertically.

5. Select one of the following buttons:

Ok — Saves the selected settings, and quits the GBNT:Pt Group Text window.

Apply — Saves the selected settings, but the GBNT:Pt Group Text window remains open.

Cancel — Quits the GBNT:Pt Group Text window without saving any changes.

6. Move the pointer onto the drawing canvas. Press and hold the left mouse button to display the group text string on the canvas. Move the pointer to the desired location. Do not release the mouse button while moving the string.

7. Release the mouse button to position the group text string.

11/01 4-81 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-23. Point Group Text

The group text string displays as a series of G’s on the drawing canvas as shown below:

Note

On the process diagram, the group text string displays with the information that is deﬁned in the Ovation Database. See “Ovation NT Developer Studio User Guide” (NT-0060) for more information.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-82 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-24. Process Point

4-24. Process Point

The Process Point button displays the contents of a process point record field (in ASCII format) on the process diagram. The contents of the record field may or may not be scaled between a low and high value before display. The record field is a conditional parameter (the user may specify a conditional to determine which record field value is displayed).

1. Select the Process Point button on the GBNT:Draw toolbar. This item may be placed in the Background, Foreground, or Trigger section.

Process Point

11/01 4-83 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-24. Process Point

The GBNT:Process Point window appears (see Figure 4-25).

Figure 4-25. GBNT:Process Point Window

3. A conditional statement allows the value of a parameter in a graphics command to change based upon a speciﬁed condition. To create a conditional, place the cursor in the Conditional entry ﬁeld. Enter the conditional statement according to the rules in “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091).

To clear or erase the conditional statement, press the clear button beside the entry ﬁeld.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-84 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-24. Process Point

Note

The Pt Name/Rec Fld entry ﬁeld must be set before a conditional may be applied since the type of point must be known for error checking of the conditional values. 4. Specify the number of characters for the process point display in the Fld Width entry ﬁeld. Use the increment/decrement buttons to adjust the value, if necessary. Valid range = 1 through 80.

5. From the Format Type drop-down menu, select one of the following:

right — right justiﬁed; left padded with blanks.

right0 — right justiﬁed; left padded with zeros.

left — left justiﬁed; right padded with blanks.

hex — hexadecimal format (base 16) without the trailing “h”.

hex_h — hexadecimal format (base 16) with the trailing “h.

binary — binary format (base 2).

exponential — exponential format.

technical — similar to exponential format but exponent must be divisible by 3.

6. Enter the number of decimal places for the display in the Decimal Places entry field. Entering “-1” means that the decimal places specified in the FM record field for the given point should be used. Valid range = -1 through [Fld Width - 1] (that is, if field width is 10, valid range is -1 through 9).

7. From the Orientation choice buttons, select one of the following:

Horz — displays the process point string horizontally.

Vert — displays the process point string vertically.

8. From the Point Quality choice buttons, select one of the following options:

Off — does not display the point quality.

On — displays the point quality (it will use one character of the total ﬁeld width speciﬁed).

See “Ovation Record Types Reference Manual” (R3-1140) for more information on point quality.

11/01 4-85 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-24. Process Point

9. From the Scale choice buttons, select one of the following:

On — displays the process point value as a percentage scaled between a low and high value.

Off — displays the actual process point value with no scaling.

If on is selected for Scale, the GBNT:Process Point window appears as shown below:

10. If on was selected for Scale, enter the low and high scale values in the % low and % high entry ﬁelds. Valid values are point names/record ﬁelds, pointers/ offsets, real constants, and integers in the range -2,147,483,647 through 2,147,483,647. See “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT- 0091) for more information on valid values.

11. Select one of the following buttons:

Ok — Saves the selected settings, and quits the GBNT:Process Point window.

Apply — Saves the selected settings, but the GBNT:Process Point window remains open.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-86 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-24. Process Point

Cancel — Quits the GBNT:Process Point window without saving any changes.

12. Move the pointer onto the drawing canvas. Press and hold the left mouse button to display the process point string on the canvas. Move the pointer to the desired location. Do not release the mouse button while moving the string.

13. Release the mouse button to position the process point string.

The process point string displays as a series of question marks on the drawing canvas (see ﬁgure below).

Note

On the process diagram, the process point string displays with the contents of the point record speciﬁed on the GBNT:Process Point window. See “Ovation Record Types Reference Manual” (R3-1140) for more information on process points.

11/01 4-87 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-25. Text

4-25. Text

The Text button is used to display three different types of text: • Single Text • Multiple Text • Text Groups Single Text is a text string of 80 characters or less. The string cannot contain linefeed characters.

Multiple Text displays a maximum of 10 strings which are treated as a single entity. Multiple text strings are limited to 30 characters. The user speciﬁes the justiﬁcation and the interline spacing for the multi-text strings.

Text Group strings are read from the active text group file. The text group file is an external ASCII file which contains up to 200 user-defined strings. The format of a line in this file is: , where index = 1 - 200, and string length is 80 characters or less.

In addition, the user may display various text strings depending on the evaluation of a conditional expression for all text types.

1. Select the Text button on the GBNT:Draw toolbar. This item may be placed in the Background, Foreground, or Trigger section.

Text

The GBNT:Text window displays (see the following sections for window examples).

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-88 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-25. Text

4-25.1. Single Text

If Single Text is selected, the GBNT:Text window appears as shown in Figure 4-26.

Figure 4-26. GBNT:Text Window — Single Text

2. Enter a text string in the Text [no quotes] entry ﬁeld. The maximum number of characters is 80. The string must not be enclosed in either single or double quotes.

To clear or erase the conditional statement, press the clear button above the entry ﬁeld.

11/01 4-89 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-25. Text

Note

Conditional text strings must be enclosed in quotes. The same quote (single or double) must be used to start and end the string (for example, “text” and ‘text’ are valid, but “text’ and ‘text” are not valid). Conditional strings are limited to 80 characters for normal text and 30 characters for multi-text. 4. From the Orientation choice buttons, select one of the following:

Horz — displays the text string horizontally.

Vert — displays the text string vertically.

5. Select one of the following buttons:

Ok — Saves the selected settings, and quits the GBNT:Text window.

Apply — Saves the selected settings, but the GBNT:Text window remains open.

Cancel — Quits the GBNT:Text window without saving any changes.

6. Move the pointer onto the drawing canvas. Press and hold the left mouse button to display the text string on the canvas. Move the pointer to the desired location. Do not release the mouse button while moving the string.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-90 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-25. Text

7. Release the mouse button to position the text string as shown below.

Note

The user speciﬁes the orientation of the characters (horizontal or vertical) for single text and text groups only; horizontal is assumed for multiple text.

11/01 4-91 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-25. Text

4-25.2. Multiple Text

If Multiple Text is selected, the GBNT:Text window appears as in Figure 4-27.

Figure 4-27. GBNT:Text Window — Multiple Text

1. Enter at least two text strings in the Text Strings (no quotes) entry ﬁeld. The maximum number of characters is 30. The strings must not be enclosed in either single or double quotes.

2. From the Justiﬁcation drop-down menu, select one of the following:

left — strings are left justiﬁed with the ﬁrst string.

right — strings are right justiﬁed with the longest string.

center — strings are center justiﬁed with the longest string.

3. Enter the interline spacing for multiple text strings in the Spacing entry ﬁeld. The spacing is in pixels. Use the increment/decrement buttons to adjust the value, if needed. Valid range is 0 through 150.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-92 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-25. Text

4. A conditional statement allows the value of a parameter in a graphics command to change based upon a speciﬁed condition. To create a conditional, place the cursor in the Conditional entry ﬁeld. Enter the conditional statement according to the rules in “Ovation Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091).

To clear or erase the conditional statement, press the clear button above the entry ﬁeld.

Note

Ok — Saves the selected settings, and quits the GBNT:Text window.

Apply — Saves the selected settings, but the GBNT:Text window remains open.

Cancel — Quits the GBNT:Text window without saving any changes.

11/01 4-93 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-25. Text

7. Release the mouse button to position the text string as shown below.

Note

The user speciﬁes the orientation of the characters (horizontal or vertical) for single text and text groups only; horizontal is assumed for multiple text.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-94 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-25. Text

4-25.3. Text Groups

If Text Groups is selected, the GBNT:Text window appears as in Figure 4-28.

Figure 4-28. GBNT:Text Window — Text Groups

1. Enter the text group string number in the Text Group entry field. Use the increment/decrement buttons to adjust the value, if needed. Valid range is 1 through 200. This is the index of the string in the text group file. See “Ovation NT Developer Studio User’s Guide” (NT-0060) for more information on the text group file.

2. Enter the number of characters of the text group string to display in the Field Width entry ﬁeld. Use the increment/decrement buttons to adjust the value, if needed. Valid range is 1 through 80.

To clear or erase the conditional statement, press the clear button above the entry ﬁeld.

11/01 4-95 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-25. Text

Note

Horz — displays the text string horizontally.

Vert — displays the text string vertically.

5. Select one of the following buttons:

Ok — Saves the selected settings, and quits the GBNT:Text window.

Apply — Saves the selected settings, but the GBNT:Text window remains open.

Cancel — Quits the GBNT:Text window without saving any changes.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-96 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-25. Text

7. Release the mouse button to position the text string as shown below.

Note

The user speciﬁes the orientation of the characters (horizontal or vertical) for single text and text groups only; horizontal is assumed for multiple text.

11/01 4-97 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-26. Shape

4-26. Shape

The Shape button displays the GBNT:Shapes window (the same window displays when the user selects Shape Library from the File pull-down menu.

Shapes must be added to the Shape Library before they can be used in a diagram. See Section 6 for information on adding shapes to the Shape Library.

1. Select the Shape button on the GBNT:Draw toolbar. This item may be placed in the Background, Foreground, or Trigger section.

Shape

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-98 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-26. Shape

The GBNT:Shape Library window displays (see Figure 4-29).

Figure 4-29. GBNT:Shape Library Window

2. To select a shape, click on it with the left mouse button. The name of the shape appears in the shape entry ﬁeld.

The user can also select a shape by simply entering the shape name in the shape entry ﬁeld.

Note

To display the shape name at the mouse pointer, click the right mouse button while pointing at the shape in the window. 3. A conditional statement allows the value of a parameter in a graphics command to change based upon a speciﬁed condition. To create a conditional, place the cursor in the Conditional entry ﬁeld. Enter the conditional statement according to the rules in “Ovation NT Graphics Language Manual” (NT-0091).

11/01 4-99 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-26. Shape

To clear or erase the conditional statement, press the clear button above the entry ﬁeld.

4. Select one of the following buttons:

Ok — Saves the selected settings, and quits the GBNT:Shape Library window.

Apply — Saves the selected settings, but the GBNT:Shape Library window remains open.

Cancel — Quits the GBNT:Shape Library window without saving changes.

5. Move the pointer to the drawing canvas. Press and hold the left mouse button to display the shape’s outlining rectangle. Move the rectangle to the desired location on the screen. Do not release the mouse button while moving the rectangle. The outlining rectangle for a shape is a ﬁxed size; therefore, it is not “dragged” like other outlining rectangles.

6. Release the mouse button, and the shape displays.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-100 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-26. Shape

Notes

When a shape is drawn/added initially to a graphic, it is always drawn in its “as built” size. Once the shape is drawn/added to the graphic, it can be resized as desired. To separate a shape into its individual items, select the Unshape menu item from the Edit menu.

11/01 4-101 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-27. Macro

4-27. Macro

4-27.1. Overview

Macros are graphic ﬁles built within GBNT which are used to integrate a set of graphics commands into another diagram. Logic, conditionals, pointer commands, as well as display items, can be used to create macros. (See “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for information on logic commands and conditionals.)

Macros automate the tedious and repetitive tasks that would otherwise require the user to repeatedly draw the same diagram or diagram section. After macros are created and integrated into a parent diagram, they function as a single entity. They can be moved, copied, grouped, resized, and erased within a diagram. They cannot be rotated or inverted. The attributes of the items in the macro (color, line pattern, ﬁll pattern, line width and so forth) cannot be changed.

The following sections discuss the use of macros: • Naming macros (Section 4-27.2). • Macro rules (Section 4-27.3). • Tagging macro parameters to be substituted in the macro ﬁle (Section 4-27.4). • Creating and editing macros (Section 4-27.5).

4-27.2. Naming Macros

Macro diagrams must be named according to a predefined naming convention. It is your responsibility to follow this convention and to maintain the macro diagrams in the speciﬁed directory. If these rules are not followed, an error message will display when the user tries to use the macro in another diagram.

Macro graphics reside in the system macro directory and are named in the following way:

macroN.diag

macroN.src

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-102 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-27. Macro

where:

n = the macro number (1 through 65,535)

The macro name is not case sensitive. That is, macro1.src is the same as MACRO1.src. However, leading zeros are not permitted in the number portion of the name. For example, macro0001.src is not a valid macro ﬁlename.

It is your responsibility to create macro files in the proper directory. If the macro file does not reside in the proper directory, you will not be able to use the macro. If running GBNT offline, the system macro directory is defined as INSTALLATION_DIR/mmi/graphics/macros, where INSTALLATION_DIR is the path where the offline GBNT was installed. If running GBNT online, the system macro directory is the Macros node under the system Graphics node in the Ovation Developer Studio hierarchy (see “Ovation NT Developer Studio User Guide” (NT- 0060)).

When macros are created in the ofﬂine version of GBNT, they can only be added to the Ovation NT Developer Studio (online version of GBNT) by using the Import Graphics program (see Appendix D).

When a macro graphic is saved/compiled, both a .src version and a .diag version is created (like any other graphic). The .diag version of the macro is read into the parent diagram when a macro is used — not the .src version.

When you save a macro graphic in GBNT (either online or offline), an associated macro previewfile is written.The macro previewfile is an external bitmap file used to previewthe macro on the GBNT:Macro dialog. The file is created in the system macro directory where the macro graphic file resides. It is named the same as the macro graphic file but with a “.bmp” file extension. For example, the preview file for macro1.src is macro1.bmp. Note that the macro preview bitmap file is not generated during a compile operation — it is only generated when a macro graphic is saved within GBNT.

Similarly, when you define macro notes and comments for a macro graphic in GBNT (see Section 4-28), an external text file is created. The macro notes file is used to display notes/comments on the macro dialog. The file is created in the system macro directory where the macro graphic file resides. It is named the same as the macro graphic file but with a “.notes” file extension. For instance, the notes file for macro1.src is macro1.notes. When importing macros into the Ovation Developer Studio, the associated macro preview bitmap file and macro notes files are also imported.

11/01 4-103 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-27. Macro

4-27.3. Macro Rules

The following rules must be followed when creating macros:

1. When a macro is loaded into the parent diagram, GBNT checks that the correct number of parameters are passed to the macro for substitution. The exact number of expected parameters must be passed to the macro. It is not acceptable to pass too many or too few. For all parameter types, the number expected is determined by the largest index used in the macro file. For example, if $D1 and $D34 are the only $D tagout parameters specified in the macro file, then the number of expected process point parameters to be passed to the macro will be 34. Therefore, when creating macro files, do not skip indices. 2. None of the tagout parameters are case sensitive. For example, “$T1” is the same as “$t1” and $SETn is the same as $setn.

3. The MACRO graphic command is valid in all sections of the parent graphic. However, depending on the contents of a particular macro, some macros are restricted as to where they can be added in the parent graphic. Consider the following: • If a macro contains commands in more than one section (for example, commands in the background section and commands in the foreground section), the macro must be placed in the diagram section of the parent graphic. • If a macro contains only keyboard data, the macro can go in the diagram or the keyboard section of the parent graphic. • If a macro contains only background, or only foreground, or only trigger data, the macro can go in any section of the parent graphic, except keyboard, because the graphic commands valid in any one of these sections are also valid in the other sections.

4. Where a macro is placed in the parent graphic controls where the items comprising the macro are added. Consider the following: • If a macro exists in the diagram section of the parent graphic, all of the items in the background section of the macro are added to the beginning of the background section of the parent graphic, all of the items in the foreground section are added to the beginning of the foreground section, and so forth. Therefore, macro items will display on the screen before items that are just part of the parent graphic (those not part of the macro).

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-104 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-27. Macro

• If a macro exists in any other section (for example, background), the items comprising the macro are merged into that section according to where the MACRO command is placed in that section. Note that if macro5.src contains a process point value in the foreground, and you add macro5 to the background section of the parent graphic, the process point value will be merged into the background section, and it will not update even though it was in the foreground in the actual macro ﬁle.

Note

The place of items within the macro is always maintained if the macro is added to the diagram section of the parent graphic. 5. When multiple MACRO commands exist in the diagram section of the parent graphic, the order of the MACRO commands deﬁnes the display order of the items comprising each macro on the parent graphic.

4-27.4. Tagging Macro Parameters to be Substituted in the Macro File

Macro diagrams can be created with tagout (that is, substitution) parameters so that the user can pass data to the macro when it is loaded into the parent diagram. The following types of tagout parameters can be passed to macros: • $Dn pointers are used to tag substitutable process point names, where n = 1 through 99. • “$Tn” strings are used to tag substitutable text strings in the background section of a graphic, where n = 1 through 50. • “$Tn” strings are used to tag substitutable text strings in the foreground, trigger, and/or keyboard sections of a graphic, where n = 1 through 50. • $SETn variables are used to tag substitutable set numbers, where n = 1 through 256. • $CONSTn variables are used to tag substitutable integers/real numbers, where n = 1 through 256. • $STATUS variables are used to tag substitutable status words, where n = 1 through 256. • $COLORn variables are used to tag substitutable colors, where n = 1 through 100.

11/01 4-105 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-27. Macro

• $OL_COLORn variables are used to tag substitutable OL colors, where n = 1 through 100.

Replacing the tagout parameters with data (that is, point names, constants, colors, and so forth) can be done interactively through the GBNT:Macro dialog or through the MACRO command via the integrated source editor. (See “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for information on source commands.)

Process Point Parameter ($Dn) Substitution)

You can specify a process point name to be passed into a macro with a $Dn tagout parameter. $Dn parameters are valid in any command in a graphic where a process point name is expected (for example, bar, process point, trend, and so forth). This includes operands to conditional expressions in graphics. Some examples of source commands with tagged-out point name parameters in a macro graphic are as follows:

BAR 5000 6000 1000 4000 UP $D1 AV $D2 LL $D3 HL

MATH $P1 $R0 ($D1 + $D2)

PROCESS_PT 6920 1794 6 2 RIGHT0 ON HORZ VECTOR_OVER 321 734 1 $D1 AV 0 100 Once the $D tagout parameters are added to the macro graphic, you can pass the actual process points to the macro to replace the $D tagouts. Note that only point names — not point name/record ﬁeld pairs — can be passed to a macro to replace $D tagouts. Record ﬁelds cannot be passed to a macro.

Upon substitution, GBNT checks that each process point being substituted for a $D tagout is valid in the given context. If the $D tagout has an associated record field beside it in the macro file, GBNT checks that the point passed for that $D tagout is of the correct type for that record field. For example, if A100 is passed for $D1 DS, GBNT checks that A100 is a point type which has a DS record field.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-106 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-27. Macro

Text String Parameter ($Tn) Substitution

You can specify a text string to be passed into a macro with a $Tn tagout parameter. The $Tn tagout parameters must be delimited by single or double quotes in the macro ﬁle (always quote $Tn tagouts in dialogs unless told not to in the entry ﬁeld label).

“$Tn” tagout strings are valid in the following commands/dialogs: TEXT, MULTI_TEXT, RUN_PROGRAMS, POKE_FLD (type 7 and 23), OL_BUTTON, (poke type 7 and 23), and FUNC_KEY. Some examples of source commands with tagged-out text strings are as follows:

TEXT 1000 1000 “$T1” (A100>A200) “$T2” HORZ VECTOR_OVER 120 310 1

POKE_FLD 1000 1000 1000 1000 ON 7 1204“$T1” $CONST1 $D1 ID $SET1 The substitution strings passed to the macro (not including the quote characters) are limited to 80 characters. The exception to this limit is for strings substituted for MULTI_TEXT commands, which are limited to 30 characters.

The macro text string substitution mechanism separates the “$T” tagouts in the background section of a macro from the “$T” tagouts in other sections (foreground, trigger, and keyboard) for purposes of backwards compatibility to earlier version of the Graphics Builder. For example, “$T1” in a TEXT command in the background is distinct from “$T1” in a TEXT command in the foreground. However, “$T1” in a TEXT command in the foreground is the same as “$T1” in a POKE_FLD command in the keyboard section and $T1” in a TEXT command in the trigger section.

The default labels on the GBNT:Macro dialog for “$Tn” tagouts in the macro ﬁle are: $T1(BG), $T2(BG) ... $Tn(BG) for background text and $T1(other), $T2(other) ... $Tn(other) for other sections.

Set Number Parameter ($SET) Substitution

You can specify a set number (or SETn variable) to be passed into a macro with a $SETn tagout parameter. $SETn tagout parameters are valid in the following source commands in macros:

1. The set number in the SETVAL command.

SETVAL $SET1 3 2. The set number in the poke type 23 POKE_FLD and the poke type 23 OL_BUTTON commands.

POKE_FLD 1000 2000 500 750 ON 23 $SET1 1 1 6 0 6 A100 ID A200 ID 1 9 2

11/01 4-107 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-27. Macro

OL_BUTTON 1000 2000 HORZ ROUNDED TEXT_LABEL VECTOR 120 310 1 “label” EXEC_POKE 23 $SET1 1 1 6 0 6 A100 ID A200 ID 1 9 2 3. The SETn of a set conditional.

COLOR FG BLACK ($SET1) 3 RED GREEN YELLOW 4. The SETn operand in an expression conditional.

COLOR FG BLACK ($SET1 = 2) RED 5. Integral set number arguments to application programs in a poke list. Poke lists exist in the POKE_FLD (type 7 and 23), OL_BUTTON (poke type 7 and 23), RUN_PROGRAMS, and FUNC_KEY commands.

POKE_FLD 1000 2000 500 750 ON 23 1 1 1 6 0 6 A100 ID A200 ID 1 $SET1 2

OL_BUTTON 1000 2000 HORZ ROUNDED TEXT_LABEL VECTOR 120 310 1 “label” EXEC_POKE 23 1 1 1 6 0 6 A100 ID A200 ID 1 $SET1 2

RUN_PROGRAMS 1 6 0 6 A100 ID A200 ID 1 $SET1 2 You can specify $SET tagouts in commands or from the applicable dialogs. However, there is no corresponding dialog for the SETVAL command. Use the $SET button on the GBNT:Poke dialog or the corresponding button on the GBNT:OL_Button dialog to specify a $SET tagout in a poke type 23.

You can enter the $SET tagouts in conditionals on any of the dialogs that have conditional ﬁelds (Color, Process Point, Fill Pattern, Line Pattern, Shape Library, Blink, and Text). You can enter $SETn tagouts in the argument lists to application programs on the Poke, OL_Button, and Function Key dialogs.

After the $SETn tagouts are added to the macro, the user can pass integral set numbers (1 through 255) for the $SETn tagouts when the macro is used in a parent graphic. Depending on the context of the $SETn tagout, sometimes the integral set number is substituted, and other times the corresponding SETn variable is substituted.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-108 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-27. Macro

Integer/Real Constant ($CONSTn) Substitution

You can specify an integer/real number to be passed into a macro with a $CONSTn tagout parameter. $CONSTn tagout parameters can be used to pass the following:

1. Integer/real operands in conditional expressions.

2. Integer/real operands in MATH expressions.

3. Integer/real arguments to a poke type 7 list in the RUN_PROGRAMS, POKE_FLD, OL_BUTTONS, and FUNC_KEY commands.

No other integer/real numbers can be tagged out (that is, no x, y coordinates, widths, heights, and so forth). Some examples of source commands in a macro with tagged out integer/real data are shown below:

COLOR FG RED (A199 AV > $CONST1) GREEN BG BLACK

MATH $P1 $R0 ((A100 + $CONST1) / $CONST2))

POKE_FLD 1000 2000 500 750 ON 23 1 1 1 6 0 6 A100 ID A200 ID 1 $CONST1 2

OL_BUTTON 1000 2000 HORZ ROUNDED TEXT_LABEL VECTOR 120 310 1 “label” EXEC_POKE 23 1 1 1 6 0 1 A100 ID A200 ID 1 $CONST2 2

RUN_PROGRAMS 1 6 0 6 A100 ID A200 ID 1 $CONST1 2 In addition to the source commands, the user can use the applicable dialogs to tagout $CONST data in the macro ﬁle. However, there are no dialogs for the MATH and RUN_PROGRAMS commands, so $CONST tagouts for those commands must be entered via the source editor. In addition, you can interactively enter the $CONSTn tagouts in conditionals on any of the dialogs having conditional ﬁelds (Color, Process Point, Fill Pattern, Line Pattern, Shape Library, Blink and Text).

Real numbers passed to the macro must have a digit before and after the decimal point.

Note that either $CONSTn or $SETn tagout parameters may be used to pass an integer set number of an application program in a poke type 7 or 23 list (in the RUN_PROGRAMS, POKE_FLD, OL_BUTTON, or FUNC_KEY commands).

11/01 4-109 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-27. Macro

Status Word Parameter ($STATUSn) Substitution

You can specify status word operands (Hdwfail, Good, Alarmack, and so forth) in conditional expressions to be passed into a macro with $STATUSn tagout parameters. An example of a tagged out status word in a source command in a macro is the following:

COLOR FG BLACK (D100 DS = $STATUS1) GREEN BG WHITE (D100 DS = $STATUS2) YELLOW A list of valid status words can be found in “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” NT-0091).

Color Parameter ($COLORn) & OL Color Parameter ($OL_COLORn) Substitution

You can specify a color or an OL color to be passed into a macro with a $COLORn or $OL_COLORn tagout parameter. An example of a color command in a macro ﬁle with tagged out colors and tagged out OL colors is as follows:

COLOR FG $COLOR1 BG $COLOR2 (D100 DS = SET) $COLOR3 ER $COLOR4 OL $OL_COLOR1 The $COLORn and $OL_COLORn tagout parameters can be speciﬁed via the GBNT:Color dialog or the COLOR command syntax. See Section 4-2.3 and “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for more information respectively.

Unlike any of the other types of parameters that can be tagged out in a macro (for example, $Dn, $Tn, $SETn, and so forth), $COLORn tagouts must be assigned values in order to display the macro graphic in GBNT (otherwise, GBNT would not know what color to use to display the $COLORn items in the macro itself).

GBNT defaults the display values for all $COLORn tagouts to black and defaults the display values for all $OL_COLORn tagouts to OL color 0. The $color values and $ol_color values buttons are used to set/change the default display colors. See Section 4-2.3 for information on using these buttons.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-110 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-27. Macro

4-27.5. Creating and Editing Macros

Use the following procedures to create macros.

1. Access the main GBNT window.

2. Create a macro in the same way you would create any other type of diagram. Use display items, logic, conditionals, tagout parameters (where applicable in the draw item dialogs), and so forth.

3. Save the ﬁle. Make sure you save it to the macro directory and name it according to the macro naming convention (see Section 4-27.2).

4. Once the file is saved, you can access the GBNT:Macro Notes & Parameter Descriptions dialog (from the GBNT:Draw toolbar). All of the tagout parameters that were specified in the macro (that was just saved) will be listed in this dialog. (For example, it will list that you specified 3 $Dn parameters, 2 $Tn (bg) parameters, 1 $SETn parameter, and 2$CONSTn.) See below.

11/01 4-111 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-27. Macro

5. Make any desired changes to the tagout labels. If you do not make any customized labels, the defaults will be used. Select the OK button to save the changes.

For information on using the GBNT:Macro Notes & Parameter Descriptions window, see Section 4-28.

6. Select the Macro button on the GBNT:Draw toolbar to access the GBNT:Macro dialog. Notice that the macro that was saved now appears in the scrolling list. and the labels that were customized also appear on the window. See below.

Figure 4-30. GBNT:Macro Dialog

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-112 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-27. Macro

Using the Macro Dialog to Add Parameter Values

The GBNT:Macro dialog (Figure 4-30) is used to interactively add a macro to a graphic or change existing macros. It displays a list of all the available macros in your system. From this dialog, you can preview the macro, see how many parameters it has, view user notes/comments for it, draw it, and/or edit it.

Table 4-3 gives an overview of the GBNT:Macro dialog.

Table 4-3. GBNT:Macro Dialog Fields and Descriptions Dialog Field Description Refresh List Button Used to refresh the scrolling list of available macros. By default, this list is created once — when GBNT is invoked. The list is never updated after that except when this button is pressed. If you add/delete macros, or if you make any changes to the macro labels, then press this button to see the changes reﬂected in the list. Scrolling List Displays the list of available macros. Preview Button and Box Allows you to see a “preview” of the macro that was selected in the scrolling list (if an associated preview bitmap ﬁle exists for the selected macro). This is a scaled version of the macro if the macro is larger than the preview box.

You can previewthe macro in its actual size using the Windows PAINT program by clicking on the scaled previewbox and/or by pressing the preview button again. If a previewbitmap ﬁle does not exist for the selected macro, the previewbox is blank and the preview button is inactive. Note that you cannot edit a macro from the PAINT preview window. Edit Button Pressing the edit button invokes a new instance of GBNT with the given macro graphic loaded and ready for editing. Once the changes are saved, you can see the changes reﬂected on the GBNT:Macro dialog, by reselecting the macro from the scrolling list.

11/01 4-113 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-27. Macro

Table 4-3. GBNT:Macro Dialog Fields and Descriptions (Cont’d) Dialog Field Description Notes Button Allows you to see the associated notes/comments for the macro selected from the scrolling list (if an associated notes ﬁle exists).

The notes button displays the macro notes/comments in a pop- up dialog. These notes/comments are read-only from this pop- up dialog. Use the GBNT:Macro Notes & Parameter Descriptions dialog to create/edit macro notes and comments; see Section 4-28. If a macro notes/comments file does not exist, the notes button is inactive. Load History Values Button Used to fill the parameter values with the last displayed values in the current edit session. If there is at least one applicable history value for the selected macro, this button is active. Note that GBNT only stores history values throughout the edit session. Each instance of GBNT maintains its own history list, and when that instance of GBNT is closed, its history list is lost. Parameter Counts This is a rowof parameter count labels and a rowof associated counts. Every time a new macro is selected from the scrolling list, the count labels and counts are activated accordingly. This immediately tells you how many (and what kind) of data must be passed to the macro. They are read-only fields. Parameter List/Table Displays the labels and values for the tagout parameters. Scale Factors (w), (h) Used to scale a selected macro. Macros can be scaled as long as they do not contain bitmap text. If the selected macro contains as least one item created with bitmap text, the macro cannot be scaled and the scale factor fields gray out.

To drawa macro in its as built size, set the scale factors to 1 (for larger macros, enter a value greater than 1; for smaller macros, enter a value less than 1). Valid scale factors are positive integer/ real numbers. Note that GBNT checks that no individual item making up the macro is scaled too large or too small when the overall macro is scaled by the speciﬁed factors. OK Button Saves the selected settings, and quits the GBNT:Macro window. Apply Button Saves the selected settings, but the GBNT:Macro window remains open.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-114 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-27. Macro

Table 4-3. GBNT:Macro Dialog Fields and Descriptions (Cont’d) Dialog Field Description Cancel Button Saves the selected settings, but the GBNT:Macro window remains open. Help Button Displays help on the GBNT:Macro dialog window

Follow the steps below to add values to tagout parameters in the GBNT:Macro dialog.

1. Select a macro from the scrolling list.

2. Go to the parameter list and select a tagout parameter. The text entry ﬁeld will highlight. Type in the value for that parameter.

Note

The dividing line between the columns in the parameter list is moveable. To move the dividing line, position the mouse pointer over the dividing line until the pointer turns into a double-headed arrow, and then drag the dividing line to the desired position.

11/01 4-115 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-27. Macro

3. For certain parameter types ($SET, $STATUS, $COLOR, and $OL_COLOR), values must be obtained via pop-up dialogs. For example, click on the $SET entry ﬁeld (shown below). A button displays on the right side of the entry ﬁeld. See below.

4. Select the button, and the Select $SETn value dialog displays. See below.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-116 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-27. Macro

5. Select set# or $SETn from the value type drop-down menu. Then select a value from the scrolling list. Note that the pop-up dialogs for $STATUS, $COLOR, and $OL_COLOR operate in a similar fashion.

6. Once all of the parameter values have been deﬁned, select the OK or Apply button.

GBNT checks the macro parameters and scale factors speciﬁed. If one or more errors is detected in the parameter list, the right column of the parameter list is highlighted in red and a pop-up error dialog displays.

If no errors are found, GBNT enters drawmode, prompting the user to drag the macro outlining rectangle to position it on the graphic. After the macro is drawn, the macro dialog is automatically closed.

Editing a Macro File

Follow the steps below to edit a macro ﬁle.

1. Select a macro from the scrolling list on the Macro dialog.

2. Select the edit button.

A new instance of GBNT displays with the given macro graphic loaded and ready for editing.

3. Edit the macro as desired in the new instance of GBNT. Then save the macro under the same name in the new instance of GBNT.

Changing an Instance of a Macro on a Parent Graphic

1. Select the macro on the parent diagram that you want to change.

2. Pull down the Edit menu, and select Properties.

The GBNT:Macro dialog appears, showing the current settings for the macro selected.

3. Make changes to the macro on the GBNT:Macro dialog as desired.

4. Once all of the changes have been made, select the OK or Apply button on the GBNT:Macro dialog.

11/01 4-117 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-28. Macro Notes/Parameters Description

4-28. Macro Notes/Parameters Description

The GBNT:Macro Notes & Parameter Descriptions dialog is used to interactively create/edit the macro parameter descriptions/labels, and to interactively create/edit macro notes/comments.

The macros notes and the macro parameter descriptions/labels are used only on the GBNT:Macro dialog (see Section 4). The use of notes and descriptions is optional. They can be used by someone creating a macro to clarify the data that must be passed to the macro and to list any special usage instructions or comments.

The GBNT:Macro Notes & Parameter Descriptions dialog is only accessible when a macro graphic is loaded in GBNT. If a macro graphic is not currently open in GBNT, neither the toolbar button on the Draw toolbar nor the menu item on the Options menu is active. Note that if you are running GBNT ofﬂine and are creating a new graphic that has not yet been saved, GBNT will not give you access to this dialog. To resolve this, simply save the new graphic and name it according to the macro naming convention (see Section 4). As soon as you save the graphic, the toolbar button and the menu item for this dialog will become active. Also note that this is not an issue when running GBNT online because the user must specify the name of the macro in the Studio before GBNT is invoked.

To access the GBNT:Macro Notes & Parameter Descriptions dialog, follow the steps below:

1. Select the Macro Notes/Params button on the GBNT:Draw toolbar.

Macro Notes/Params

Note

The GBNT:Macro Notes & Parameter Descriptions dialog, can also be accessed from the main GBNT Options menu.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-118 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-28. Macro Notes/Parameters Description

The GBNT:Macro Notes & Parameter Descriptions dialog displays (see Figure 4-31).

Figure 4-31. GBNT:Macro Notes & Parameter Descriptions Window

2. At the top of the dialog is the Parameter Descriptions box. Underneath that heading is a row of parameter count labels and a row of associated counts immediately below the labels. These counts are read-only fields.

The count labels and the associated counts are initialized and activated when the macro is initially loaded into GBNT, each time this dialog is displayed, each time the OK button is pressed, and when the re-scan for parameters button is pressed. These counts are not automatically updated as the user adds/deletes items to/from the macro during an edit session. The counts tell the user how many (and what kind of) data must be passed to the macro — thus for what data the user can deﬁne descriptive and meaningful labels.

11/01 4-119 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-28. Macro Notes/Parameters Description

3. Immediately below the counts is the parameter list. This list is generated by GBNT and reﬂects the number and types of parameters deﬁned for the macro (see Section 4 for information on valid macros parameters). This list directly correlates to the information shown in the counts.

To enter parameter descriptions/labels, go to the parameter list. First, select the parameter by clicking in the left column. The parameter and text entry ﬁeld are highlighted. Enter a description/label in the entry ﬁeld. Up to 80 characters may be used. Single or double quotes may be used, but are not required. You are not required to specify descriptions/labels for any or all of the parameters in the list.

The parameter list is initialized and activated when the macro is initially loaded into GBNT, each time this dialog is displayed, each time the OK button is pressed, and when the re-scan for parameters button is pressed.

4. The load history descriptions button is only applicable when running GBNT offline. It is used to fill blank text entry fields with the associated history label.

For every possible macro parameter, GBNT maintains a history description/ label during the current edit session. The applicable history values are updated every time a macro is loaded/opened in GBNT, and also when the user enters/ changes a description/label from this dialog.

The load history descriptions function gives the user the capability to deﬁne descriptive labels for one macro, load a similar macro in the same instance of GBNT, and then copy the descriptions from the last macro without having to retype them. This button is only active if one or more descriptions in the right column of the parameter list is blank and a history value exists for it.

History values are not stored between edit sessions of GBNT. This button is not applicable when running GBNT online because you cannot open a new graphic in the same GBNT window.

5. Press the re-scan for parameters button to rebuild the parameter list. Existing user-deﬁned labels will be restored when the list is rebuilt. Parameters may be added/deleted from the list if the user has added/deleted/changed items in the macro during the current edit session since the last time the list was updated.

6. The Notes/Comments text field allows the user to define/edit any notes, instructions, comments, and so forth that the end user of the macro may find helpful. This data will be accessible to the end user from the GBNT:Macro dialog (see Section 4).

When the OK button is pressed, the data in the Notes/Comments field is written to an external notes file named “macroN.notes” where N is the number of the currently loaded macro. This file is saved in the same directory as the macro graphic itself.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-120 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-28. Macro Notes/Parameters Description

7. Once all of the desired information has been entered, select one of the following buttons:

Ok — Saves the selected settings, and quits the GBNT:Macro Notes & Parameter Descriptions window.

Cancel — Quits the GBNT:Macro Notes & Parameter Descriptions window without saving any changes.

You are not required to specify descriptions/labels for any or all of the parameters in the list. However, if you press the OK button and there are undefined descriptions, GBNT may display a warning message (see Section 3-4.12 on undefined warning messages). See below:

• Press Yes to return to the GBNT:Macro Notes & Parameter Descriptions window and deﬁne the parameters you missed.

• Press No to keep the labels blank and quit the GBNT:Macro Notes & Parameter Descriptions window.

11/01 4-121 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-29. Draw Button Reference List for Keyboard Items

4-29. Draw Button Reference List for Keyboard Items

The following sections discuss the GBNT draw items that are valid in the keyboard section of a diagram.

Draw Item Section Number Poke Field Section 4-30 Entry Field Section 4-31 OL Slider Section 4-32 OL Check Box Section 4-33 OL Choice Section 4-34 OL Button Section 4-35 OL Event Menu Section 4-36 Function Key Section 4-37

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-122 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-30. Poke Field

4-30. Poke Field

The Poke Field button defines an invisible rectangular area (poke field) on a process diagram that is activated when selected with the mouse. Various functions can be performed, depending on the type of poke field selected. A poke field can be turned on or off. If a poke field is off, a box is not displayed around the poke field area on the Ovation NT Operator Station, and the operator cannot activate the poke by selecting it.

1. Select the Poke Field button on the GBNT:Draw toolbar. This item may be placed in the Keyboard section only.

Poke Field

The GBNT:Poke window displays (see Figure 4-32).

Figure 4-32. GBNT:Poke Window

2. From the Poke Type drop-down menu, select the type of poke ﬁeld for the diagram. The choices are listed belowand described in Section 4-30.1 through Section 4-30.9.

Process Pt (0) — displays information on the process point speciﬁed. See “Ovation Record Types Reference Manual” (R3-1140) for information on process points and record ﬁelds.

11/01 4-123 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-30. Poke Field

Diagram/Group (2) — displays a speciﬁed process diagram with a speciﬁed group of points. See “Ovation NT Developer Studio User’s Guide” (NT-0060) for information on point groups.

Program (3) — runs an application program speciﬁed by a program number. See “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for information on application programs.

Ladder (6) — selects an element (contact/coil) on a ladder diagram for control. This poke ﬁeld type is reserved for WPC (Westinghouse Process Control, Inc.) use only.

Options (7) — runs one or more application programs speciﬁed by program number and passes any required arguments. See “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for information on application programs.

Window (8) — displays a speciﬁed window diagram with a point group and a list of points to substitute for $W points. See “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for more information on $W points.

Application (9) — runs an operating system process deﬁned by a command line.

Help (20) — not available in the current release of the Ovation NT software.

Control (23) — similar to the Options (7) poke field except that the number and set value specified here must match the set number and set value that was defined in the poke field that was used to select the device. See “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for information on set numbers and set values.

Notes

The appearance of the GBNT:Poke window changes depending on the type of poke field selected. The parameters for the poke field types are discussed below. Pokes have no color associated with them in the .diag file. In GBNT when loading a .diag file, the color for the poke field will default to BG white, FG black, and ER white. See Section 4-2.3 for information on color.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-124 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-30. Poke Field

4-30.1. Process Point (0) Poke Field

1. If Process Pt (0) is selected from the Poke Type drop-down menu, the GBNT:Poke window appears as shown below:

2. Enter the process point name and record field in the Pt Name entry field. See “Ovation Record Types Reference Manual” (R3-1140) for more information on process points and record fields.

3. From the State choice buttons, select one of the following options:

on — activates the poke ﬁeld when the diagram displays at the Ovation NT Operator Station.

off — deactivates the poke ﬁeld when the diagram displays at the Ovation NT Operator Station.

4. Select one of the following buttons:

Ok — Saves the selected settings, and quits the GBNT:Poke window.

Apply — Saves the selected settings, but the GBNT:Poke window remains open.

Cancel — Quits the GBNT:Poke window without saving any changes.

5. Move the pointer to the drawing canvas. Press and hold the left mouse button to mark the upper left corner of the poke ﬁeld, and drag a rectangle to the desired dimension. Do not release the mouse button while drawing the poke ﬁeld.

6. Release the mouse button, and the poke ﬁeld displays.

11/01 4-125 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-30. Poke Field

4-30.2. Diagram/Group (2) Poke Field

1. If Diagram/Group (2) is selected from the Poke Type drop-down menu, the GBNT:Poke window appears as shown below.

2. Enter the diagram number in the Diag # entry ﬁeld. Use the increment/ decrement buttons to adjust the value, if needed. Valid range is 0 through 65,535.

3. Enter the group number in the Group # entry ﬁeld. Use the increment/ decrement buttons to adjust the value, if needed.Valid range is 0 through 5,000.

4. From the State choice buttons, select one of the following choices:

on — activates the poke ﬁeld when the diagram displays on the Ovation NT Operator Station.

off — deactivates the poke ﬁeld when the diagram displays on the Ovation NT Operator Station.

5. Select one of the following buttons:

Ok — Saves the selected settings, and quits the GBNT:Poke window.

Apply — Saves the selected settings, but the GBNT:Poke window remains open.

Cancel — Quits the GBNT:Poke window without saving any changes.

6. Move the pointer to the drawing canvas. Press and hold the left mouse button to mark the upper left corner of the poke ﬁeld, and drag a rectangle to the desired dimension. Do not release the mouse button while drawing the poke ﬁeld.

7. Release the mouse button, and the poke ﬁeld displays.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-126 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-30. Poke Field

4-30.3. Program (3) Poke Field

1. If Program (3) is selected from the Poke Type drop-down menu, the GBNT:Poke window appears as shown below.

2. Enter the program number in the Prog # entry ﬁeld. Use the increment/ decrement buttons to adjust the value, if needed. Valid range is 1 through 65,535. See “Ovation NT Graphic Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for information on application programs.

3. From the State choice buttons, select one of the following choices:

on — activates the poke ﬁeld when the diagram displays on the Ovation NT Operator Station.

off — deactivates the poke ﬁeld when the diagram displays on the Ovation NT Operator Station.

4. Select one of the following buttons:

Ok — Saves the selected settings, and quits the GBNT:Poke window.

Apply — Saves the selected settings, but the GBNT:Poke window remains open.

Cancel — Quits the GBNT:Poke window without saving any changes.

6. Release the mouse button, and the poke ﬁeld displays.

11/01 4-127 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-30. Poke Field

4-30.4. Ladder (6) Poke Field

The Ladder poke ﬁeld is used for internal processing. GBNT supports this function but is not intended for the user. This poke ﬁeld is reserved for WPC use only.

4-30.5. Options (7) Poke Field

1. If Options (7) is selected from the Poke Type drop-down menu, the GBNT:Poke window appears as shown below:

Note

This type of poke field deals with graphics application programs. See “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for information on these programs. 2. Enter the total number of application programs to run in the # Lists entry field, or use the increment/decrement buttons. Steps 3 through 7 discuss defining the rest of the list. Valid range is 1 through 65,535.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-128 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-30. Poke Field

3. The Current List entry field displays the index of the current program being created/edited. For example, if 5 is entered for # Lists, then Current List would display a 1 when the first program of the 5 was in edit. Also, this entry field is used when the user wants to view or edit a particular program after it has already been defined (if more than one program is defined).

4. Go to the Prog # entry field, and enter the application program number to be called by the poke field. The program number may be specified as an integer or as a $P $In pointer/offset pair.

5. Enter the diagram number in the Diag # entry ﬁeld. The diagram number may be speciﬁed as an integer (valid range is 0 through 65,535) or as a $P $In pointer/offset pair.

6. Enter the number of arguments for the current application program in the # Args entry ﬁeld. Use the increment/decrement buttons to adjust the value, if needed.

7. Enter the arguments in the Args scrolling list. Note that string arguments are limited to 130 characters.

8. After all of the arguments have been entered, select the Create button. (See the section below for information on modifying entries.)

The scrolling list clears, and the Current List entry ﬁeld increments for the next program list.

9. Continue entering information (Prog #, Diag #, #Args, and Args scrolling list, as described in Steps 4 through 7) for all of the application programs speciﬁed in the # Lists entry ﬁeld. After completing the information for each program, select the Create button.

10. From the State choice buttons, select one of the following choices:

on — activates the poke ﬁeld when the diagram displays on the Ovation NT Operator Station.

off — deactivates the poke ﬁeld when the diagram displays on the Ovation NT Operator Station.

11. Select one of the following buttons:

Ok — Saves the selected settings, and quits the GBNT:Poke window.

Apply — Saves the selected settings, but the GBNT:Poke window remains open.

Cancel — Quits the GBNT:Poke window without saving any changes.

11/01 4-129 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-30. Poke Field

12. Move the pointer to the drawing canvas. Press and hold the left mouse button to mark the upper left corner of the poke ﬁeld, and drag a rectangle to the desired dimension. Do not release the mouse button while drawing the poke ﬁeld.

13. Release the mouse button, and the poke ﬁeld displays.

Modifying scrolling list entries (Options Poke Field)

After the arguments have been entered in the scrolling list, it may be necessary to modify the entries (add, delete, change). To do this, follow the steps below:

1. Enter the number of the program to be modiﬁed in the Current List entry ﬁeld.

2. If adding or deleting entries, modify the number of arguments by entering a new value in the # Args entry ﬁeld, or use the increment/decrement buttons.

3. Modify the Args scrolling list, as needed.

4. After all modiﬁcations have been made to the scrolling list, select the Change button. The modiﬁcations will not be saved until the Change button is selected.

Note

The Change button is only used when changing a program that has already been entered. 5. Select the Clear button to clear the window and start a new program entry.

Note

The Delete button deletes all of the information on the GBNT:Poke window except for the value speciﬁed in the # Lists entry ﬁeld. It is not used to delete individual entries in the scrolling list of arguments.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-130 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-30. Poke Field

4-30.6. Window (8) Poke Field

1. If Window (8) is selected from the Poke Type drop-down menu, the GBNT:Poke window appears as shown below:

2. Enter the diagram number in the Diag # entry ﬁeld. Use the increment/ decrement buttons to adjust the value, if needed. Valid range is 0 through 65,535.

3. Enter the group number in the Group # entry ﬁeld. Use the increment/ decrement buttons to adjust the value, if needed. Valid range is -1 through 5,000. A group number of -1 means that the active group for the main screen diagram should be used with this window.

4. Enter the point name(s) to substitute for the $W pointer(s) in the Points scrolling list. See “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT- 0091) for information on $W pointers.

5. From the State choice buttons, select one of the following choices:

on — activates the poke ﬁeld when the diagram displays on the Ovation NT Operator Station.

off — deactivates the poke ﬁeld when the diagram displays on the Ovation NT Operator Station.

11/01 4-131 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-30. Poke Field

6. Select one of the following buttons:

Ok — Saves the selected settings, and quits the GBNT:Poke window.

Apply — Saves the selected settings, but the GBNT:Poke window remains open.

Cancel — Quits the GBNT:Poke window without saving any changes.

7. Move the pointer to the drawing canvas. Press and hold the left mouse button to mark the upper left corner of the poke ﬁeld, and drag a rectangle to the desired dimension. Do not release the mouse button while drawing the poke ﬁeld.

8. Release the mouse button, and the poke ﬁeld displays.

4-30.7. Application (9) Poke Field

1. If Application (9) is selected from the Poke Type drop-down menu, the GBNT:Poke window appears as shown below:

2. Enter an ASCII command string in the Cmd Line entry ﬁeld. Do not enclose the string in quotes. The command line is limited to 130 characters.

3. From the State choice buttons, select one of the following choices:

on — activates the poke ﬁeld when the diagram displays on the Ovation NT Operator Station.

off — deactivates the poke ﬁeld when the diagram displays on the Ovation NT Operator Station.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-132 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-30. Poke Field

4. Select one of the following buttons:

Ok — Saves the selected settings, and quits the GBNT:Poke window.

Apply — Saves the selected settings, but the GBNT:Poke window remains open.

Cancel — Quits the GBNT:Poke window without saving any changes.

6. Release the mouse button, and the poke ﬁeld displays.

4-30.8. Help (20) Poke Field

Help poke ﬁelds are not supported in the current release of the Ovation NT software.

11/01 4-133 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-30. Poke Field

4-30.9. Control (23) Poke Field

1. If Control (23) is selected from the Poke Type drop-down menu, the GBNT:Poke window appears as shown below:

Note

This type of poke field deals with graphics application programs. See “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for more information on these programs. 2. The user may hard code the set number, or the user may specify the set number as a $SETn argument if the poke field is to be part of a macro file and the set number is to be a parameter to the macro.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-134 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-30. Poke Field

To hard code the set number, enter the set number in the Set Num entry ﬁeld. Use the increment/decrement buttons to adjust the value, if needed. Valid range is 1 through 255. See “Ovation Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT- 0091) for more information on set numbers.

To specify the set number as a $SETn argument, select the $SET choice button and then enter the “n” index in the entry ﬁeld to the right of the $SET choice button. For example, for $SET2, select the $SET choice button and enter a “2” in the entry ﬁeld beside it.

3. Enter the set value in the Set Value entry ﬁeld. Valid range is -32,767 through 32,767. See “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for information on set values.

4. Enter the total number of application programs to run in the # Lists entry ﬁeld, or use the increment/decrement buttons. Valid range is 1 through 65,535.

5. The Current List entry field displays the index of the current program being created/edited. For example, if 5 is entered for # Lists, then Current List would display a 1 when the first program of the 5 was in edit. Also, this entry field is used when the user wants to view or edit a particular program after it has already been defined (if more than one program is defined).

6. Go to the Prog # entry field, and enter the application program number to be called by the poke field. The program number may be specified as an integer or as a $P $In pointer/offset pair.

7. Enter the diagram number in the Diag # entry ﬁeld. The diagram number may be speciﬁed as an integer (valid range is 0 through 65,535) or as a $P $In pointer/offset pair.

8. Enter the number of arguments for the current application program in the # Args entry ﬁeld. Use the increment/decrement buttons to adjust the value, if needed.

9. Enter the arguments in the Args scrolling list. Note that string arguments are limited to 130 characters.

10. After all of the arguments have entered, select the Create button. (See the section below for information on modifying entries.)

The scrolling list clears, and the Current List entry ﬁeld increments for the next program list.

11/01 4-135 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-30. Poke Field

11. Continue entering information (Set Num, Set Value, Prog #, Diag #, # Args, and Args scrolling list) for all of the application programs speciﬁed in the # Lists entry ﬁeld. After completing the information for each program, select the Create button.

12. From the State choice buttons, select one of the following choices:

on — activates the poke ﬁeld when the diagram displays on the Ovation Operator Station.

off — deactivates the poke ﬁeld when the diagram displays on the Ovation Operator Station.

13. Select one of the following buttons:

Ok — Saves the selected settings, and quits the GBNT:Poke window.

Apply — Saves the selected settings, but the GBNT:Poke window remains open.

Cancel — Quits the GBNT:Poke window without saving any changes.

14. Move the pointer to the drawing canvas. Press and hold the left mouse button to mark the upper left corner of the poke ﬁeld, and drag a rectangle to the desired dimension. Do not release the mouse button while drawing the poke ﬁeld.

15. Release the mouse button, and the poke ﬁeld displays.

Modifying scrolling list entries (Control Poke Field)

After the arguments have been entered in the scrolling list, it may be necessary to modify the entries (add, delete, change). To do this, follow the steps below:

1. Enter the number of the program to be modiﬁed in the Current List entry ﬁeld.

2. If adding or deleting entries, modify the number of arguments by entering a new value in the # Args entry ﬁeld, or use the increment/decrement buttons.

3. Modify the Args scrolling list, as needed.

4. After all modiﬁcations have been made to the scrolling list, select the Change button. The modiﬁcations will not be saved until the Change button is selected.

Note

The Change button is only used when changing a program that has already been entered.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-136 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-30. Poke Field

5. Select the Clear button to clear the window and start a new program entry.

Note

11/01 4-137 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-31. Entry Field

4-31. Entry Field

The Entry Field button deﬁnes an area of the process diagram for displaying information that is entered by an operator or obtained from an Ovation NT Operator Station application program. There can be a maximum of 254 entry ﬁelds per diagram. The user may select the size of the text characters and the text in either a vector or bitmap font (see Section 2 for information on vector and bitmap fonts; also see Section 4-2.4 for information on setting font attributes).

1. Select the Entry Field button on the GBNT:Draw toolbar. This item may be placed in the Keyboard section only.

Entry Field

The GBNT:Entry Field window displays (see Figure 4-33).

Figure 4-33. GBNT:Entry Field Window

2. From the Entry Fld # drop-down menu, select either integer or $CONST. Enter the entry ﬁeld number in the space provided. Use the increment/decrement buttons to adjust the value, if needed. Valid range = 1 through 254.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-138 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-31. Entry Field

If $CONST is selected from the drop-down menu, enter the associated index for the “$CONSTn” nomenclature in the entry ﬁeld to the right of the menu. For example, for $CONST2, enter a “2” in the entry ﬁeld after selecting $CONST from the drop-down menu.

The drop-down menu is used to specify whether the entry field number is to be specified as an integer (that is, hard-coded) or specified as a $CONSTn argument. The $CONST format is to be used if the entry is on a macro file and the entry field number is to be a parameter passed into the macro.

3. From the Type choice buttons, select the entry ﬁeld type. The choices are:

Operator — allows the operator to enter data into this entry ﬁeld, but not a graphics application program.

Program — allows a graphics application program to enter data into this entry ﬁeld, but not an operator.

Both — allows an operator and a graphics application program to write to the entry ﬁeld.

4. From the State choice buttons, select the entry ﬁeld state. The choices are:

On — activates the entry ﬁeld when the diagram displays on the Ovation NT Operator Station.

Off — deactivates the entry ﬁeld when the diagram displays on the Ovation NT Operator Station.

5. From the Format Type drop-down menu, select how the data entered in the entry ﬁeld will be interpreted. The choices are ASCII, integer, real, byte, hex (hexadecimal), and exponential.

6. Define the length of the entry field (number of characters) in the # of Chars entry field. Use the increment/decrement buttons to adjust the value, if needed. Valid range = 1 through 80.

7. Select one of the following buttons:

Ok — Saves the selected settings, and quits the GBNT:Entry Field window.

Apply — Saves the selected settings, but the GBNT:Entry Field window remains open.

Cancel — Quits the GBNT:Entry Field window without saving any changes.

11/01 4-139 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-31. Entry Field

8. Move the pointer onto the drawing canvas. Press and hold the left mouse button to display the entry ﬁeld string on the canvas. Move the pointer to the desired location. Do not release the mouse button while moving the string.

9. Release the mouse button to position the entry ﬁeld string.

The entry ﬁeld string displays as a series of E’s on the drawing canvas as shown below.

Note

On the process diagram, the entry field typically displays as a rectangle. The user can type as many characters into the rectangle (entry field) as is specified at the # of Chars option on the GBNT:Entry Field window.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-140 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-32. OL Slider

4-32. OL Slider

The OL Slider button deﬁnes a slider on a process diagram. The slider is both an input and an output device. It displays /sets the value stored in a scratch pad buffer scaled between a low and a high limit. The scratch pad value is read each time the diagram updates, and the display of the slider changes if the value changes.

The user can manually change the value of the scratch pad area by moving the slider control box with the mouse. As the user moves the slider control, the value of the scratch pad is continuously updated. In addition, the user may specify a trigger (readout trigger) to be called as the slider control moves. A unique trigger (control trigger) may be speciﬁed to be executed when the slider control is released.

Notes

The OL Slider may be used to do digital set point entry. This is implemented by calling the RUN_PROGRAMS command to run the XPID_DIGITAL (121) application program from within the control trigger. For information on application programs, see “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091). The user can display a digital readout for the slider via the readout trigger. The readout trigger should be coded to display a PROCESS_PT item, displaying the value of the scratch pad area associated with the slider. 1. Select the OL Slider button on the GBNT:Draw toolbar. This item may be placed in the Keyboard section only.

OL Slider

11/01 4-141 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-32. OL Slider

The GBNT:OL Slider window displays (see Figure 4-34).

Figure 4-34. GBNT:OL Slider Window

2. Enter the scratch pad area (value area) in the Value ($P/$offset) entry ﬁeld. This is the address in the system scratch pad buffer where the value of the slider will be read/stored. This must be a $P point ($P1 through $P99) and an integer, byte, or real offset ($I4, $B0, $S2, $R3, and so forth). See “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for more information on pointers and offsets.

3. Enter the low limit for the value in the Low Limit entry ﬁeld. Valid values are point names/record ﬁelds, pointers/offsets, real constants, and integers in the range -2,147,483,647 through 2,147,483,647. See “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for more information on valid values.

4. Enter the high limit for the value in the High Limit entry ﬁeld. Valid values are point names/record ﬁelds, pointers/offsets, real constants, and integers in the range -2,147,483,647 through 2,147,483,647. See “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for more information on valid values.

5. From the Direction choice buttons, select the OL Slider direction. The choices are (from left to right): up, down, left, or right.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-142 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-32. OL Slider

6. Enter the trigger number to be executed (as the user moves the slider control) in the Readout Trigger entry ﬁeld. Use the increment/decrement buttons to adjust the value, if needed. This trigger is executed continuously as the slider control moves. Typically, this will be used to display a digital readout with the slider. Valid trigger numbers are 0 through 255, where 0 implies that no trigger will be executed.

7. Enter the trigger number to be executed when the user releases the mouse button after moving the slider control in the Control Trigger entry ﬁeld. Use the increment/decrement buttons to adjust the value, if needed. This trigger is executed only one time. Valid trigger numbers are 0 through 255, where 0 implies that no trigger will be executed.

8. Select one of the following buttons:

Ok — Saves the selected settings, and quits the GBNT:OL Slider window.

Apply — Saves the selected settings, but the GBNT:OL Slider window remains open.

Cancel — Quits the GBNT:OL Slider window without saving any changes.

9. Move the pointer to the drawing canvas. Press and hold the left mouse button, and drag a rectangle representing the maximum dimensions of the OL Slider. Do not release the mouse button while drawing the OL Slider.

10. Release the mouse button, and the slider displays.

11/01 4-143 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-32. OL Slider

The ﬁgure below shows an example of the OL Slider when displayed in GBNT. Notice that the OL Slider is displayed with the maximum value. When the OL Slider is displayed in the process diagram at the Ovation NT Operator Station, the value of the OL Slider will be read and displayed from the speciﬁed scratch pad area.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-144 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-33. OL Check Box

4-33. OL Check Box

The OL Check Box button deﬁnes a check box item on a process diagram. The check box item is both an input and an output device. It displays/sets the value stored in a scratch pad buffer according to the boxes which are currently checked. For an exclusive check box item, the value is the ordinal number of the box selected, starting at 0. For a non-exclusive check box item, the value is a bit mask, where each set bit corresponds to a checked box. The scratch pad value is read each time the diagram updates, and the display of the check box changes if the value changes.

The user can manually change the value of the scratch pad area by selecting/ deselecting boxes with the mouse. The boxes are checked/unchecked when the user selects them with the mouse. When the user checks/unchecks a box, the value of the scratch pad area updates, and the control trigger is executed. It is the user’s responsibility to code the trigger to interpret the check box value and take whatever action is desired based on that value (see “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for information on triggers.

1. Select the OL Check Box button on the GBNT:Draw toolbar. This item may be placed in the Keyboard section only.

OL Check Box

11/01 4-145 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-33. OL Check Box

The GBNT:OL Check Box window displays (see Figure 4-35).

Figure 4-35. GBNT:OL Check Box Window

2. Enter the scratch pad area (value area) in the Value ($P/$offset) entry ﬁeld. This is the address in the system scratch pad buffer where the value of the check box item will be read/stored. This must be a $P point ($P1 through $P99) and an integer offset ($I0, $I2, $I100, and so forth). See “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for more information on pointers and offsets.

3. Enter the number of boxes to be included in the check box item in the Boxes entry ﬁeld. Use the increment/decrement buttons to adjust the value, if needed. Valid range is 1 through 32.

4. From the Orientation choice buttons, select one of the following choices:

Horz — boxes are placed horizontally.

Vert — boxes are placed vertically.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-146 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-33. OL Check Box

5. From the Type choice buttons, select whether the check box item should be exclusive or non-exclusive:

Exclusive — only 1 box may be checked at a time. Selecting a new box with the mouse unchecks the currently checked box ﬁrst, and then checks the current box.

Non-Exclusive — multiple boxes may be selected at a time. Selecting a new box with the mouse toggles the state of that box (that is, if the box is checked, it becomes unchecked and vice versa).

6. Enter the trigger to be executed when the user check/unchecks a box in the Control Trigger entry ﬁeld. Use the increment/decrement buttons to adjust the value, if needed. Valid range is 0 through 255. A trigger number of 0 implies that no trigger will be executed.

7. Enter the virtual pixels between consecutive boxes in the Spacing entry ﬁeld. Use the increment/decrement buttons to adjust the value, if needed. Valid range is 0 through 16,383. See the ﬁgure below for an example of the spacing for a check box item.

spacing

11/01 4-147 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-33. OL Check Box

8. Enter the virtual dimensions of each check box area (including the implicit part reserved for the upper part of the checkmark) in the Box (w) and (h) entry ﬁelds. Use the increment/decrement buttons to adjust the value, if needed. Valid range is 0 through 16,383 for both dimensions. See the ﬁgure belowfor an example of a check box item width and height.

x, y

9. Select one of the following buttons:

Ok — Saves the selected settings, and quits the GBNT:OL Check Box window.

Apply — Saves the selected settings, but the GBNT:OL Check Box window remains open.

Cancel — Quits the GBNT:OL Check Box window without saving any changes.

10. Move the pointer to the drawing canvas. Press and hold the left mouse button, and move the pointer to the desired location on the drawing canvas. As soon as the move operation begins, a rectangle representing the outlining rectangle of the check box item will appear on the diagram. As the user moves the mouse, the rectangle drags along with it. Do not release the mouse button while dragging the rectangle.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-148 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-33. OL Check Box

11. Release the mouse button, and the OL check box item displays.

(x, y)

Notes

GBNT always displays a check in the ﬁrst box of the check box item, whether it is exclusive or non-exclusive.

The erase color is used to display the OL check box at runtime. Set erase color equal to the diagram background color for proper display. GBNT does not use the erase color to display check boxes. See Section 4-2.3 for more information on erase color.

11/01 4-149 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-34. OL Choice

4-34. OL Choice

The OL Choice button deﬁnes a choice item on a process diagram. The choice item is both an input and an output device. It displays/sets the value stored in a scratch pad buffer according to which choice boxes are currently selected (pressed). For an exclusive choice item, the value is the ordinal number of the item selected, starting at 0. For a non-exclusive choice item, the value is a bit mask, where each set bit corresponds to a selected item. The scratch pad value is read each time the diagram updates, and the display of the choice item changes if the value changes.

The user can manually change the value of the scratch pad area by selecting/ deselecting the items with the mouse. The items are pressed/raised (selected/ deselected) when the user selects them with the mouse. When the user selects/ deselects an item, the value of the scratch pad area updates, and the control trigger is executed. It is the user’s responsibility to code the trigger to interpret the choice item value and take the appropriate action based on that value (see “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for information on triggers). Text or shape labels may be displayed on the choice item.

1. Select the OL Choice button on the GBNT:Draw toolbar. This item may be placed in the Keyboard section only.

OL Choice

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-150 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-34. OL Choice

The GBNT:OL Choice window displays (see Figure 4-36).

Figure 4-36. GBNT:OL Choice Window

2. Enter the scratch pad area (value area) in the Value ($P/$offset) entry ﬁeld. This is the address in the system scratch pad buffer where the value of the choice item will be read/stored. This must be a $P point ($P1 through $P99) and an integer offset ($I0, $I2, $I100, and so forth). See “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for more information on pointers and offsets.

3. Enter the number of choices to be included in the choice item in the Choices entry ﬁeld. Use the increment/decrement buttons to adjust the value, if needed. Valid range is 1 through 64.

4. From the Orientation choice buttons, select one of the following:

Horz — boxes are horizontally spaced across the diagram.

Vert — boxes are vertically spaced down the diagram.

11/01 4-151 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-34. OL Choice

5. From the Type choice buttons, select one of the following:

Exclusive — only one item may be selected at a time. Selecting a newitem with the mouse deselects (raises) the currently selected (pressed) item ﬁrst, and then selects the current item.

Non-Exclusive — multiple items may be selected at a time. Selecting a new item with the mouse toggles the state of that item (that is, if the item is deselected (raised), it becomes selected (pressed) and vice versa).

6. Enter the trigger to be executed when the user selects/deselects an item in the Control Trigger entry ﬁeld. Use the increment/decrement buttons to adjust the value, if needed. Valid range is 0 through 255. A trigger number of 0 implies that no trigger will be executed.

7. From the Label Type choice buttons, select one of the following options:

Shape — each choice item will have a shape from the Shape Library as a label. See Section 6 for information on the Shape Library. Step 8 discusses the next procedure to be performed if this option is selected.

Text — each choice item will have a text string as a label. Choice boxes are sized by the text label. Step 9 discusses the next procedure to be performed if this option is selected.

Depending on the selection made for Label Type, the GBNT:OL Choice window appears different. The Labels scrolling list changes to reﬂect the syntax for the type of label selected. Also, additional entry items may be required.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-152 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-34. OL Choice

8. If shape is selected for Label Type — The GBNT:OL Choice window appears as shown below.

• Enter the appropriate information in the Labels scrolling list. The required format is listed as: .

Shape labels consist of a shape name, rotation, and inversion. Valid rotations are 0, 90, 180, 270, -90, -180, and -270. Valid inversions are NONE (no inversion), TTB (top to bottom), RTL (right to left), and BOTH (top to bottom and right to left). Shape names must exist in the Shape Library (see Section 6 for information on the Shape Library; also see “Ovation NT Graphics Language Manual” (NT-0091) for information on the Shape command).

• Enter the dimensions of the choice boxes in the Choice box (w) and (h) entry ﬁelds. All choice boxes will be the same size for shape labels. Valid range is 1 through 16,383 for both dimensions.

• Enter the shape label dimensions in the Shape (w) and (h) entry ﬁelds. Valid range is 1 through 16,383 for both dimensions. The shape label dimensions must be less than the choice box dimensions. All the shape labels will be scaled to the same size.

11/01 4-153 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-34. OL Choice

9. If text is selected for Label Type — The GBNT:OL Choice window appears as shown in Figure 4-36.

• Enter the appropriate information in the Labels scrolling list. The required format is listed as . Text labels can be a maximum of 30 characters and must be enclosed in either single or double quotes.

10. Select one of the following buttons:

Ok — Saves the selected settings, and quits the GBNT:OL Choice window.

Apply — Saves the selected settings, but the GBNT:OL Choice window remains open.

Cancel — Quits the GBNT:OL Choice window without saving any changes.

11. Move the pointer to the drawing canvas. Press and hold the left mouse button, and move the pointer to the desired location. As soon as the move operation begins, a rectangle representing the outlining rectangle of the choice item will appear on the diagram. As the user moves the mouse, the rectangle drags along with it. Do not release the mouse button while dragging the rectangle.

Note

The font size for OL Choice is deﬁned by the current font attributes on the GBNT:Font Attributes window (see Section 4-2.4 for a description of setting/ changing font size). The overstrike option is not applicable to this item. 12. Release the mouse button, and the OL Choice item displays.

choice1 choice2 choice3

Note

GBNT always displays the ﬁrst box of the choice item selected, whether it is exclusive or non- exclusive.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-154 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-35. OL Button

4-35. OL Button

The OL Button button deﬁnes a button on a process diagram that is activated when selected with the mouse. This button appears depressed when the user selects it with the mouse at runtime, and appears raised when the user releases the mouse. This button may have a trigger or a poke functionality (see Section 4-30 for information on poke ﬁelds; see “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for information on triggers).

1. Select the OL Button button on the GBNT:Draw toolbar. This item may be placed in the Keyboard section only.

OL Button

11/01 4-155 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-35. OL Button

The GBNT:OL Button window displays (see Figure 4-37).

Figure 4-37. GBNT:OL Button Window

2. From the Orientation choice buttons, select one of the following:

Horz — button endcaps are on the left and right sides. Text labels will be displayed with horizontal text.

Vert — button endcaps are on the top and bottom. Text labels will be displayed with vertical text.

3. Select the button endcap style from the Endcap Style choice buttons:

Rounded — endcaps are rounded.

Squared — endcaps are squared (like brackets). Note that this is only obvious when the button dimensions (w and h) are larger than the default button size. For the default button size, the squared and rounded endcap styles are identical (they appear rounded).

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-156 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-35. OL Button

4. From the Label Type choice buttons, select one of the following options:

Shape — the button will have a shape from the Shape Library as a label. See Section 6 for information on the Shape Library. Step 5 discusses the next procedure to be performed if this option is selected.

Text — the button will have a text string as a label. The button is sized to the text label. Step 6 discusses the next procedure to be performed if this option is selected.

Depending on the selection made for Label Type, the GBNT:OL Button window appears different. Additional entry items may be required.

5. If Label Type is set to Shape — The GBNT:OL Button window appears as shown below:

• Enter the shape name in the Label entry ﬁeld. See Section 6 for more information on the Shape Library.

• From the rotation drop-down menu, select a rotation: 0, 90, -90, 180, -180, 270, -270.

11/01 4-157 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-35. OL Button

• From the inversion drop-down menu, select an inversion: NONE (no inversion), TTB (top to bottom), RTL (right to left), BOTH (top to bottom and right to left).

• Enter the button dimensions in the Button (w) and (h) entry ﬁelds. Use the increment/decrement buttons to adjust the value, if needed. Valid range is 1 through 16,383 for both dimensions.

• Enter the shape dimensions in the Shape (w) and (h) entry ﬁelds. Use the increment/decrement buttons, if needed. The shape dimensions must be less than the button dimensions. Valid range is 1 through 16,383 for both dimensions.

6. If Label type is set to Text — Enter the appropriate information in the Label entry ﬁeld. The required format is listed as . Text labels can be a maximum of 30 characters and must be enclosed in either single or double quotes.

7. From the Functionality choice buttons, select a function for the button:

Trigger — a trigger will be executed when this button is selected (pressed). Step 8 discusses the next procedure to be performed if this option is selected.

Poke — a poke function (any of the standard types deﬁned for the poke ﬁeld, except poke type 0; see Section 4-30) will occur when this button is selected (pressed). Step 9 discusses the next procedure to be performed if this option is selected.

8. If Functionality is set to Trigger — Enter the trigger number (1 through 255) in the Trigger entry ﬁeld.

9. If Functionality is set to Poke — From the Poke Type drop-down menu, select the desired type of poke. As different types are selected, The GBNT:OL Button window changes to include the necessary parameters for the poke type selected. Enter the required information for the chosen poke type. See Section 4-30 for information on poke type parameters.

10. Select one of the following buttons:

Ok — Saves the selected settings, and quits the GBNT:OL Button window.

Apply — Saves the selected settings, but the GBNT:OL Button window remains open.

Cancel — Quits the GBNT:OL Button window without saving any changes.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-158 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-35. OL Button

11. Move the pointer to the drawing canvas. Press and hold the left mouse button, and drag the button’s outlining rectangle to the desired position on the canvas. Release the mouse button. The button is drawn on the canvas.

Note

The font size for OL Button is deﬁned by the current font attributes on the GBNT:Font Attributes window (see Section 4-2.4 for a description of setting/ changing font size). The overstrike option is not applicable to this item.

11/01 4-159 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-36. OL Event Menu

4-36. OL Event Menu

The OL Event Menu button defines a list of event or alarm conditions and the text messages to display if the conditions are met at runtime. A maximum of 32 alarm/ event conditions may be defined. The alarm/event conditions are defined by a point name, a record field, and a status word. There are three possible display states for this item on the Ovation NT Operator Station at runtime (see figure below). • If no alarm or error conditions are met, nothing displays. • If one alarm or event condition is met, the text message for that alarm or event displays. • If more than one alarm or event condition is met, an abbreviated menu symbol is displayed on the diagram, along with the first alarm or event message string.

x, y a. If no events, nothing displays.

x, y b. If 1 event, only the message displays. Longest Event Message

x, y c. If more than 1 event, the ﬁrst event message displays and the abbreviated Longest Event Message menu symbol displays.

If the user clicks on the abbreviated menu symbol on the Ovation NT Operator Station at runtime, a drop-down menu will list all of the applicable alarm or event messages. This menu will be for display purposes only (that is, the user cannot acknowledge alarms from this menu). If the user clicks on the abbreviated menu symbol while the menu is displayed, the menu will disappear.

Note

GBNT will always display the abbreviated menu symbol and the longest alarm or event message. GBNT will NOT support popping up the event menu when the user clicks on the abbreviated menu symbol.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-160 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-36. OL Event Menu

1. Select the OL Event Menu button on the GBNT:Draw toolbar. This item may be placed in the Keyboard section only.

OL Event Menu

The GBNT:OL Event Menu window displays (see Figure 4-38).

Figure 4-38. GBNT:OL Event Menu Window

2. Enter the number of alarm/event conditions in the Events entry ﬁeld. Use the increment/decrement buttons to adjust the value, if needed. Valid range is 1 through 32.

3. Enter the alarm/event conditions and the associated text message strings in the scrolling list. The format of the scrolling list entry ﬁeld is deﬁned in the scrolling list title. The format is:

See “Ovation Record Types Reference Manual” (R3-1140) for information on process points and record ﬁelds.

11/01 4-161 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-36. OL Event Menu

See “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for a list of valid status words. The event/alarm message strings may be a maximum of 50 characters and must be enclosed by single or double quotes.

Note

The point record field is not optional, and there are no defaults defined. The user must enter a record field for each point. Also, the record field must be an integer or byte record field (that is, real or ASCII record fields are not accepted). See “Ovation Record Types Reference Manual” (R3-1140) for more information on record fields. 4. Select one of the following buttons:

Ok — Saves the selected settings, and quits the GBNT:OL Event Menu window.

Apply — Saves the selected settings, but the GBNT:OL Event Menu window remains open.

Cancel — Quits the GBNT:OL Event Menu window without saving any changes.

5. Move the pointer to the drawing canvas. Press and hold the left mouse button, and move the cursor to the desired location. As soon as the move operation begins, a rectangle representing the outlining rectangle of the event menu item will appear on the diagram. As the user moves the mouse, the rectangle drags along with it. Do not release the mouse button while dragging the rectangle.

Note

The font size for the event menu item is deﬁned by the current font attributes on the GBNT:Font Attributes window (see Section 4-2.4 for a description of setting/changing font size). The overstrike option is not applicable to this item.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-162 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-36. OL Event Menu

6. Release the mouse button and the OL Event Menu item displays.

11/01 4-163 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-37. Function Key

4-37. Function Key

The FUNC_KEY command is used to run one or more application programs from a function key (F1 - F10) on the standard Ovation Operator Station keyboard and/ or from a programmable function key (P1 - P10) on the membrane keyboard (see “Ovation NT Operator Station User Guide” (NT-0020) on using the membrane keyboard).

There are 10 pkeys (P1 - P10) on the membrane keyboard of which you can program any/all of using this command. There are 12 available function keys (F1 - F12) on the standard keyboard, of which only the ﬁrst 10 (F1 - F10) can be programmed using this command. Programming function keys F11 and F12 is not supported in the Ovation system.

Pressing P1 on the membrane keyboard will run the programs associated with key #1 in this command, as will pressing F1 on the standard keyboard. Pressing P2/F2 will run the programs associated with key #2, and so forth. The pkeys and the function keys are exactly the same functionality. The only difference between the function keys and the pkeys is the keyboard where they exist.

There can be only one FUNC_KEY deﬁnition for each of the possible 10 function/ pkey in any one graphic. Thus, a graphic can have a maximum of 10 FUNC_KEY commands in it. An error will display if you try to add duplicate function/pkeys. Note that this rule also applies with respect to inclusion in macros. A macro will not load if it contains a FUNC_KEY command for a function key that is already deﬁned in the current graphic.

The Function Key button (on the GBNT:Draw toolbar) adds a FUNC_KEY command to the Keyboard section of a graphic. There is no display item associated with the FUNC_KEY command. It is similar in function to a poke type #7 (see Section 4-30 for information on the Poke button). The association of the application program(s) to the given function key is local to the graphic in which the function key command exists.

When a function key on the membrane keyboard is pressed, the application programs deﬁned by the FUNC_KEY command in the graphic currently active for keyboard input are executed. The graphic currently active for keyboard input on the Ovation NT Operator Station has the “LAI” (last active instance) designation in the status bar. If no graphic is currently active for keyboard input, or if the graphic does not contain an applicable FUNC_KEY command, then no application programs run when the function key is pressed.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-164 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-37. Function Key

1. Select the Function Key button on the GBNT:Draw toolbar. This item may be placed in the Keyboard section only.

Function Key

The GBNT:Function Key window displays (see Figure 4-39).

Figure 4-39. GBNT:Function Key Window

2. From the Function Key drop-down menu, select a function key. Valid choices are 1 through 10. The dialog allows application programs to be deﬁned for one function key at a time.

3. From the State choice buttons, select one of the following:

On activates the function key when the diagram displays on the Ovation NT Operator Station.

11/01 4-165 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-37. Function Key

Off deactivates the function key when the diagram displays on the Ovation NT Operator Station.

4. Enter the total number of application programs to run in the # Lists entry ﬁeld, or use the increment/decrement buttons. Valid range is 1 through 65,535.

6. Go to the Prog # entry field, and enter the application program number to be called by the poke field. The program number may be specified as an integer or as a $Pn $Im pointer/offset pair.

7. Enter the diagram number in the Diag # entry ﬁeld. The diagram number may be speciﬁed as an integer (valid range is 0 through 65,535) or as a $Pn $Im pointer/offset pair.

8. Enter the number of arguments for the current application program in the # Args entry ﬁeld. Use the increment/decrement buttons to adjust the value, if needed.

9. Enter the arguments in the Args scrolling list. Note that string arguments are limited to 130 characters.

10. After all of the arguments have entered, select the Create button. (See the section below for information on modifying entries.)

The scrolling list clears, and the Current List entry ﬁeld increments for the next program list.

11. Continue entering information (Prog #, Diag #, #Args, and Args scrolling list) for all of the application programs speciﬁed in the # Lists entry ﬁeld. After completing the information for each program, select the Create button.

12. Select one of the following buttons:

Ok — Saves the selected settings, and quits the GBNT:Function Key window.

Apply — Saves the selected settings, but the GBNT:Function Key window remains open.

Cancel — Quits the GBNT:Function Key window without saving any changes.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 4-166 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 4-37. Function Key

Note

There is no display item associated with the Function Key. The user does not drag/position anything, and the user will not see anything on the graphic to represent the Function Key.

Modifying scrolling list entries (Function Key)

After the arguments have been entered in the scrolling list, it may be necessary to modify the entries (add, delete, change). To do this, follow the steps below:

1. Enter the number of the program to be modiﬁed in the Current List entry ﬁeld.

2. If adding or deleting entries, modify the number of arguments by entering a new value in the # Args entry ﬁeld, or use the increment/decrement buttons.

3. Modify the Args scrolling list, as needed.

4. After all modiﬁcations have been made to the scrolling list, select the Change button. The modiﬁcations will not be saved until the Change button is selected.

Note

The Change button is only used when changing a program that has already been entered. 5. Select the Clear button to clear the window and start a new program entry.

Note

The Delete button deletes all of the information on the GBNT:Function Key window except for the value speciﬁed in the # Lists entry ﬁeld. It is not used to delete individual entries in the scrolling list of arguments.

11/01 4-167 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C Section 5. Editing Graphics

5-1. Section Overview

This section discusses the procedures for editing graphics. The following topics are discussed: • Working with selected items and groups (Section 5-2). — Selecting and Deselecting items (Section 5-2.1). — Selecting Overlaid items (Section 5-2.2). — Grouping and Ungrouping items (Section 5-2.3). — Moving an item or group (Section 5-2.4). — Resizing an item or group (Section 5-2.5). — Resizing an item or group by a Factor (Section 5-2.6). — Rotating and Inverting items and groups (Section 5-2.7). — Deleting items and groups (Section 5-2.8). — Copying and Pasting items and groups (Section 5-2.9). • Editing attributes (Section 5-3). • Editing vertices (Section 5-4). • Using the snap to grid option (Section 5-5). • Undoing and redoing the last edit (Section 5-6). • Aligning/equi-spacing items and groups (Section 5-7). • Object-to-object snap (Section 5-8).

11/01 5-1 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 5-2. Working with Selected Items and Groups

5-2. Working with Selected Items and Groups

After an item is drawn on the main GBNT drawing canvas, it is often necessary to make changes. Before users can edit items, they must have an understanding of the method of selecting which item(s) in which to make the changes. Also, it is sometimes necessary to treat a set of items as a single entity. The grouping mechanism allows the user to do this. Once a group is deﬁned, it is selected/ deselected in the same manner as a single item.

Note

Some procedures call for pressing down on the Control key on the keyboard at the same time you left-click the mouse. Throughout this section, this will be referred to as Ctrl + left-click.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 5-2 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 5-2. Working with Selected Items and Groups

5-2.1. Selecting and Deselecting Items

To select and deselect items/groups, follow the steps below: • To select an item for editing, left click on one of the lines comprising the object. Likewise, to select a group for editing, left click on one of the lines comprising one of the objects making up the group. When you select an item/group with the left click, any currently selected item/groups are deselected.

Once selected, handles (ﬁlled squares) display around the item/group (see Figure 5-1).

Figure 5-1. “Selected” Draw Item

11/01 5-3 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 5-2. Working with Selected Items and Groups

• To select an additional item/group (while the ﬁrst item/group remains selected), Ctrl + left-click on the additional item/group (see below).

• To deselect a single item/group, Ctrl + left-click on the selected item/group. Only that item/group is deselected. • To deselect all selected items/groups, left-click on the white space (white space is deﬁned as any area on the diagram where there are no display items). All the items/groups become deselected, and the handles around them erase. • To toggle an item’s selection status, Ctrl + left-click on the item. — If the item is currently selected, the item is deselected. — If the item is not currently selected, the item is selected.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 5-4 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 5-2. Working with Selected Items and Groups

• To select all items on the screen, pull down the Edit menu, and select Select All. • To select all items within a speciﬁed area by dragging a rectangle, follow the procedures below:

— Place the pointer in the white space above and to the left of the items to be selected. — Press and hold the left mouse button, and drag a rectangle around the items (do not release the mouse button while drawing the rectangle).

11/01 5-5 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 5-2. Working with Selected Items and Groups

Release the mouse button and all the items completely within the rectangle are selected (see Figure 5-2).

Figure 5-2. Items “Selected” After the Button is Released

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 5-6 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 5-2. Working with Selected Items and Groups

5-2.2. Selecting Overlaid Items

To select an item underneath another item on the graphic, first click in the item with the left mouse button. GBNT will select the first item it finds that is within the tolerance (approximately 5 pixels) for selection. If the item selected (marked by the selection handles) is not the item you want to select, press the Enter key on the keyboard to go to the next item under the mouse pointer. If that is still not the desired item, press the Enter key again, and so on. The Enter key will move you through a circular list of all possible items within the tolerance under the mouse pointer.

Note that the Enter key only selects the next item in the list of all possible items under the mouse pointer — it does not also move that item to the front. For example, if you have two overlaid ﬁlled rectangles or poke ﬁelds that are exactly the same size and the handles for both items are in the exact same places, it will appear that nothing is happening when you press the Enter key. To check if the selection is changing, bring up the integrated source editor window and see if the cursor in the source editor window moves to a different line when you press the Enter key.

If nothing is happening after you press the Enter key, make sure that you are not pressing any other key or mouse button in combination with the Enter key. Also, make sure that you did the initial select of the item with the left mouse button prior to pressing the Enter key.

5-2.3. Grouping and Ungrouping Items

To group items, follow the steps below:

1. To group two or more items, select the items according to the procedures in Section 5-2.1. “Grouping” several items permits the items to be edited (moved, copied, resized, and so forth) together. Groups can be grouped to make bigger groups.

2. Pull down the Edit menu on the main GBNT window, and select Group.

11/01 5-7 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 5-2. Working with Selected Items and Groups

The handles around the individual items erase, and one set of handles display for the group (see Figure 5-3).

Figure 5-3. “Grouped” Items

Note

The grouping status is only maintained during the current edit session. If items are grouped and the user saves the graphic, the next time the ﬁle is loaded the items will NOT be grouped. To ungroup items, follow the steps below:

1. Select the group (to select a group, select any item making up the group as deﬁned in Section 5-2.1).

2. Pull down the Edit menu on the main GBNT window, and select Ungroup.

The handles for the group erase, and the handles for each individual item display. Note that this menu item does not dissociate macros.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 5-8 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 5-2. Working with Selected Items and Groups

Note

The Unshape menu is similar to ungroup. Unshape separates a shape displayed on the graphic into the individual items making up the shape.

5-2.4. Moving an Item or Group

To move items or groups, follow the steps below:

1. Select an item or group to be moved according to the procedures in Section 5-2.1.

2. Press and hold the left mouse button on the item/group to move, and drag the item to the new location. Do not release the mouse button while dragging.

Notice that the mouse pointer changes as soon as you initiate the move. Depending on the current setting for the drag/draw constraint (Section 3), the cursor changes to an arrowhead cursor which indicates the direction you can move the item/group.

3. Release the mouse button.

Using Jog Mode

Jog mode allows the user to move a selected item/group by one pixel at a time in any direction. This function is used when precise positioning of an item is desired. Jog mode can be used in conjunction with the move or resize operations. It can also be used in vertex edit mode to move a vertex of a line, polygon, rectangle, bar, trend, xy plot, poke ﬁeld, or plot (see Section 5-4 for information on editing vertices). While in jog mode, the arrowkeys on the right keypad on the keyboard are used to manipulate the display item.

To use jog mode to move all currently selected items on the screen by one screen pixel, simply press the arrow keys on the keyboard.

To use jog mode to move a handle (for resize) by one screen pixel or to move a vertex (in vertex edit mode) by one screen pixel, select an item/group and start the move vertex or resize process. The arrowkeys are not functional for these purposes until one of these processes have been initiated.

While dragging the handle/vertex with the mouse, press down on one of the arrow keys on the keyboard (up, down, left, or right). Note that jog mode for these purposes requires using two hands (one hand is pressing down on the left mouse button during the drag, and the other hand is using the arrow keys to jog). Release the mouse button to terminate the resize or move vertex process.

11/01 5-9 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 5-2. Working with Selected Items and Groups

Note that the arrowkeys do not override the drag/drawconstraint ( Section 3). If the drag/drawconstraint is set to vert (which means you can only move up and down), and you press the left or right arrow key when an item is selected, nothing will move (including the mouse pointer). Similarly, if the drag/draw constraint is set to horz (which means you can only move left and right), and you press the up or down arrow key, nothing moves.

Note

Jog mode moves the pointer by one screen pixel — not by one virtual pixel. Depending on the current zoom level, one screen pixel may not correspond to one virtual pixel. This is important if the user wants to abut lines (make them touch). The user must zoom in to the lowest level (where one screen pixel corresponds to one virtual pixel) and then use jog mode to abut the lines. This guarantees that the lines will touch at all zoom levels.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 5-10 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 5-2. Working with Selected Items and Groups

5-2.5. Resizing an Item or Group

Use the procedures below to resize an item or group.

1. Select an item or group to be resized according to the procedure in Section 5-2.1.

2. Place the pointer on one of the eight handles of the item or group.

11/01 5-11 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 5-2. Working with Selected Items and Groups

3. Press and hold the left mouse button, and drag the handle to the desired size (see the ﬁgure below. Do not release the mouse button while resizing.

4. Release the mouse button when the item or group is at the desired size.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 5-12 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 5-2. Working with Selected Items and Groups

5-2.6. Resizing an Item or Group by a Factor

To resize an item or group by a factor, follow the steps below:

1. Select an item or group to be resized according to the procedures in Section 5-2.1. Only one item/group can be resized at a time. The Resize-by-factor menu item is not active if more than one item/group is currently selected.

If you want to change/view the resize-by-factor scale factors, perform Steps #2 through #4 below. If you want to use the existing settings, go directly to Step #5 below.

2. Pull down the Options menu, and select Resize scale factors. The GBNT: Scale Factors window appears (see Figure 5-4).

Figure 5-4. GBNT:Scale Factors (for resize-by-factor) Window

3. Set the desired width and height resize scale factors by entering the appropriate value in the width and height entry ﬁelds.

4. Select one of the following buttons, and skip Step #5 below:

Ok — Saves the selected settings, and quits the GBNT:Scale Factors window. It also scales the currently selected item/group if only one item/group is selected.

Apply — Saves the selected settings, but the GBNT:Scale Factors window remains open. It also scales the currently selected item/group if only one item/ group is selected.

Cancel — Quits the GBNT:Scale Factors window without saving any changes.

11/01 5-13 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 5-2. Working with Selected Items and Groups

5. Pull down the Edit menu on the main GBNT window, and select Resize-by- factor. The selected item or group resizes by the speciﬁed factors. The position of the upper left corner of the item’s outlining rectangle remains the same after the resize.

Notes

The Resize-by-factor function overrides the aspect ratio setting. That is, even though the Resize Aspect Ratio option may be set to “maintain”, the Resize- by-factor function will resize the selected item by the speciﬁed width/height factors regardless of whether aspect ratio changes or not. The resize-by-factor pin point is NOT conﬁgurable. It will always be the upper left corner of the item’s outlining rectangle. The item/group resize handles are NOT used for resize-by-factor.

5-2.7. Rotating and Inverting Items and Groups

Use the procedures below to rotate and invert items and groups.

1. Select the item or group to be rotated or inverted according to the procedures in Section 5-2.1. Note that all the currently selected items/groups will rotate/ invert. Multiple items/groups may be rotated/inverted in a single step.

2. Access the GBNT:Invert/rotate toolbar. If the toolbar is not currently displayed, pull down the View menu, pull right at Toolbars, and select invert/rotate.

Figure 5-5. GBNT:Invert/rotate Toolbar

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 5-14 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 5-2. Working with Selected Items and Groups

The GBNT:Invert/rotate window displays four buttons. They are, from left to right, shown in Figure 5-5. • Invert left to right. • Invert top to bottom. • Rotate clockwise by 90 degrees. • Rotate counterclockwise by 90 degrees. 3. Select the desired button. The selected item(s) or group inverts or rotates accordingly.

5-2.8. Deleting Items and Groups

Use the following procedures to delete items or groups.

1. Select the item or group to be erased according to the procedures in Section 5-2.1. Note that all the currently selected items/groups will be deleted. Multiple items/ groups may be deleted in a single step.

2. Pull down the Edit menu, and select Delete.

The selected item or group is deleted.

5-2.9. Copying and Pasting Items and Groups

GBNT supports two different types of copy and paste functions. The user can copy and paste items from one graphic to another using the Copy and Paste items on the Edit menu. The user can also make multiple copies of a drawitem withina graphic using the Duplicates item on the Edit menu. Each function is discussed below.

11/01 5-15 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 5-2. Working with Selected Items and Groups

Copy and Paste from One Graphic to Another

GBNT supports an interactive copy and paste function which can be used to copy selected items/groups from one graphic to another. These functions are implemented via the Copy and Paste menu items found on the Edit menu on the main GBNT window. The items/groups are stored in an internal buffer.

Only the selected items/groups and their attributes (color, conditionals, line width, and so forth) are copied to the internal buffer. The overall diagram background color is not copied. These functions cannot be used to copy and paste to/from the source editor window or the interactive conditional pop-up windows.

If the aspect ratio of the items/groups copied to the internal buffer is to be maintained during the paste, it is necessary that the width/height of the diagram the items were copied from is the same as the width/height of the diagram the items are pasted into. If the dimensions of the diagram copied from are different than the dimensions of the diagram to paste into, aspect ratio will not be maintained. It is the user’s responsibility to be aware of this and manage this if required.

1. To copy items/groups to the internal buffer, select the items/groups to be copied according to the procedures in Section 5-2.1. Pull down the Edit menu on the main GBNT window, and select Copy (or use Ctrl+C on the keyboard). All of the items/groups selected will be copied. No processing message displays during the copy as it is almost instantaneous.

2. To paste from the internal buffer, pull down the Edit menu on the main GBNT window, and select Paste (or use Ctrl+V on the keyboard). Press and hold the left mouse button with the mouse pointer on the GBNT canvas, and do not release the mouse button. An outlining rectangle will appear at the location of the mouse pointer. This rectangle represents the dimensions of the items/groups being pasted. Drag/move the rectangle to the desired location and release the mouse button. The rectangle will be erased and the items/groups will be displayed.

After the paste operation, whatever was pasted is selected on the graphic. Also, if more than one item was pasted, the items are grouped together. You can ungroup them by selecting Ungroup from the Edit menu.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 5-16 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 5-2. Working with Selected Items and Groups

Copying an Item/Group using the Duplicates Function

Use the following procedures to make copies of a single item/group using the Edit menu Duplicates function.

1. Select the item or group to be copied according to the procedures in Section 5-2.1.

2. Pull down the Edit menu, and go down to Duplicates. Pull right to display the Duplicates menu. Note that the Duplicates function is only valid when a single item/group is selected.

The Duplicates menu displays a list of numbers between 1 and 10 (see Figure 5-6).

Figure 5-6. Duplicates Menu

3. Without releasing the mouse button, drag the pointer down the Duplicates menu to select the desired number of copies. Release the mouse button to choose the number of copies. A duplicate mode message displays in the left footer of the GBNT window after selecting the count.

The outlining rectangles of the copies are initially displayed overlaid on top of the item/group to copy, and the mouse pointer is initially positioned at the upper left corner of the item/group to copy.

11/01 5-17 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 5-2. Working with Selected Items and Groups

4. Without pressing any mouse buttons, begin moving the pointer. As the pointer moves, the spacing between the upper left corner of the outlining rectangle of the item/group to copy and the pointer is calculated. This is the spacing between successive copies. The outlining rectangles for the copies drag as the mouse pointer moves (see Figure 5-7).

Figure 5-7. Outlining Rectangles for Three Copies of the Circle

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 5-18 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 5-2. Working with Selected Items and Groups

5. Click to mark the ﬁnal position of the copies as shown below:

11/01 5-19 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 5-3. Editing Attributes

5-3. Editing Attributes

Once items are drawn in the main GBNT drawing canvas, they may require editing. The following sections discuss these procedures.

5-3.1. Display Attributes and Parameters for Editing

To display the current attribute settings (such as color, text, blink, and so forth) for a draw item, the Properties function is used.

1. Select the item for which to display the attributes or parameters (see Section 5-2.1 for information on selecting items). Only a single item (not a group) can be selected to perform a Properties function.

2. Display the applicable attribute window (color, blink, text, line width, line pattern, or ﬁll pattern) as described in Section 4.

Note

The Properties function does not display the Color, Blink, Text, Line Pattern, Line Width, or Fill Pattern windows if they are not already displayed. However, these windows are updated even if they are not currently displayed. If the selected item has its own parameter window (bar, plot, xy plot, trend, and so forth), the parameter window displays. The user does not have to display the parameter window manually. 3. Pull down the Edit menu, and select Properties.

The attributes for the selected item displays in the attribute windows (including conditionals if they exist).

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 5-20 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 5-3. Editing Attributes

5-3.2. Changing Attributes

Use the procedure below to change attributes for draw items.

1. Select the item for which to change the attributes (see Section 5-2.1 for information on selecting items).

2. Pull down the Edit menu to Attributes. Pull right on Attributes to display another menu.

3. Select the appropriate menu item from the Attributes menu.

4. Pull down the Edit menu, and select Properties. You must perform a Properties function to display the current attributes before you can edit them.

5. Followthe instructions in Section 4 to edit the desired attribute. The procedures for editing attributes are the same as the procedures for setting them.

11/01 5-21 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 5-4. Editing Vertices

5-4. Editing Vertices

GBNT provides a mechanism for editing the individual vertices of lines, polygons, rectangles and rectangular types. Rectangular types include Bar, Plot, XY Plot, Trend, Poke, Dynamic Line, Dynamic Polygon, OL Rectangle, OL Gauge, OL Slider, and OL Cylinder. The mechanism is called vertex edit mode.

A vertex is deﬁned as the point at which two adjacent line segments intersect. The edit features supported for vertices are move, align, snap, and undo. For lines and polygons, add and delete features are also supported. Movement of vertices may be constrained to horizontal or vertical if desired. A vertex may be aligned to some point on another item (target), or to another vertex of the same item.

When in vertex edit mode, the left footer of the main GBNT window will display the message . Also, the item selected for vertex edit will have special handles, which are different from the standard item handles. Not all of the vertex edit features are valid for all items (for example, one cannot add/delete vertices for the rectangular items). Vertex edit features not supported for the selected item are grayed out on the vertex edit menu.

Once vertex edit mode is initiated, the user cannot access the standard edit menu. Therefore, the user cannot resize, copy, delete, and so forth. The user must manually exit vertex edit mode to return to normal operation (see Section 5-4.13 on exiting vertex edit mode). If the user attempts to edit the graphic from any window (that is, to drawa newitem, change attributes, or edit the source), vertex edit mode willbe automatically exited.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 5-22 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 5-4. Editing Vertices

5-4.1. Entering Vertex Edit Mode

Use the following procedure to enter vertex edit mode.

1. Select the line, polygon, rectangle, or any rectangular type according to the procedures in Section 5-2.1. Only one of these items may be currently selected to enter vertex edit mode. A group cannot be selected for vertex edit. The Vertex Edit menu item is not active if a group or multiple items are selected.

2. Pull down the Edit menu on the main GBNT window, and select Vertex Edit.

Note

The Vertex Edit option is inactive (grayed out) when invalid items are selected (that is, arc, circle, ellipse, groups, text items, multiple-selected items, and so forth). When the user selects Vertex Edit, the handles around the outlining rectangle for the line, polygon, rectangle, or rectangular type are replaced with a vertex edit handle on each vertex point. The vertex edit handle is an “x”. The special handles are a visual clue to the user that he is in vertex edit mode. Also, a vertex edit mode message is displayed in the left footer of the GBNT window (see Figure 5-8).

11/01 5-23 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 5-4. Editing Vertices

x x

Figure 5-8. Vertex Edit mode

Note

The handles shown in this graphic have been enhanced for easy viewing. They are not drawn to scale.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 5-24 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 5-4. Editing Vertices

5-4.2. Selecting a New Item for Vertex Edit

During vertex edit mode, it is possible to change the item selected for vertex edit. To edit a different item, left-click on the new item. The currently selected item becomes deselected and the new item becomes selected — providing that the new item is a valid vertex edit item. If the newitem is not valid for vertex edit, nothing happens. No notice window/error message will be displayed.

If the newitem is valid for vertex edit, the “x” handles willbe erased for the original vertex edit item, and “x” handles willbe displayed on the newitem. A newitem can be selected in vertex edit mode whenever the message is displayed in the left footer of the main GBNT window.

If some other vertex edit prompt is displayed in the left footer (such as ), it is not possible to change the selected item at that time. During the vertex edit mode, there is always exactly one item selected for vertex edit; it is not possible to have no items selected. Clicking on white space will not deselect the currently selected item in vertex edit mode as it does outside of vertex edit mode.

5-4.3. Selecting a Target Item for Vertex Edit

In vertex edit mode, it is possible to align/snap to a point on some other item called the target item. The target item is selected in addition to the item selected for vertex edit. The target item is used in conjunction with the align x coords, align y coords, and snap to vertex menu items. The target item is never modiﬁed during vertex edit. Only one target item may be selected during vertex edit. ANY item/ group may be selected as the target item. A target item can be selected in vertex edit mode whenever the message is displayed in the left footer of the main GBNT window. If some other vertex edit prompt is displayed in the left footer (such as ), it is not possible to select a target item at that time.

11/01 5-25 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 5-4. Editing Vertices

Once in vertex edit mode, to select the target item, Ctrl + left-click on the item/ group. Target item handles (resemble snowflakes) will be displayed on the item/ group. The handles mark the points on the item/group to which to align a vertex on the vertex edit item (“x” handles). The target item, if one is selected, always has “snowflake” handles; the vertex edit item always has “x” handles (see figure below).

x x

x x Vertex Edit Item * * *

* * * Target Item

Note

The handles shown in this graphic have been enhanced for easy viewing. They are not drawn to scale.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 5-26 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 5-4. Editing Vertices

5-4.4. Selecting a New Target Item

During vertex edit mode, it is possible to change the target item selected for vertex edit. To specify a different target item, Ctrl + left-click on the new item. The currently selected target item becomes deselected and the newtarget item becomes selected. The ﬁlled circle handles will be erased for the original target edit item, and ﬁlled circle handles will be displayed on the new target item. A new item can be selected in vertex edit mode whenever the message is displayed in the left footer of the main GBNT window. If some other vertex edit prompt is displayed in the left footer (such as ), it is not possible to change the target item at that time. Clicking on white space will not deselect the currently selected target item in vertex edit mode.

5-4.5. Moving a Vertex

Follow the steps below to move a vertex.

1. Enter vertex edit mode according to the procedures described in the beginning of Section 5-4.1.

2. Position the pointer on the handle on the vertex to move.

3. Press and hold the left mouse button, and drag the pointer to the desired location for the vertex. Do not release the mouse button while dragging.

Note

As the user drags the vertex, all of the other vertex handles erase so that the handle on the vertex being moved does not obscure the vertex positioning. 4. Release the left mouse button when the vertex is at the desired location.

5-4.6. Adding a Vertex

Vertices can only be added to lines and polygons. New vertices are added at the midpoint of the selected line segment of the item.

Use the following procedure to add a vertex.

1. Enter vertex edit mode according to the procedures described in the beginning of Section 5-4.1.

2. Right-click anywhere on the drawing canvas to display the Vertex Edit menu.

11/01 5-27 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 5-4. Editing Vertices

3. Select add vertex from the Vertex Edit menu (see Figure 5-9).

x x

Figure 5-9. Vertex Edit Menu

Note

The handles shown in this graphic have been enhanced for easy viewing. They are not drawn to scale. The message displays in the left footer on the main GBNT window.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 5-30 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 5-4. Editing Vertices

4. Position the pointer over the handle of the vertex to delete and click. The vertex is deleted, and the line or polygon is redrawn.

x x

Note

Deleting a vertex is only valid for lines and polygons. If the user is in vertex edit mode for one of the rectangular items (rectangle, bar, plot, poke, and so forth), the Delete menu item is inactive (grayed out) on the Vertex Edit menu. Therefore, the user cannot delete a vertex. The handles shown in this graphic have been enhanced for easy viewing. They are not drawn to scale.

11/01 5-31 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 5-4. Editing Vertices

5-4.8. Align X Coordinate of a Vertex

Use the procedures belowto align the x coordinate of one vertex to that of another vertex (on the same item or on some other item). Note that you can only align x coordinates of vertices on a line or polygon.

1. Enter vertex edit mode according to the procedures described in Section 5-4.1. If you want to align to a point on some other item, select a target item (see Section 5-4.3).

2. Right-click anywhere on the drawing canvas to display the Vertex Edit menu (see Figure 5-10).

3. Select align x coords from the Vertex Edit menu.

The message is displayed in the left footer on the main GBNT window.

4. Left-click on the vertex that should move. The message is displayed in the left footer on the main GBNT window as shown below.

x x

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 5-34 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 5-4. Editing Vertices

5. Ctrl + left-click on the vertex to which to align. The vertex will have an “x” handle if on the same item, or it will have a target item handle (ﬁlled circle) if on another item. The previously selected vertex moves so that it now has the exact same y coordinate as this vertex (see ﬁgure below). The x coordinate of the vertex remains the same. The message is displayed in the left footer of the main GBNT window.

x x x

x x

Note

The handles shown in the above graphics have been enhanced for easy viewing. They are not drawn to scale.

11/01 5-35 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 5-4. Editing Vertices

5-4.10. Snapping One Vertex to Another

A vertex of the item selected for vertex edit (has an “x” handle) may be snapped to another vertex on the same item, or some vertex on some other item. You can only snap vertices on a line or polygon.

Use the following procedure to snap one vertex to another.

1. Enter vertex edit mode according to the procedures described in the beginning of Section 5-4.1. If you desire to snap the vertex to a point on some other item, select that target item using the Ctrl + left-click function (see Section 5-4.3).

2. Click the right mouse button anywhere on the drawing canvas to display the Vertex Edit menu (see Figure 5-10).

3. Select snap to vertex from the Vertex Edit menu. The message displays in the footer of the GBNT:Shape Library window.

Move the pointer to the desired location within the shape’s outlining rectangle, and left-click.

As the user moves the pointer, the origin coordinates update on the GBNT:Shape Library window. If the pointer is outside the outlining rectangle for the shape, the origin coordinates default to 0, 0.

7. Select the Create button on the GBNT:Shape Library window.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 6-6 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 6-3. Creating Shapes

The newshape displays in the Shape Library scrolling list. A red dot marks the origin of the shape. Also note that the count field updates (increments by one) when the new shape is added. The count field shows the total number of shapes defined in the shape library file (that is, displayed in the scrolling list). There is a maximum of 250 shapes allowed. See figure below.

New Shape

Note

The Conditional ﬁeld is not available when the GBNT:Shape Library dialog is in the “out for edit mode”.

11/01 6-7 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 6-3. Creating Shapes

8. Select or “uncheck” the shape library out for edit box. This signs all changes into the database and returns the window to normal mode.

9. To quit the GBNT:Shape Library window, select the Cancel button.

Note

Notice that the Create button becomes inactive and the Modify button becomes active after the shape is added to the GBNT:Shape Library window.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 6-8 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 6-4. Editing Shapes

6-4. Editing Shapes

Use the following procedure to edit shapes in the GBNT:Shape Library window.

1. Display the GBNT:Shape Library window according to the procedures in Section 6-3.

2. Select the shape library out for edit check box (see Section 6-3). A checkmark appears in the box.

3. Move the pointer over the shape to edit in the GBNT:Shape Library window, and select it.

The shape name, width and height, and origin display in the GBNT:Shape Library window.

4. Press the Drag-n-drop (for Modify) button on the GBNT:Shape Library window.

5. Move the pointer to the main GBNT window. A small box, representing the shape’s outlining rectangle, displays with the pointer. Move the pointer to place the shape on the drawing canvas (do not release the mouse button while moving the box).

6. Release the mouse button.

The shape appears on the drawing canvas, ungrouped, and ready for editing.

7. Edit the shape parts as desired (resize, add new items, delete items, and so forth). See Section 5 for more information on editing draw items.

8. After editing is complete, make sure that the new draw items comprising the shape are selected. If not, select them, as discussed in Section 5.

9. Select the Modify button on the GBNT:Shape Library window to remake the shape with the same shape name and origin as the original shape.

10. To quit the GBNT:Shape Library window, select the Cancel button.

Note

Remember to select or “uncheck” the shape library out for edit box before exiting the GBNT:Shape Library window. This signs all changes into the database and returns the window to normal mode.

11/01 6-9 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 6-4. Editing Shapes

11. If desired, delete the copy of the shape that was added to the drawing canvas. To do this, follow the steps below:

A. Select the unshaped items (see Section 5 for information on working with selected items).

B. Pull down the Edit menu on the main GBNT window.

C. Select Delete from the Edit menu.

6-4.1. Renaming a Shape

Use the following procedure to rename shapes in the GBNT:Shape Library window.

1. Display the GBNT:Shape Library window according to the procedures in Section 6-3.

2. Select the shape library out for edit check box (see Section 6-3). A checkmark appears in the box.

3. Move the pointer over the shape to rename in the GBNT:Shape Library window, and select it.

Note

The rename as entry ﬁeld is only active after a shape has been created. The Create button will be grayed out. 4. In the rename as entry ﬁeld, enter the newname for the shape. The shape name can be a maximum of 10 characters, cannot contain blanks, and must begin with a letter. The shape name cannot already exist in the Shape Library.

5. Select the Modify button on the GBNT:Shape Library window to rename the shape.

To quit the GBNT:Shape Library window, select the Cancel button.

Note

Remember to select or “uncheck” the shape library out for edit box before exiting the GBNT:Shape Library window. This signs all changes into the database and returns the window to normal mode.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 6-10 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 6-4. Editing Shapes

6-4.2. Changing the Origin of a Shape

Use the following procedure to change the origin of a shape in the GBNT:Shape Library window.

1. Display the GBNT:Shape Library window according to the procedures in Section 6-3.

2. Select the shape library out for edit check box (see Section 6-3). A checkmark appears in the box.

3. Move the pointer over the shape to edit in the GBNT:Shape Library window, and select it.

4. The user can change a shape origin either by entering new x, y coordinates in the origin entry ﬁelds, or using the select w/ mouse button. These options are described below:

— Enter the newinteger x, y coordinates for the origin in the (x) and (y) entry ﬁelds in the origin group box.

— Press the Drag-n-drop (for Modify) button. Move the mouse pointer over the GBNT canvas and press the left mouse button down (without releasing). The shape’s outlining rectangle appears on the GBNT canvas and the mouse pointer turns into a pencil. Drag the mouse pointer over the GBNT main window where you want to drop the shape. Release the mouse button to drop the shape on the GBNT drawing canvas and “unshape” it into its elements. Press the select w/ mouse button in the origin group box. Note that the shape elements are automatically grouped and the individual item handles are replaced by group handles.

Move the mouse pointer over the shape elements on the main GBNT window. As you move the mouse pointer within the group handles, the (x) and (y) ﬁelds automatically update. If you move the pointer outside the group handles, the (x) and (y) ﬁelds default back to 0,0. Left-click to mark the origin.

5. Press the Modify button. The origin on the selected shape in the scrolling list changes as you have speciﬁed.

6. To quit the GBNT:Shape Library window, select the Cancel button.

11/01 6-11 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 6-4. Editing Shapes

Note

Remember to select or “uncheck” the shape library out for edit box before exiting the GBNT:Shape Library window. This signs all changes into the database and returns the window to normal mode. 7. If desired, delete the copy of the shape that was added to the drawing canvas (if the select w/ mouse option was used). To do this, follow the steps below:

A. Select the unshaped items (see Section 5 for information on working with selected items).

B. Pull down the Edit menu on the main GBNT window.

C. Select Delete from the Edit menu.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 6-12 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 6-5. Deleting Shapes

6-5. Deleting Shapes

Use the following procedures to delete shapes from the GBNT:Shape Library window.

1. Display the GBNT:Shape Library window according to the procedures in Section 6-3.

2. Select the shape library out for edit check box (see Section 6-3). A checkmark appears in the box.

3. Move the pointer over the shape to delete in the GBNT:Shape Library window, and select it. A red box appears around the shape in the scrolling list when it is selected. The shape’s name, width, height, and origin display below the scrolling list in the designated ﬁelds.

4. Select the Delete button at the bottom of the GBNT:Shape Library window.

Notes

1. If a shape is used in a graphic that is currently loaded in the NT Graphics Builder, the shape cannot be deleted. The builder displays a notice, and cancels the delete function. 2. If the user tries to load a graphic that has a deleted shape, the graphic will not load. 5. To quit the GBNT:Shape Library window, select the Cancel button.

Note

Remember to select or “uncheck” the shape library out for edit box before exiting the GBNT:Shape Library window. This signs all changes into the database and returns the window to normal mode.

11/01 6-13 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C Section 7. Using the Integrated Source Editor

7-1. Section Overview

This section describes the integrated source editor and provides information on creating and editing source commands that are not found in the main GBNT window. The following topics are included in this section: • Introduction to the integrated source editor (Section 7-2). • Creating and editing source commands (Section 7-3). • Moving text (Section 7-4). • Copying text (Section 7-5). • Printing the source ﬁle (Section 7-6). • Using the ﬁnd/replace function (Section 7-7). Detailed information on source language commands can be found in “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091).

11/01 7-1 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 7-2. Introduction to the Integrated Source Editor

7-2. Introduction to the Integrated Source Editor

The integrated source editor allows the user to edit the graphics source file. Each process diagram is created in source language form as well as binary object form. The object (.diag) file is used for display of the process diagram. The source code (.src) file is used to create and edit the process diagram. In particular, “logic” graphics commands (such as IF/ENDIF) which do not have associated display items, are created using source code. The integrated source editor and the main GBNT windowallowthe user to modify every part of a graphic within the same edit session. Both formats are updated after each edit to reflect the current state of the graphic. The source editor modifies the graphic source format and then recreates the object. The user modifies the graphic object format and then recreates the source through the main GBNT window. The source format is required for all commands which have no associated display (PAGE, POINTER, IF/ELSE/ENDIF, LOOP, SETVAL, MATH, and so forth). The source editor may be used to alter any attributes to any of the other commands as well — it is strictly user preference as to whether changes are made interactively or via source for display items. In addition, when the user selects an item (line, ellipse, arc, and so forth) in the main GBNT window, the source editor automatically pages to the source line associated with that item. Similarly, when the user selects a source command in the source editor, handles appear around the display item (if an associated display item exists for the given source command) on the graphic. The handles appear as unfilled/ hollowsquares. Thus, the user can see both the source and object formats for a given command when editing a graphic.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 7-2 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 7-2. Introduction to the Integrated Source Editor

The source editor consists of a pull-down menu panel, a toolbar, horizontal and vertical scrollbars, and a footer for displaying messages (see Figure 7-1).

Figure 7-1. GBNT:Integrated Source Editor

The following sections list the functions and windows available on the integrated source editor window.

Note

The three dots (...) after the name on a button or menu item indicates that another window will display when that button or menu item is selected. The caret “>” indicates that another menu is to be accessed from that menu option.

11/01 7-3 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 7-2. Introduction to the Integrated Source Editor

7-2.1. Pull-Down Menu Panel

The pull-down menu panel consists of the following: • File • Edit • View • Help

File

The File pull-down menu displays the print functions.

• Print — Prints the entire file to the destination specified on the Print Setup window. • Print Page — Prints only the selected page of the file (what is currently displayed on the source editor window).

Edit

The Edit pull-down menu displays the options that are needed to insert, move, and copy text. • Undo — Undoes any changes made to the currently selected command if a command is selected for edit. If no command is currently selected, this function undoes the last edit performed in the main GBNT window. Then, the main window and source editor window are repainted. • Select cmd for edit — Selects a command so that it can be modiﬁed. Once selected, the command displays in reverse video. • Compile selected cmd — Compiles the selected command. • Define Block start/end — Used to deﬁne a block (or group) of consecutive commands for the purpose of doing a block move, copy, and/or delete. • Insert Mode — Allows the user to enter characters into the selected command at the cursor position.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 7-4 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 7-2. Introduction to the Integrated Source Editor

• Replace Mode — Allows the user to replace characters into the selected command at the cursor position. • Append Mode — Allows the user to enter characters into the selected command at the end of the current line. • Exit Insert/Append/Replace — Quits Insert, Append, or Replace mode. • Delete Char — Deletes one character at a time. • Del Line/Cmd/Block — Deletes either the line the cursor is on, the entire command the cursor is on, or the currently defined block of commands. • New line/cmd — Allows the user to add a new command (or a new line within the currently selected command) either above or below the command (or the line) the cursor is on. • Move cmd/block — Used to move a single command or a block of commands to another location in the file. A command must be selected or a block must be defined when this function is executed. • Copy cmd/block — Used to copy a single command or a block of commands to another location in the file. A command must be selected or a block must be defined when this function is executed. • Find/Replace — Allows the user to find text and/or replace text in the loaded source file.

View

The View menu items allows the user to display different areas of the ﬁle. • Goto selected line — Brings a selected command to the top of the window page.

• Goto line # — Displays the GBNT:Goto Line # window which allows the user to go to a specific line by entering the line number. • Page Down — Scrolls down through the source file one page at a time. • Page Up — Advances up through the source file one page at a time.

11/01 7-5 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 7-2. Introduction to the Integrated Source Editor

• Comment/Uncomment cmd — Used to comment and uncomment commands. If the command under the cursor is a comment, this function uncomments it. If the command under the cursor is not a comment, this function converts it to a comment. Asterisks denote a comment. The display of the graphic on the main window updates after this function executes to erase an item commented out or to display an item that has been uncommented.

Help

Displays help for the command syntax for all commands in the graphics language. For information, see “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091).

7-2.2. Toolbar

Toolbars provide quick access to the more frequently used source editor windows and functions (see Section 2 for more information on toolbars). The integrated source editor supports the following functions on its toolbar. The functions are, from left to right: • Select Command • Compile Command • Undo • Comment/Uncomment • Find/Replace • Goto

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 7-6 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 7-2. Introduction to the Integrated Source Editor

7-2.3. Keyboard Shortcuts

Keyboard shortcuts allow the integrated source editor windows and functions to be accessed by keystroke combinations instead of selecting the item with the mouse. The source editor window must have the keyboard focus to use the keyboard shortcuts (a window with keyboard focus is the window that keyboard events go to and is indicated by the top bar of the window being highlighted). Also, the associated menu item must be active at the time the user presses the keyboard shortcut.

Table 7-1 through Table 7-3 lists the keyboard shortcuts for functions as they are listed under their pull-down menu.

Table 7-1. Keyboard Shortcuts for File Menu Items Menu Item Keyboard Shortcut Print Ctrl + P

Table 7-2. Keyboard Shortcuts for Edit Menu Items Menu Item Keyboard Shortcut Undo Ctrl + Z Select cmd for edit F2 Compile selected cmd F10 Deﬁne Block start/end Ctrl + B Insert Mode Ins Replace Mode Ctrl + R Append Mode Ctrl + A Exit Insert/Append/Replace Esc Delete Char Del Delete Line/Cmd/Block Ctrl + D New line/cmd - above Alt + i New line/cmd - below Ctrl + i Move cmd/block - above Alt + M Move cmd/block - belowCtrl + M

11/01 7-7 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 7-2. Introduction to the Integrated Source Editor

Table 7-2. Keyboard Shortcuts for Edit Menu Items (Cont’d) Menu Item Keyboard Shortcut Copy cmd/block - above Alt + C Copy cmd/block Ctrl + C Find/Replace Ctrl + F

Table 7-3. Keyboard Shortcuts for View Menu Items Menu Item Keyboard Shortcut Goto line # Ctrl + G Page Down PgDn Page Up PgUp Comment/Uncomment F3

7-2.4. Terms Relating to the Integrated Source Editor

This section uses the following terms:

Selecting and Compiling Lines and Commands

When the term “selected” is used in this section, as in the example, “select the line (or command)”, it means that the user should place the cursor anywhere within the desired command and perform one of the following two steps:

• Pull down the Edit menu, and select Select cmd for edit. OR

• Press the Select Command button on the toolbar (see Section 7-2.2). Once selected, the entire command will display in reverse video. Only one command can be selected at a time. Once a command is selected within the integrated source editor, the user cannot select an item in the main GBNT window. Likewise, when a draw item is selected in the main GBNT window, a command cannot be selected in the source editor.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 7-8 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 7-2. Introduction to the Integrated Source Editor

When the term “compile” is used in this section, as in the example, “compile the line (or command)”, it means that the user should perform one of the following two steps:

• Pull down the Edit menu, and select Compile selected cmd. OR

• Press the Compile Command button on the toolbar (see Section 7-2.2). The new information is checked for errors, and if none are found, the command is compiled and the change is complete.

Deﬁning the Current Line and Command

Commands can consist of one line or they can extend to many lines. When the text in this section refers to the “current line,” it is describing the line with the cursor in it. When referring to the “current command,” it is discussing the command with the cursor in it. In some examples, these terms may be synonymous. However, there are times when the text is referring to a speciﬁc line within a multi-line command. Users should not assume that a line and a command are always the same when using the editing functions.

11/01 7-9 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 7-3. Creating and Editing Source Commands

7-3. Creating and Editing Source Commands

Use the following procedures to create and edit source commands.

1. Pull down the View menu on the main GBNT window, and select Integrated Source.

The GBNT:Integrated Source Editor window appears (see Figure 7-2).

Figure 7-2. GBNT:Integrated Source Editor Window

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 7-10 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 7-3. Creating and Editing Source Commands

7-3.1. Adding New Commands

The sections below discuss adding new commands in the GBNT:Integrated Source Editor window.

Note

Unlike a text editor, the user cannot type multiple commands in Insert Mode. Only one command may be entered at a time.

Adding Commands — Before

1. To add a command before the current command, place the cursor on the command that should come after the new command.

2. Pull down the Edit menu on the GBNT:Integrated Source Editor window.

3. Select New line/cmd and pull right to display another menu with the choices above cursor and below cursor. Select above cursor.

11/01 7-11 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 7-3. Creating and Editing Source Commands

A blank line, along with the cursor, appears before the previously marked command. See the ﬁgure below.

Note

The DIAGRAM command must be the first command in the file (except for comment lines). Do not add commands before the DIAGRAM command (see “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for more information on entering commands). 4. Type the command according to the rules in “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091).

5. When the command is complete, pull down the Edit menu, and select Compile selected cmd.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 7-12 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 7-3. Creating and Editing Source Commands

Note

Adding Commands — After

1. To add a command after the current command, place the cursor on the command that should come before the new command.

2. Pull down the Edit menu on the GBNT:Integrated Source Editor window.

3. Select New line/cmd and pull right to display another menu with the choices above cursor and below cursor. Select below cursor.

A blank line, along with the cursor, appears after the previously marked command. See the ﬁgure below.

11/01 7-13 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 7-3. Creating and Editing Source Commands

4. Type the command according to the rules in “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091).

5. When the command is complete, pull down the Edit menu, and select Compile selected cmd.

Note

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 7-14 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 7-3. Creating and Editing Source Commands

7-3.2. Adding Lines within a Command

The sections below discuss adding lines within existing commands.

Adding Lines — Before

1. To add a line before the current line, select the command (see Section 7-2.4). Once selected, the entire command displays in reverse video.

2. Place the cursor on the line (within the command) that should come after the new line.

3. Pull down the Edit menu on the GBNT:Integrated Source Editor window.

4. Select New line/cmd and pull right to display another menu with the choices above cursor and below cursor. Select above cursor.

11/01 7-15 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 7-3. Creating and Editing Source Commands

A blank line, along with the cursor, appears before the current line as shown below.

5. Type in the command parameters according to the rules in “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091).

6. When the command is complete, pull down the Edit menu, and select Compile selected cmd.

Note

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 7-16 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 7-3. Creating and Editing Source Commands

Adding Lines — After

1. To add a line after the current line, select the command (see Section 7-2.4). Once selected, the entire command displays in reverse video.

2. Place the cursor on the line (within the command) that should come before the new line.

3. Pull down the Edit menu on the GBNT:Integrated Source Editor window.

4. Select New line/cmd and pull right to display another menu with the choices above cursor and below cursor. Select below cursor.

11/01 7-17 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 7-3. Creating and Editing Source Commands

A blank line, along with the cursor, appears after the current line as shown below.

5. Type in the command parameters according to the rules in “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091).

6. When the command is complete, pull down the Edit menu, and select Compile selected cmd.

Note

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 7-18 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 7-3. Creating and Editing Source Commands

7-3.3. Editing Commands

Use the following steps to edit commands.

1. Select the command to be edited (see Section 7-2.4).

The entire command displays in reverse video.

2. Pull down the Edit menu on the GBNT:Integrated Source Editor window, and select one of three options:

• Insert Mode allows the user to type new text at the cursor point without typing over text.

• Append Mode allows the user to type in new text at the end of the current line.

• Replace Mode allows the user to type over existing text.

Note

The user can exit from any text-entering mode by selecting the key (Escape) on the keyboard. However, Escape does not deselect the selected command or line. 3. When the command is complete, pull down the Edit menu, and select Compile selected cmd.

Notes

If there are errors within the added command, an error message displays, the command line does not compile, and it remains selected. To deselect the line without compiling, select Undo on the Edit menu. The keyword of a command name cannot be changed. To change a keyword, the command must be deleted and a newcommand must be entered. See “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for more information on keywords.

11/01 7-19 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 7-3. Creating and Editing Source Commands

7-3.4. Deﬁning Blocks

The user can move, copy, or delete a block of commands within the source editor. To do this, a block consisting of two or more commands must be deﬁned.

1. To start a block, click anywhere on the command that is the starting point of the block.

2. Pull down the Edit menu, and select Block begin/end.

The selected command line appears in red.

3. To end the block, place the cursor anywhere on the command that is the ending point for the block.

4. Pull down the Edit menu, and select Block begin/end again.

The command lines between the start and end of the block inclusive appear in red.

Notes

Items grouped in the main GBNT window cannot be blocked. Section labels (BACKGROUND, FOREGROUND, DIAGRAM, KEYBOARD, and TRIGGER) cannot be blocked. Whenever a LOOP, IF_CHANGED, IFELSE, or PTR_LOOP command is within a block, the matching ENDIF, ENDLOOP, or P_ENDLOOP command must also be within the block. See “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for more information about these commands.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 7-20 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 7-3. Creating and Editing Source Commands

7-3.5. Deleting Text

The following procedures discuss deleting text using items on the Edit menu. In addition, keyboard “shortcuts” can be used to delete text.

Deleting Commands

1. To delete an entire command, place the cursor anywhere on the command. Do not select the command for edit.

2. Pull down the Edit menu on the GBNT:Integrated Source Editor window, and select Delete Line/Cmd/Block.

The entire command is deleted.

Deleting Lines within a Command

1. Select the command that contains the line to be deleted (see Section 7-2.4).

The entire command displays in reverse video.

2. Place the cursor on the line (within the command) to be deleted.

3. Pull down the Edit menu on the GBNT:Integrated Source Editor window, and select Delete Line/Cmd/Block.

The current line is deleted.

4. When the command is complete, pull down the Edit menu, and select Compile selected cmd.

Note

Only the current line is deleted. The remainder of the command stays selected on the screen. The line containing the keyword within a multi-line command cannot be deleted.

11/01 7-21 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 7-3. Creating and Editing Source Commands

Deleting Characters

1. Select the command that contains the character to be deleted (see Section 7-2.4).

The entire command displays in reverse video.

2. Place the cursor on the character to be deleted.

3. Use the Delete key on the keyboard to delete the character (or pull down the Edit menu and select Delete Char).

4. When the command is complete, pull down the Edit menu, and select Compile selected cmd.

Deleting Blocks

1. Deﬁne the block to delete according to the procedures in Section 7-3.4.

2. Pull down the Edit menu on the GBNT:Integrated Source Editor window, and select Delete Line/Cmd/Block.

The block is deleted.

7-3.6. Undoing the Last Edit

The undo function “undoes” the last edit that was performed, or “redoes” the last undo. Entering undo in the middle of editing a source command cancels the editing done thus far, and the changes to the command are lost. To use this option:

1. Pull down the Edit menu on the GBNT:Integrated Source Editor window.

2. Select Undo.

The last edit cancels.

Note

Editing of the DIAGRAM command cannot be undone. See “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for more information on the DIAGRAM command.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 7-22 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 7-3. Creating and Editing Source Commands

7-3.7. Commenting/Uncommenting Commands

The comment/uncomment function allows the user to toggle the state of any command to and/or from a comment. If the current command is not a comment, it becomes a comment (the command does not have to be selected in the source editor). If the current command is a comment, then the comment symbol (“*”) is removed. When a command becomes a comment, any associated display item is erased from the GBNT drawing canvas. Likewise, when a comment becomes a command again, any associated display re-appears on the screen. When a command becomes a comment, all lines of the associated command become comment lines. The entire command becomes a comment — not just the current line which has the cursor on it.

Use the following procedure to use the comment/uncomment option.

1. Move the cursor somewhere on a command you want to comment or uncomment.

2. Pull down the Edit menu on the GBNT:Integrated Source Editor window.

3. Select Comment/Uncomment.

The command becomes commented or uncommented as applicable.

11/01 7-23 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 7-4. Moving Text

7-4. Moving Text

Use the following procedures for moving commands and blocks.

Note

Individual lines within commands cannot be moved.

7-4.1. Moving Commands — Before

1. Select the command to be moved (see Section 7-2.4).

The entire command displays in reverse video.

2. Place the cursor on the command that should come after the moved command. (The moved command will be placed before the current command.)

3. Pull down the Edit menu on the GBNT:Integrated Source Editor window.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 7-24 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 7-4. Moving Text

4. Select Move cmd/block and pull right to display another menu with the choices above cursor and below cursor. Select above cursor.

5. The selected command appears before the current command.

11/01 7-25 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 7-4. Moving Text

7-4.2. Moving Commands — After

1. Select the command to be moved (see Section 7-2.4).

The entire command displays in reverse video.

2. Place the cursor on the command that should come before the moved command. (The moved command will be placed after the current command.)

3. Pull down the Edit menu on the GBNT:Integrated Source Editor window.

4. Select Move cmd block and pull right to display another menu with the choices above cursor and below cursor. Select below cursor.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 7-26 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 7-4. Moving Text

5. The selected command appears after the current command.

7-4.3. Moving Blocks — Before

1. Select a block according to the procedures in Section 7-3.4.

2. Place the cursor on the command that should come after the moved block. (The moved block will be placed before the current command.)

3. Pull down the Edit menu on the GBNT:Integrated Source Editor window.

4. Select Move cmd block and pull right to display another menu with the choices above cursor and below cursor. Select above cursor.

5. The block appears before the current command.

11/01 7-27 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 7-4. Moving Text

7-4.4. Moving Blocks — After

1. Select a block according to the procedures in Section 7-3.4.

2. Place the cursor on the command that should come before the moved block. (The moved block will be placed after the current command.)

3. Pull down the Edit menu on the GBNT:Integrated Source Editor window.

4. Select Move cmd block and pull right to display another menu with the choices above cursor and below cursor. Select below cursor.

5. The block appears after the current command.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 7-28 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 7-5. Copying Text

7-5. Copying Text

Use the following procedures to copy commands and blocks.

Note

Individual lines within a command cannot be copied.

7-5.1. Copying Commands — Before

1. Select the command to be copied (see Section 7-2.4).

The entire command displays in reverse video.

2. Place the cursor on the command that should come after the copied command. (The copied command will be placed before the current command.)

11/01 7-29 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 7-5. Copying Text

3. Pull down the Edit menu on the GBNT:Integrated Source Editor window.

4. Select Copy cmd/block and pull right to display another menu with the choices above cursor and below cursor. Select above cursor.

A duplicate of the selected command appears before the previously marked command.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 7-30 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 7-5. Copying Text

7-5.2. Copying Commands — After

1. Select the command to be copied (see Section 7-2.4).

The entire command displays in reverse video.

2. Place the cursor on the command that should come before the copied command. (The copied command will be placed after the current command.)

3. Pull down the Edit menu on the GBNT:Integrated Source Editor window.

4. Select Copy cmd/block and pull right to display another menu with the choices above cursor and below cursor. Select below cursor.

A duplicate of the selected command appears after the previously marked command.

11/01 7-31 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 7-5. Copying Text

7-5.3. Copying Blocks — Before

1. Select a block according to the procedures in Section 7-3.4.

2. Place the cursor on the command that should come after the copied block. (The copied block will be placed before the current command.)

3. Pull down the Edit menu on the GBNT:Integrated Source Editor window.

4. Select Copy cmd/block and pull right to display another menu with the choices above cursor and below cursor. Select above cursor.

5. A duplicate block appears before the previously marked command.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 7-32 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 7-5. Copying Text

7-5.4. Copying Blocks — After

1. Select a block according to the procedures in Section 7-3.4.

2. Place the cursor on the command that should come before the copied block. (The copied block will be placed after the current command.)

3. Pull down the Edit menu on the GBNT:Integrated Source Editor window.

4. Select Copy cmd/block and pull right to display another menu with the choices above cursor and below cursor. Select below cursor.

5. A duplicate block appears after the previously marked command.

11/01 7-33 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 7-6. Printing the Source File

7-6. Printing the Source File

The File pull-down menu displays the print functions which allows the user to print all or part of the source ﬁle.

Prints the entire ﬁle to the destination speciﬁed on the Print Setup window. The user simply pulls down the File menu, and selects Print.

Print Page

Prints only the selected page of the ﬁle (what is currently displayed on the integrated source editor window) to the destination speciﬁed on the Print Setup window. The user simply pulls down the File menu, and selects Print Page.

Print Setup

Displays the standard NT Print Setup window which allows the user to specify a printer, paper size, print mode, and so forth. See ﬁgure below.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 7-34 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 7-6. Printing the Source File

The window has the following options:

• Name pull-down menu — Lists the names of the printers that are available for printing.

• Source pull-down menu — Determines the source of the paper (from where the paper is coming from). The choices are Automatically Select, Cassette, or Manually Feed.

• Orientation choice buttons — Allows the user to choose between Portrait (prints vertically) or Landscape (prints horizontally)

• Properties button — Displays another window that deﬁnes the ﬁelds on the Print Setup window.

• Network button — Displays another window that shows the network connections for the printers deﬁned.

11/01 7-35 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 7-7. Using the Find/Replace Function

7-7. Using the Find/Replace Function

The Find portion of the Find/Replace function searches the source file for specified strings. For example, if the user wants to find the string “le,” each line of the file is checked for occurrences of “le.” When the string is found, it is highlighted in reverse video. The user can then continue to search for additional occurrences, replace with a different string, or end the search.

The Replace portion replaces the string (that was found with the Find option) with other valid strings. For example, if the user chooses to replace all occurrences of the string “solid” with “dashed,” each line of the file is checked for occurrences of “solid,” and any matches are replaced with “dashed.” Note that the Find and/or the Find/Replace searches will find a string even if it is part of a token. For example, when replacing the string “solid” with “dashed,” if a line in the source file contains “near_solid,” that string will be replaced with “near_dashed.”

Use the following procedure to use the Find/Replace function:

1. Pull down the Edit menu on the GBNT:Integrated Source Editor window, and select Find/Replace.

The GBNT:Find/Replace window appears (Figure 7-3).

Figure 7-3. GBNT:Find/Replace Window

2. Enter the characters or string to search for in the Find what entry ﬁeld. Quotes should only be used if replacing with quote characters.

Searching is not case sensitive by default. Select the Match case toggle button to make searching case sensitive. Once selected, a checkmark appears in the box.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) 7-36 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C 7-7. Using the Find/Replace Function

3. Select the Find button. The search process starts at the current cursor position in the ﬁle. The search ends when a match is found or when the search loops back to the original starting position.

If a match is found, the characters are displayed in reverse video. At this point, the user can enter a replacement string (Step 5), or continue with the Find function.

4. If a replacement is desired for the match, enter the characters or string in the Replace with entry ﬁeld.

Select the Conﬁrm ﬁrst? toggle button if you want to be prompted before the system performs the replace. Once selected, a checkmark appears in the box.

5. Select the Replace button to replace just the current instance of the match found. Select Replace All to replace every occurrence of the match in the ﬁle.

If the replace is successful, the graphic display updates on the main GBNT window, and the replaced token is now displayed in reverse video. Note that the replace will not occur if a syntax error results from the replaced token. An error will appear in a pop-up window stating the error that resulted.

To quit the GBNT:Find/Replace window, press the “x” button in the upper right corner of the window.

11/01 7-37 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C Appendix A. Custom Files

A-1. Overview

This appendix describes the configuration files for custom colors, fill patterns, line patterns, and pixmaps. The following topics are included: • Defining custom files (Section A-2). • Editing the custom colors file (Section A-3). • Editing the custom font sizes file (Section A-4). • Editing the custom fill patterns file (Section A-5). • Editing custom line patterns (Section A-6). • Creating custom pixmaps (Section A-7).

11/01 A-1 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C A-2. Deﬁning Custom Files

A-2. Deﬁning Custom Files

There are four custom files (cstfiles) that can be defined by the user. In the offline version of GBNT, these files reside in the [InstallationPath]/mmi/graphics/ cstfiles directory (where [InstallationPath] is a user-defined directory): • colors.txt — Use to create custom colors. • fonts.txt — Use to specify font sizes. • fill_patterns.txt — Use to create custom fill patterns. • line_patterns.txt — Use to create custom line patterns. • (*.bmp) files — used to create custom diagram background bitmap files. To add these files to the Ovation Developer Studio, the Import Graphics program is used. See Appendix D for information on the Import Graphics program.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) A-2 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C A-3. Editing the Custom Colors File

A-3. Editing the Custom Colors File

A-3.1. File Description

The ASCII file colors.txt is required by GBNT if the user wants to choose from more than the eight standard colors or if the user wants to choose the OPEN LOOK colors instead of the defaults. A sample color file is provided with the standard release CD-ROM. Figure A-1 shows a portion of a sample colors.txt file.

dodgerblue cornflowerblue deepskyblue skyblue darkgreen seagreen darkturquoise aquamarine lightseagreen yellowgreen limegreen springgreen palegreen gold darkkhaki darkgoldenrod goldenrod rosybrown indianred saddlebrown brown salmon orange OL_COLOR 0 navy OL_COLOR 1 seagreen

Figure A-1. Sample colors.txt File

This file allows the user to define unlimited custom colors and up to 5 OL colors. The eight standard colors (black, white, red, green, blue, yellow, magenta, and cyan) are hardcoded into GBNT and are not in this file.

The eight standard colors are automatically added to the beginning of the color scrolling lists in GBNT.

11/01 A-3 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C A-3. Editing the Custom Colors File

There are two syntax lines in this ﬁle:

(1) color_name (2) OL_COLOR ol_color_index color_name where:

color_name = Associated ASCII name for the color. ol_color_index = OL color choice index (valid range = 0 through 4) associated with OL color in the COLOR command

Note Color names are not case sensitive.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) A-4 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C A-4. Editing the Custom Font Sizes File

A-4. Editing the Custom Font Sizes File

A-4.1. File Description

The ASCII file, fonts.txt, defines eight possible point sizes for bitmap text. A sample font size file is provided with the standard release CD-ROM. Figure A-2 shows an example of the fonts.txt file.

The point sizes are defined as integers. The valid range for point sizes is 1 through 200. The user may enter the eight point sizes on a single line or on individual lines. No data other than the eight integers is permitted in this file. The user may not specify a particular font style in this file. If the fonts.txt file does not exist, an error message appears, and GBNT cancels.

10 12 14 18 20 24 36 50

Figure A-2. Sample fonts.txt File

Note

Duplicate point sizes are permitted in the ﬁle.

11/01 A-5 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C A-5. Editing the Custom Fill Patterns File

A-5. Editing the Custom Fill Patterns File

A-5.1. File Description

The ASCII file fill_patterns.txt is required by GBNT if the user wants to create custom fill patterns. A sample file is provided with the standard release CD-ROM. Figure A-3 shows a portion of the fill_pattern.txt file.

9 star_pat 10 moon_pat 11 circ_pat 12 lefthalf 13 tophalf

Figure A-3. Sample ﬁll_patterns.txt File

This file allows the user to define up to 248 fill patterns for a total of 256 fill patterns in the GBNT:Fill Pattern scrolling list. The eight standard fill patterns (solid, back_slash, slash, vert_slash, horz_slash, asterisks, blocks, and west_logo), are automatically added to the beginning of the list. In addition, the fill pattern, “unfilled” is listed at the beginning of the list and is considered standard. The format of the file is: fill_index fill_pattern_name where:

fill_index = Number in the diagram object file associated with the fill pattern (valid range = 9 through 256). fill_pattern_name = Associated ASCII name for the fill pattern. The fill pattern name can be a maximum of ten characters long, cannot contain blanks, and must begin with a letter.

Only one fill pattern per line in the file is allowed. No comments are allowed in the file. The indices are numbered consecutively, but that is not required.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) A-6 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C A-5. Editing the Custom Fill Patterns File

A-5.2. Procedure

The NT Paint program is used to create/edit custom fill pattern files. Custom fill patterns will be stored in standard bitmap format on NT, and will be named using the .bmp file extension. These .bmp files will reside in the same directory as fill_patterns.txt.

Note

In order to use UNIX .gly files, they must first be converted to .bmp files before they can be imported. This does not merely mean renaming the files. Either a third-party program must be used to convert the files or the custom fill pattern must be rebuilt using the Windows NT Paint program.

To access the NT Paint program, follow the steps below:

1. Select Start -> Programs -> Accessories -> Paint.

11/01 A-7 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C A-5. Editing the Custom Fill Patterns File

The main Paint window displays (Figure A-4).

Figure A-4. Paint Window

2. From the Paint window, pull down the Image menu, and select Attributes.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) A-8 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C A-5. Editing the Custom Fill Patterns File

The Attributes window displays (Figure A-5).

Figure A-5. Attributes Window -- Paint Program

3. Specify the bitmap width and height in the Width and Height entry ﬁelds. Typical bitmaps are 32 x 32.

4. Set the Units to Pels.

5. Set the Colors to Black and white.

Fill pattern bitmaps must be monochrome (black and white) or an error message will appear when starting up GBNT.

6. Press the OK button on the Attributes window.

A Paint notice window will appear stating that the loss of color may occur and cannot be undone when switching to black and white color. Press the Yes button on this window.

7. Return to the main Paint window. Pull down the View menu, and go to Zoom. Pull-right on Zoom and select the Custom menu item.

11/01 A-9 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C A-5. Editing the Custom Fill Patterns File

The Custom Zoom window appears (Figure A-6).

Figure A-6. Custom Zoom Window

8. Set the custom zoom to 800%, and press the OK button.

9. Return to the main Paint window again. Pull down the View menu, and go to Zoom. Pull-right on Zoom and select the Show Grid menu item.

10. Create the ﬁll pattern. If necessary, refer to the NT Paint documentation for assistance.

11. When the fill pattern is completed, save the file as a .bmp monochrome file. The user must specify the directory and the base fill pattern name (accept the default .bmp file extension).

12. After the ﬁll pattern has been created and saved, it must be added to the GBNT environment.

If running ofﬂine:

A. Add the fill pattern name (less the path and .bmp file extension) to the fill_patterns.txt file. The offline fill_patterns.txt file resides in the [InstallationPath]\mmi\graphics\cstfiles directory (where Installation_Path is the directory where offline GBNT was installed).

B. Add a newline at the end of the file, select an index (9 - 256) that is not already used in the file, and enter the new fill pattern name.

C. After editing this file, copy the associated fill pattern .bmp file, created by Paint, to the same directory where fill_patterns.txt exists, if it is not already there.

D. Restart GBNT.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) A-10 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C A-5. Editing the Custom Fill Patterns File

If running online in the Ovation NT Developer Studio:

A. Create an empty ﬁll_patterns.txt ﬁle.

B. Add the fill pattern file name (less the path and .bmp file extension) to the file. Remember that the syntax of the fill_patterns.txt file requires an index (9 - 256) before the fill pattern name.

C. Copy the fill pattern .bmp file, created by Paint. to the same directory as the fill_patterns.txt file just created.

D. Import this fill_patterns.txt file using the Import Graphics program (see Appendix D). The next time a graphic is opened/created, the newfill pattern will be available for use.

11/01 A-11 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C A-6. Creating Custom Line Patterns

A-6. Creating Custom Line Patterns

A-6.1. File Description

The ASCII file line_patterns.txt is required by GBNT if the user wants to create custom line patterns. A sample file is provided in the standard release CD-ROM. Figure A-4 shows an example of the line_patterns.txt file.

9 newline 15 5 20 5 10 endline 20 3 10 2 11 topline 15 1 15 1

Figure A-4. Sample line_patterns.txt File

This ﬁle allows the user to deﬁne up to 247 line patterns for a total of 256 line patterns in the scrolling list. The nine standard line patterns (solid, dashed, sm_dash, big_dots, dotted, dash_dot, near_solid, sparse, dot_dash) are automatically added to the beginning of the list.

The format of the ﬁle is:

line_pattern_index line_pattern_name dash_count_n

where:

line_pattern_index = Number in the diagram object file associated with the line pattern. line_pattern_name = Associated ASCII name for the line pattern. dash_count_n = Count of the number of pixels to display in either the foreground or the background.

Valid line pattern indices are 9 through 255. The line pattern name can be a maximum of ten characters long, cannot contain blanks, and must begin with a letter.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) A-12 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C A-6. Creating Custom Line Patterns

Line patterns are defined by a series of dash counts. A dash count is defined as a number of pixels of either foreground (FG) color or background (BG) color from the applicable COLOR command. The color (FG or BG) of the dash counts alternate in the patterns. The first dash count is the number of pixels of FG color, the second dash count is the number of pixels of BG color, the third dash count is the number of pixels of FG color, and so forth. When the line pattern is used to draw some item, the series of dash counts repeats until the entire item is drawn.

All of the data for a given line pattern must be on the same line in the ﬁle. Line pattern data cannot be spread across multiple lines.

Duplicate line pattern indices generate error messages. Any errors found while reading the ﬁle generate appropriate error messages, and GBNT cancels.

A-6.2. Procedures

Custom line patterns can be created, modiﬁed, or deleted by using GBNT (recommended method).

In order to edit custom line patterns, if a line_patterns.txt file exists, the user must have “write” permission to it. If a line_patterns.txt file does not exist, the user must have permission to create it in the cstfiles directory.

Inserting a New Line Pattern (Using GBNT)

Use the following procedure to create custom line patterns.

1. From the GBNT:Drawing Attributes toolbar, select the Line Pattern button (see Section 4).

11/01 A-13 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C A-6. Creating Custom Line Patterns

The GBNT:Line Patterns window displays.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) A-14 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C A-6. Creating Custom Line Patterns

2. Select the Line patterns out for edit checkbox. The GBNT:Line Patterns window appears as shown below.

Table A-1. GBNT:Line Patterns Window -- Line Patterns Out for Edit

3. Enter a name for the line pattern in the name entry ﬁeld. A maximum of ten characters may be used, must begin with an alpha character, and cannot contain any characters other than alphanumerics and the underscore ( _ ) character.

4. Line patterns are made up of a series of alternating foreground and background color dashes. Enter the total number of dash counts for the new line pattern in the dash count (2-16) entry field. There must be at least two dashes to make a line pattern, and no more than 16. When you enter a valid number in this entry field, the corresponding number of entry fields appears under the dashes label.

5. In the entry ﬁelds under the dashes label, enter a number (1 - 99) in each entry ﬁeld displayed or you will get an error. The number entered in each box is the number of pixels of either foreground or background color that will make up the line pattern.

The first entry field is the number of pixels of foreground color, the second is the number of pixels of background color, and so forth. As you enter numbers in these entry fields, the line pattern displays in the pattern display area. Black is the foreground color used and white is the background color used.

11/01 A-15 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C A-6. Creating Custom Line Patterns

6. Press the Create button to create the newline pattern. If no errors are detected, the new line pattern will be created and will be added to the scrolling list. The new line pattern will be selected in the list.

7. Select or “uncheck” the Line patterns out for edit box before exiting the GBNT:Line Patterns window. This signs all changes into the database and returns the window to normal mode.

Modifying a Line Pattern (Using GBNT)

Use the procedure below to modify an existing line pattern.

1. While line patterns are out for edit, select the existing line pattern from the scrolling list or type the name into the name entry ﬁeld.

The line pattern information will display for the given line pattern. If editing is permitted, the Create button will become the Modify button. The line patterns solid, dashed, sm_dash, big_dots, dotted, dash_dot, near_solid, sparse, and dot_dash cannot be modiﬁed.

Note

You cannot rename a line pattern with the Modify button. If you just want to rename a line pattern, you must select the existing line pattern, enter the new name in the name entry ﬁeld, and press the Create button. You must then delete the line pattern that is under the old name.

2. Make the desired changes to any of the entry ﬁelds.

3. Select the Modify button. The line pattern is changed, the scrolling list is updated, and the graphic is repainted (if the line pattern is currently being used).

Deleting a Line Pattern (Using GBNT)

Use the procedure below to modify an existing line pattern.

1. While line patterns are out for edit, select the existing line pattern from the scrolling list or type the name into the name entry ﬁeld.

The line pattern information will display for the given line pattern. If deleting is permitted, the Delete button will become active.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) A-16 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C A-6. Creating Custom Line Patterns

Notes

The ﬁrst nine line patterns: solid, dashed, sm_dash, big_dots, dotted, dash_dot, near_solid, sparse, and dot_dash cannot be deleted.

In addition, a custom line pattern that is currently being used in the graphic cannot be deleted. However, GBNT does not check that the line pattern being deleted is not being used in some other graphic. Be advised that if you delete a line pattern, and some other graphic in the system uses that line pattern, that graphic will not load into GBNT, and will generate compile errors.

2. Select the Delete button. The line pattern is removed from the scrolling list, and the entry ﬁelds on the window are cleared.

Exiting Custom Line Pattern Edit Mode

To exit custom line pattern edit mode, uncheck the Line patterns out for edit toggle box. The window returns to the normal mode for using line pattern attributes. Pressing the Cancel button dismisses the GBNT:Line Patterns window.

11/01 A-17 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C A-7. Creating Custom Diagram Background Bitmaps

A-7. Creating Custom Diagram Background Bitmaps

When creating custom bitmaps, the user must be sure to save the image as a bitmap ﬁle (*.bmp).

The bitmap file must be copied to the [InstallationPath]\mmi\graphics\cstfiles directory if running offline. The bitmap file must be imported into the Ovation NT Developer Studio using the Import Graphics program (see Appendix D).

The Windows NT paint program can be used to create custom bitmaps. These bitmap files (unlike the custom fill pattern bitmap files; see Section A-5) are not required to be monochrome. Third-party software packages may be used to create/ generate these bitmap files also. See the applicable third-party software documentation for more information.

Pictures can be scanned to .jpg or .gif format, and then converted to .bmp format using Microsoft HTML Help Image Editor, Windows NT Imaging, or any third- party package that allows a save of some type of image ﬁle (.jpg, .gif, .tif, and so forth) to a bitmap ﬁle.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) A-18 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C Appendix B. Troubleshooting

B-1. Overview

This appendix discusses frequently asked questions regarding the NT Graphics Builder versus the UNIX Graphics Builder. This appendix is NOT meant to be an all inclusive list, but provides general information on common concerns. If your particular issue is not addressed in this appendix, contact your Westinghouse Project Representative.

11/01 B-1 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C B-2. Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

B-2. Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

The following information answers some frequently asked questions. 1. Q. How do I terminate drawing a line/polygon (that is, how do I specify the last vertex point). A. Use Ctrl + Left mouse button to select the last vertex point of a line/ polygon. In general, use Ctrl + Left mouse button (called Ctrl + left-click) to replace the middle mouse button function of UNIX. 2. Q. Why do I get a compile error when I have a DU type process point drop (drop status point) with an ID record field when the same graphic compiled fine in UNIX? A. DU points no longer have an ID record field in NT. The graphics that paired DU points with ID record fields did this in a call to a poke type 0 command. The syntax for this command requires a point name and an optional record field. If the record field is not specified, a default will be assigned. Previously, GBNT was assigning the ID record field as the default for DU points. GBNT now assigns FA as the default since FA is a valid record field for a DU point in NT.

To correct the compile problem, either delete the record field from the poke type 0 source command in the graphic and let GBNT default it, or replace the ID record field with any record field listed for a Drop Status point in the NT record types document (see “Ovation Record Types Reference Manual” (R3-1140) for more information). 3. Q. If I have a graphic loaded in GBNT, and I bring up the generic text editor, TextEdit, and save and/or recompile, why don’t I see the changes in GBNT? A. The Generic Text Editor is not part of GBNT. GBNT provides the capability to directly invoke TextEdit for the sake of convenience, but the two are totally independent programs. If changes are made in TextEdit, you must reload/reopen the graphic to see the changes in GBNT.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) B-2 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C B-2. Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

4. Q. When I have a graphic displayed in GBNT, and I position the toolbars in a certain way, why do they sometimes move to the next line if I resize the graphic. Similarly, if I have the toolbars a certain way, and I exit GBNT, why do the toolbars sometimes come up in different positions the next time I bring up GBNT? A. The toolbar states (including position) are stored when GBNT exits. The startup width and height of the GBNT window is stored by the Save Defaults function. When GBNT starts up again, the window is initially sized to the width and height stored by the Save Defaults function and the toolbar states are restored. When the window manager attempts to restore the toolbar states, if any toolbar will be completely out of view because the initial GBNT window width and/or height is too small, that toolbar is moved to the next row. A toolbar must be at least partially visible if it is docked. When a graphic is loaded in GBNT or the window is resized, the toolbar positions are re-evaluated by the window manager to make sure that every docked toolbar is still visible. If any toolbar is not visible, it is moved to the next row.

If you are working with full screen graphics, and want the toolbars positioned for full screen graphics, make sure that you have a graphic sized to full screen when you do the Save Defaults function. 5. Q. How do I select overlaid items in GBNT? A. Position the mouse pointer over the item you wish to select and press the left mouse button (normal selection). If the handles are not displayed around the desired item, press the Enter key without moving the mouse pointer. The next item in the list of all items under the mouse will become selected. If that is not the desired item, press the Enter key again. The next item in the list of all items under the mouse will become selected. Continue through a circular list of all items under the mouse until the desired item becomes selected.

Note that you no longer need two hands to perform this function (one to hold down the left mouse button and one to press the Enter button). Only the Enter key is used in NT. In fact, if the left mouse button is depressed when the Enter key is pressed, nothing happens. Also note that you must initiate this process by ﬁrst selecting with the left mouse button. If no item is currently selected, and you position the mouse over some item and just press the Enter key, nothing happens.

11/01 B-3 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C B-2. Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

6. Q. When I resize vector text, why doesn’t the text always size the way the resize handles imply that it will? Why does the text size sometimes seem to jump to an unexpected size and then other times seem to size as expected? A. When GBNT attempts to create/get a font of a particular size in NT, it is only a request. The NT font mapper attempts to ﬁnd the font in the requested size, and then gives the closest match if the exact font is not found. GBNT has no control over this. Sometimes the match is exact; sometimes it is not even close. The font mapper searches by height ﬁrst and then by width. If the height exists, the font mapper returns that font whether it matches the width or not.

Text sizes may change on a zoom/resize operation. This means that if you interactively resize text, the text drawn after you release the mouse pointer may not represent what the outlining rectangle handles lead you to believe the size would be while dragging for resize. GBNT may have requested a certain size font, but received a different size from the NT font mapper. This also means that if you draw a box around text and then resize the diagram, zoom the diagram, or group the box and text and resize the group, the text may not always be within the box after the resize. During the resize, GBNT requests a certain font size to keep the text in the box but may receive another size from the NT font mapper. 7. Q. Can I batch compile my existing macro graphics to generate the corresponding bitmap preview ﬁles? A. No. You must manually load/open each existing macro in GBNT, and then save the macro to generate the associated macro preview ﬁle. 8. Q. What are the differences between the UNIX and NT Graphics Builder? A. There are cosmetic differences between the NT and UNIX version of the Graphics Builder (known as GBNT and GB, respectively). Functionally, both versions are very similar. Some menu items have been shifted to different menus and some functions are accessed/implemented a little bit differently in GBNT. However, most of the UNIX functionality exists in GBNT.

The following list of differences between NT and UNIX consists of changes in functionality and/or implementation that could impact the user and any new/ additional functionality. The cosmetic differences (menu items that have been moved, windows that are not implemented via a toolbar, and so forth) are left to the user to learn.

— Generic Text Support Added — Support has been added to GBNT to invoke a generic text editor, TextEdit. This text editor makes it easy for the user to edit graphic source ﬁles and then correct any syntax errors in the ﬁle before reloading it into GBNT. See Section 3 for more information.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) B-4 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C B-2. Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

— Macro dialog signiﬁcantly enhanced — Macro dialog now provides macro preview support, macro notes/comments support, macro scaling support, and parameter descriptions support. — Support for $COLORn and $OL_COLORn Added — the $COLORn and $OL_COLORn variables were added so that colors and OL colors can be passed into macros.

— Support for Macro Parameter Descriptions Added — The GBNT:Macro Notes & Parameter Descriptions dialog (DEF_MACRO_PARAMS command) was added to support macro parameter descriptions and notes. — Color Limitations Changed — UNIX GB limited the user to 256 custom colors. GBNT has no custom color limit. Both platforms set a limit of ﬁve OL colors. — Ctrl + Left Click Replaces Middle Mouse Button in UNIX — The Ctrl+Left mouse button combination is used in GBNT to emulate the middle mouse button function in UNIX. Use Ctrl+Left to select the last vertex point of a line/polygon, to toggle any items’ selection status, to select the target handles/object handles for object-to-object snap, and to select the target vertex for vertex edit align x coords, align y coords, and snap to vertex functions.

— Enter Key Replaces Enter + Left in UNIX — The Enter key is used in GBNT to select overlaid items. In UNIX, the Enter+Left mouse button was used to perform the same task. Use only the Enter key in GBNT. — Vector Font Implementation Changed — GBNT uses the Windows implementation of fonts to give the user more font choices. However, resizing is not exact. See Question #6 above for detailed information. — FONT Command Added to Support New Vector Font Implementation — A FONT command has been added to the graphics language on NT to support the new vector font implementation. See “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for more information. — Optional Diagram Title/Description Added to DIAGRAM Command — An optional diagram/title description has been added to the DIAGRAM command in the graphics source language. The diagram description is displayed in the list of available macros on the Macro dialog in GBNT, in the title bar of the GBNT window along with the name of the graphic when a graphic is loaded, and in the graphics “favorites” list at runtime. See “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for more information on the DIAGRAM command.

11/01 B-5 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C B-2. Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

— Print Support Added to the Interactive Editor — The ability to print a graphic from the interactive editor (as well as the .src file from the integrated source editor) has been added to GBNT. The standard NT print mechanism is used to perform the print. — Compile Implementation Changed — In NT, the batch compile function is part of GBNT. If running GBNT offline, there is a Compile dialog for compiling. If running GBNT online, the compile function is initiated from the Ovation Developer Studio. See Section 2 and Section 3 for more information on compiling. — Checking Added for Resizing/Scaling Items/Groups Too Small/Large — GBNT nowchecks whenresizing individual items, groups, and/or macro to make sure that they are not too small or too large. Too small/large is defined when a virtual width or height becomes <=0 or >=16383. When this occurs, a notice window will pop up informing that the resize has been aborted. — Change Place Toolbar Button Added — In GBNT, the Change Place function is implemented as a separate button on the Drawing Attributes toolbar. You must manually press the Change Place button to change the place for selected items in GBNT. See Section 4 for more information. — Icons No Longer Supported in NT — Icons are not applicable in NT when a graphic is minimized. The icon # on the DIAGRAM command is no longer used. The entry field for the icon # has been deleted from the Diagram Configuration window. Graphic .src files having an icon number defined will still load, but the icon # will be automatically changed to 0 in the integrated source editor. — Custom Fill Patterns Implementation Changed — NT does not support X11 bitmap files. Therefore, the UNIX custom fill patterns (*.gly files) are not supported in NT. Standard Windows bitmap files (*.bmp) are now used for both diagram background bitmap files and custom fill patterns. See Appendix A for more information.

— Select All Function Added —ASelect All function has been added to the Edit menu in GBNT to select all the items on the screen. — The UNIX “Show Attrs” Function is Renamed “Properties” in GBNT — For more information on this function, see Section 5. — No Point Directory Support When Running GBNT Ofﬂine — If running GBNT ofﬂine, there will be no point directory support in GBNT. all points will be interpreted as dummy points.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) B-6 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C B-2. Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

— Groups/Macros Containing Bitmap Text Will Not Resize/Scale — Groups/macros containing bitmap or bitmap-over type text cannot be scaled/resized in GBNT. Bitmap type text, by deﬁnition, does not scale/ resize. If a macro contains one or more items created with bitmap/bitmap- over text, that macro can only be displayed in its as-built size. If you group items on the screen and one or more of those items is a a bitmap text item, that group will not be allowed to be resized. This applies to manual resizing and for resize-by-factor. — Support Added for Setting Word-Wrap When Displaying Conditionals — An option has been added to GBNT to set the word wrap for the display of conditionals during the Properties function. This option, which is strictly cosmetic, is called Conditional Word Wrap. For more information, see Section 3. — Default Multi-Draw Option Changed — The default multi-drawoption is OFF in GBNT. The capability still exists in GBNT, but it must be manually turned on. Note that if you want this option ON all the time, set it to ON and execute the Save Defaults function in GBNT. See Section 3 for more information. — Default Text Type Set to Vector-Over — When GBNT initially displays, the default text type on the Font Attributes dialog will be set to vector with the overstrike option turned on. — Scales No Longer Supported for Trend, XY-Plot, and Dynamic Line — The SCALE/NOSCALE option for DYNAMIC_LINE, TREND, and XY_PLOT commands is no longer used in GBNT. A placeholder for the scale option still exists in the source syntax for each of these commands to avoid editing existing graphics. However, no matter what is loaded/entered for this parameter, it will be compiled as NOSCALE. See “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for more information. — Grid/Snap Changed — If a grid is not displayed, there is no snapping. However, in GBNT, snapping occurs automatically on draw operations when the grid is displayed. Also, there is no snapping in GBNT on a move/ copy operation. Snapping only occurs on drawoperation or whenthe snap- to-grid function is selected.

— Copy vs. Duplicates on the Edit Menu — The UNIX Copy Edit menu function (which makes 1 - 10 copies of the selected item) is renamed as the Duplicates Edit menu function in GBNT. The GBNT Copy Edit menu function is the copy part of the copy/paste function that is implemented in UNIX with the Copy keyboard key.

11/01 B-7 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C B-2. Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ)

— BLINK Command Syntax Changed — The BLINK command is no longer a standalone graphics command in GBNT. It is now an optional attribute to the COLOR command. See “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for more information.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) B-8 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C Appendix C. Shape Library Source File

C-1. Overview

GBNT supports a source version of the Shape Library in addition to the object version. The source version of the Shape Library is generated automatically when the object version is written. The object version is written when changes have been made to the Shape Library and when the following occurs: • User checks the Shape Library out for edit then checks it back in from the GBNT:Shape Library window.

• User checks the Shape Library out for edit and then performs a Properties function (see Section 5) on a shape item. • User quits GBNT. • Ofﬂine GBNT is invoked with the source version of the Shape Library. If running GBNT ofﬂine, the source version of the Shape Library eliminates the need for users to rebuild their Shape Libraries when new releases of software are installed which are incompatible with previous versions of the object code. When a new release is installed, the user can load the source version of the Shape Library, so that the Shape Library will be written in a compatible object version. A compatible object version of the shape library will be automatically written when GBNT starts up. Note that shapes will usually be displayed, created, and edited interactively (as described in Section 4). If running GBNT online, the source version of the Shape Library is the only format that can be imported via the Import Graphics program (see Appendix D).

The object version of the Shape Library is read at start-up by default unless otherwise speciﬁed. The “-S” option on the GBNT command line is used to load the source version of the Shape Library at start-up instead of the object version if running GBNT ofﬂine. The object version is always read at startup when running GBNT from the Ovation NT Developer Studio.

The source version name is the same as the object file name but with a “.src” extension. The object file is named shapelib.diag, the source file is named shapelib.src.

11/01 C-1 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C If newshapes are created in the ofﬂine version of GBNT, the updated Shape Library can only be added to the Ovation Developer Studio (online version of GBNT) by using the Import Graphics program (see Appendix D).

The following topics are included in this section: • Format of Shape Library source ﬁle (Section C-2). • Keyword reference (Section C-3 through Section C-11). • Source ﬁle errors (Section C-12).

NT-0090 (Rev 1) C-2 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C C-2. Format of Shape Library Source File

C-2. Format of Shape Library Source File

The Shape Library source ﬁle consists of the following valid keywords: • SHAPELIB • DEF_SHAPE • LINE • POLYGON • ARC • DOT • ELLIPSE • RECTANGLE • END_SHAPE The Shape Library source commands do not use the same syntax or followthe same rules as their counterparts in the graphics source language (see “Ovation NT Graphics Language Reference Manual” (NT-0091) for more information on graphics source commands). The syntax for these commands only apply to the Shape Library.

Comments are allowed anywhere in the source format ﬁle. A comment begins with the asterisk (*) character and ends at the end of the line. Everything after the “*” character on a given line is ignored. Unlike graphics ﬁles, comments may be imbedded within the parameter lists for any of the commands above.

Note that all comments are lost when the Shape Library ﬁles are written, no matter what version was loaded. In other words, any time a change is made to the Shape Library (using the main GBNT window), the new source ﬁle will not include any comments. Thus, comments should not be added until changes to the Shape Library are complete.

Figure C-1 shows a sample Shape Library source ﬁle. Section C-3 through Section C-11 list the syntax, description, and rules for each keyword in alphabetical order. Section C-12 list possible error messages.

11/01 C-3 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C C-2. Format of Shape Library Source File

SHAPELIB DEF_SHAPE 93 shape93 POLYGON 5 385 2751 1347 0 1973 2930 0 539 2815 1615 1 solid unfilled END_SHAPE 0 0 * w=2815,h=2930

DEF_SHAPE 94 shape94 RECTANGLE 0 0 2214 2871 1 solid unfilled END_SHAPE 0 0 * w=2214,h=2871

DEF_SHAPE 95 shape95 DOT 12 194 SMALL DOT 1071 134 MEDIUM DOT 1961 74 LARGE END_SHAPE 0 0 * w=2021,h=209

DEF_SHAPE 98 shape98 ARC 0 627 2358 2930 257 -225 1 solid unfilled LINE 5 3440 0 5461 598 2911 1016 5413 1614 4162 2182 1 solid POLYGON 5 698 6816 1660 4065 2286 6995 313 4604 3128 5680 1 solid unfilled RECTANGLE 3753 4245 2214 2871 1 solid unfilled END_SHAPE 0 0 * w=5967,h=7116

DEF_SHAPE 105 shape105 RECTANGLE 649 658 1782 2034 1 solid unfilled RECTANGLE 1708 1435 1468 3469 1 solid unfilled RECTANGLE 1612 60 1324 1197 1 solid unfilled RECTANGLE 866 60 1180 2034 1 solid unfilled RECTANGLE 1058 957 1709 748 1 solid unfilled RECTANGLE 168 1675 2720 1764 1 solid unfilled RECTANGLE 1155 2960 1396 1376 1 solid unfilled RECTANGLE 0 0 1276 390 1 solid unfilled RECTANGLE 529 0 723 2393 1 solid unfilled END_SHAPE 0 0 * w=3176,h=4904

Figure C-1. Sample Shape Library Source File

NT-0090 (Rev 1) C-4 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C C-3. ARC

C-3. ARC

The ARC keyword is only valid within a DEF_SHAPE/END_SHAPE pair of keywords. Note that this differs from the standard graphic ARC command syntax because it does not support line or ﬁll pattern conditionals or relative coordinates.

Syntax

ARC x y w h angle1 angle2 lw lp fp

where:

x, y = Virtual coordinates of upper left corner of rectangle around circle/ellipse on which the arc lies. X and y are relative to the upper left corner of the shape’s outlining rectangle. Valid range = -32,767 through 32,767. w = Virtual width of rectangle around circle/ellipse on which the arc lies. Valid range = 1 through 32,767. h = Virtual height of rectangle around circle/ellipse on which the arc lies. Valid range = 1 through 32,767. angle1 = Start angle of arc in degrees. Valid range = -360 through 360. angle2 = Arc angle in degrees. Valid range = -360 through 360. lw= Line widthindex. Valid range = 1 through 16. See Section 4 for more information on the line widths. lp = ASCII line pattern name. See Section 4 for information on setting line patterns. See Appendix A for information on creating line patterns. fp = ASCII fill pattern name. See Section 4 for information on setting fill patterns. See Appendix A for information on creating fill patterns.

Example

ARC 0 627 2358 2930 257 -225 1 solid unfilled

11/01 C-5 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C C-4. DEF_SHAPE

C-4. DEF_SHAPE

The DEF_SHAPE keyword marks the beginning of a shape and must proceed the LINE, POLYGON, ARC, DOT, ELLIPSE, and/or RECTANGLE keywords. This keyword works in conjunction with END_SHAPE to deﬁne a shape. There is no limit to the number of shape elements allowed within a DEF_SHAPE/ END_SHAPE pair.

Syntax

DEF_SHAPE shape_number shape_name

where:

shape_number = Number associated with shape. Valid range = 0 through 249. shape_name = ASCII shape name. See Section 6 for more information on defining shape names.

Example

DEF_SHAPE 93 shape93

NT-0090 (Rev 1) C-6 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C C-5. DOT

C-5. DOT

The DOT keyword is only valid within a DEF_SHAPE/END_SHAPE pair of keywords.

Syntax

DOT x y size

where:

x, y = Virtual coordinates of the center of the dot relative to the upper left corner of the shape’s outlining rectangle. Valid range = 0 through 16,383. size = Small, medium, or large.

Example

DOT 12 196 small

11/01 C-7 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C C-6. ELLIPSE

C-6. ELLIPSE

The ELLIPSE keyword is only valid within a DEF_SHAPE/END_SHAPE pair of keywords. This keyword is used for both ellipses and circles. There is no CIRCLE keyword. Note that this differs from the standard graphic ELLIPSE command syntax because it does not support line or ﬁll pattern conditionals or relative coordinates.

Syntax

ELLIPSE x y horz_radius vert_radius lw lp fp

where:

x, y = Virtual coordinates of the center of the circle/ellipse. X and y are relative to the upper left corner of the shape’s outlining rectangle. Valid range = 0 through 16,383. horz_radius = Virtual horizontal radius of the ellipse/circle. Valid range = (hr > 0, x + hr <= 16,383, x - hr >= 0) vert_radius = Virtual vertical radius of ellipse/circle. Valid range = (hr > 0, x + hr <= 16,383, x - hr >= 0) lw= Line width index. Valid range = 1 through 16. See Section 4 for more information on the line widths. lp = ASCII line pattern name. See Section 4 for information on setting line patterns. See Appendix A for information on creating line patterns. fp = ASCII fill pattern name. See Section 4 for information on setting fill patterns. See Appendix A for information on creating fill patterns.

Example

ELLIPSE 0 627 523 1141 1 solid unfilled

NT-0090 (Rev 1) C-8 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C C-7. END_SHAPE

C-7. END_SHAPE

The END_SHAPE keyword completes a single shape. There must be an associated DEF_SHAPE command before it, plus at least one shape element within the DEF_SHAPE/END_SHAPE pair. The shape element keywords are LINE, ARC, DOT, ELLIPSE, POLYGON, and RECTANGLE. There is no limit to the number of shape elements allowed within a DEF_SHAPE/END_SHAPE pair.

Syntax

END_SHAPE xorigin yorigin

where:

xorigin = x coordinate of the shape origin. The shape origin is required to be within the shape, so the range for the origin is 0 through shape_width-1. This value is specified in virtual coordinates. The shape_width is internally calculated. yorigin = y coordinate of the shape origin. The shape origin is required to be within the shape, so the range for the origin is 0 through shape_height-1. This value is specified in virtual coordinates. The shape_height is internally calculated.

Example

END_SHAPE 0 0

11/01 C-9 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C C-8. LINE

C-8. LINE

The LINE keyword is only valid within a DEF_SHAPE/END_SHAPE pair of keywords. Note that this differs from the standard graphic LINE command syntax because it includes the count of x, y pairs, and line pattern conditionals and relative coordinates are not supported.

Syntax

LINE n x1 y1 x2 y2 ... xn yn lw lp

where:

n = Number of x, y pairs comprising the line. Valid range = 2 through 255. xn yn = x, y virtual coordinate pair relative to the upper left corner of shape’s outlining rectangle. Valid range = 0 through 16,383. lw= Line widthindex. Valid range = 1 through 16. See Section 4 for more information on the line widths. lp = ASCII line pattern name. See Section 4 for information on setting line patterns. See Appendix A for information on creating line patterns.

Example

LINE 5 3440 0 5461 598 2911 1016 5413 1614 4162 2182 1 solid

NT-0090 (Rev 1) C-10 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C C-9. POLYGON

C-9. POLYGON

The POLYGON keyword is only valid within a DEF_SHAPE/END_SHAPE pair of keywords. Note that this differs from the standard graphic POLYGON command syntax because it includes the count of x, y pairs, and line/ﬁll pattern conditionals and relative coordinates are not supported.

Syntax

POLYGON n x1 y1 x2 y2 ... xn yn lw lp fp

where:

n = Number of x, y pairs comprising the polygon. Valid range = 3 through 255. xn yn = x, y virtual coordinate pair relative to the upper left corner of the shape’s outlining rectangle. Valid range = 0 through 16,383. lw= Line widthindex. Valid range = 1 through 16. See Section 4 for more information on the line widths. lp = ASCII line pattern name. See Section 4 for information on setting line patterns. See Appendix A for information on creating line patterns. fp = ASCII fill pattern name. See Section 4 for information on setting fill patterns. See Appendix A for information on creating fill patterns.

Example

POLYGON 5 698 6816 1660 4065 2286 6995 313 4604 3128 5680 1 solid unfilled

11/01 C-11 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C C-10. RECTANGLE

C-10. RECTANGLE

The RECTANGLE keyword is only valid within a DEF_SHAPE/END_SHAPE pair of keywords. Note that this differs from the standard graphic RECTANGLE command syntax because it does not support line or ﬁll pattern conditionals and relative coordinates.

Syntax

RECTANGLE x y w h lw lp fp

where:

x, y = Virtual coordinates of the upper left corner of the rectangle. X and y are relative to the upper left corner of the shape’s outlining rectangle. Valid range = 0 through 16,383. w= Virtual width of the rectangle. Valid range = 1 through 16,383. h = Virtual height of the rectangle. Valid range = 1 through 16,383. lw= Line width index. Valid range = 1 throughSection 16. 4 for See more information on the line width array. lp = ASCII line pattern name. See Section 4 for information on setting line patterns. See Appendix A for information on creating line patterns. fp = ASCII fill pattern name. See Section 4 for information on setting fill patterns. See Appendix A for information on creating fill patterns.

Example

RECTANGLE 3753 4245 2214 2871 1 solid unfilled

NT-0090 (Rev 1) C-12 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C C-11. SHAPELIB

C-11. SHAPELIB

SHAPELIB must be the first keyword in the file. It can only be used once in the file. It has no arguments.

Syntax

SHAPELIB

Example

SHAPELIB

11/01 C-13 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C C-12. Source File Errors

C-12. Source File Errors

GBNT cancels on the ﬁrst error found when loading the source version of the Shape Library. There is a strict format for all error messages. All messages consist of four lines and are sent to a notice window.

The first line states that an error occurred while loading the shape library file. The second line gives the full path name of the file. The fourth line states that program execution has been canceled.

The third line describes the error. There are two possible formats for the second line. One format is used if an error was generated as a result of an erroneous piece of data in the ﬁle. The other format is used for all other errors. The two formats for error messages are:

A. Error while loading Shape Library; ﬁle: shapelib_source_ﬁle_name Line N ASCII_descript Execution aborted!

B. Error while loading Shape Library; ﬁle: shapelib_source_ﬁle_name Line N, token M ASCII_descript Execution aborted!

where:

shapelib_source_file_name = Full path name of the source version of the Shape Library file. N = Source file line number. M = Token number on line N (tokens are delimited by quotes or spaces). ASCII_descript = ASCII description of error. bad_data = ASCII token causing the error on line N.

The following examples illustrate the two formats:

A. “Line 10 Out-of-memory!”

B. “Line 10, token 1 Shape name too long; max=10 chars ”

In example b, is the erroneous piece of data in the ﬁle, and the token number is 1.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) C-14 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C C-12. Source File Errors

Table C-1 lists the possible errors that could be detected when loading the Shape Library source (an “a” or “b” indicates the format of the error).

Table C-1. Source File Error Messages Error Format Error Description a “File read error” System error. b “Shape name too long; The name of the shape is too long. The shape max = 10 chars” can only be, at most, 10 characters long. See Section 6 for more information on creating shapes. b “Invalid character in shape An invalid shape name was found in the file. name; expecting {0-9, a-z, See Section 6 for more information. A-Z, -, _}” b “Shape name already used” A duplicate shape name was found in the file. b “Invalid line pattern” An invalid line pattern was found in the file. See Section 4 and Appendix A for more information on line patterns. b “Invalid fill pattern” An invalid fill pattern was found in the file. See Section 4 and Appendix A for more information on line patterns. a “EOF reached; %s arg %d End of file was reached. expected”, string, int1 b “Integer in range %d..%d An invalid integer was found in the file. expected”, int1, int2 b “Shape number already used” A duplicate shape number was found in the file. a “Out-of-memory!” System error. b “END_SHAPE for last shape END_SHAPE completes a single shape. It must precede this keyword” must be the last keyword when defining a shape. It must be entered before a newshape is defined (with DEF_SHAPE). b “Invalid dot width; expecting Dot sizes are small, medium, and large. {small, medium, large}” a “Can't open file for read” User may not have permission on the file.

11/01 C-15 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C C-12. Source File Errors

Table C-1. Source File Error Messages (Cont’d) Error Format Error Description a “Line too long; max=132 An invalid line length was found in the file. chars” b “Keyword cannot occur SHAPELIB can only be used once in the file. twice in file” b “SHAPELIB keyword must SHAPELIB must precede the DEF_SHAPE precede this keyword” keyword. b “DEF_SHAPE keyword DEF_SHAPE marks the beginning of a shape must precede this keyword” and must proceed the LINE, POLYGON, ARC, DOT, ELLIPSE, and RECTANGLE keywords. b “Invalid keyword” An invalid keyword was found in the file. b “Unexpected data on line” Invalid data was found on in the file. See reference pages for information on valid shape data. a “Empty DEF_SHAPE/ At lease one shape element must be defined END_SHAPE pair (that is, within the DEF_SHAPE/END_SHAPE pair. no shape)” a “EOF reached; END_SHAPE was not found at the end of the END_SHAPE expected” file.

An error is generated at program startup if the “-S” option is used when running GBNT and there is no read access on the source format ﬁle.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) C-16 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C Appendix D. Importing Graphics

D-1. Overview

Graphics and the associated support files (shapes, custom fill patterns, macros, diagram background bitmap files, custom line patterns, custom colors, and the bitmap font sizes) are imported into the Ovation NT Developer Studio via the Import Graphics function. In addition, this program can replace point names within macro/graphics being imported given a user-specified point name replacement file as input.

This program is required when a user builds graphics ofﬂine and then wishes to move the graphics into the Developer Studio.

11/01 D-1 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C D-2. Before Getting Started

D-2. Before Getting Started

Before importing, the user will have to know where the required files exist on the system. If the required files for import are not accessible from the computer being worked on, the user will have to copy the required files to a floppy disk or CD. If all of the files do not fit on a single floppy, multiple floppies or a CD must be used. • To import colors, custom line/fill patterns, bitmap font point sizes, and/or diagram background pixmap files, the location of the custom files folder for the NT platform is $[InstallationPath]\mmi\graphics\cstfiles. For the UNIX platform, the folder is defined by $(WDPF_CSTDIR). • To import the Shape Library from the NT platform, the location of the file is $[InstallationPath]\mmi\graphics\cstfiles\shapelib.src. For the UNIX platform, the name of the Shape Library source file is the same as $(WDPF_SHAPE_LIB), except that the “.diag” file extension must be changed to “.src”. • To import macros from the NT platform, the source version of the macro is in folder $[InstallationPath]\mmi\graphics\macros. For the UNIX platform, the folder is defined by $(WDPF_MACRODIR). • To import graphics, the user must know the location of the .src versions.

Note

After macros or graphics are imported, they will be compiled immediately.

• To perform a global point name replacement on all of the macros and graphics imported, the user must create a text point name replacement file. This file contains a list of old/new point name pairs — one pair per line. The old/new point names should both be fully qualified and should be separated by spaces or tabs (no commas or comments in the file). The old point name proceeds the new on each line of the file. The user may choose the location and name of this file.

Also before importing, the user must decide how to handle potential overwrite problems. A potential overwrite problem can occur when something that is being imported already exists in the Developer Studio, but is different than what is being imported. An example would be if macro1000.src is being imported, and macro1000.src already exists in the Developer Studio but is different.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) D-2 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C D-2. Before Getting Started

The user has three choices:

1. Always skip the items (do not overwrite/import).

2. Always import/overwrite the items.

3. Prompt the user for each item.

The default is #1 (always skip the items — do not import/overwrite). The recommendation is that you always import initially with this option. Once data is imported and overwritten in the Developer Studio environment, there is no way to undo it and restore what was overwritten.

After the initial import, check the output listing for items that were skipped. Then, if any items were skipped because of potential overwrite problems, the user can determine how to handle each instance separately. Be sure that it is valid to overwrite existing ﬁles before instructing the system to do so. When it is determined whether or not it is valid to overwrite existing data, run the Import program again and select either option #2 or #3.

11/01 D-3 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C D-3. Accessing the Import Graphics Window

D-3. Accessing the Import Graphics Window

To access the Import Graphics function, follow the steps below:

1. At the Ovation NT Developer Studio, highlight the Graphics folder under the System tree.

2. Pull down the Operation menu, and select the Import menu item.

The Import Graphics window displays (Figure D-1).

Figure D-1. Import Graphics Window

The Import Graphics window is used to import all graphics and the support ﬁles into the database.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) D-4 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C D-4. Importing All or Part of a Graphics System

D-4. Importing All or Part of a Graphics System

Follow the procedures below to import all or part of a graphics system. To import an entire graphics system, all entry ﬁelds must be completed. To import part of the system, only enter the applicable information.

1. Make sure that the location of the required files is known and that they are accessible from the computer being worked on. To import an entire system, the required files are: colors.txt, line_patterns.txt, fill_patterns.txt, and the associated fill pattern .bmp files, fonts.txt, any diagram background bitmap files (*.bmp), the shape library source file, macro source files, and the graphic source files.

2. Access the Import Graphics window (see Section D-3).

3. Pull down the overwrite menu at the top of the window and select how to handle potential overwrite problems (see Section D-2).

11/01 D-5 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C D-4. Importing All or Part of a Graphics System

4. In the Cstfiles folder entry field, type the folder name where your colors.txt, line_patterns.txt, fill_patterns.txt, *.bmp, and fonts.txt files exist.

Press the Browse button (an example Browse window appears below). Select the folder on the popup window and press OK.

Figure D-1. Example Browse Window

5. In the Shape Library file entry field, type the full path file name of the shape library source file.

Press the Browse button. Select the shape library ﬁle on the popup window, and press OK.

6. In the Macros folder entry ﬁeld, type the folder name where your macro source ﬁles exist.

Press the Browse button. Select the folder on the popup window and press OK.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) D-6 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C D-4. Importing All or Part of a Graphics System

Note

Remember that any associated macro preview .bmp files and/or macro.notes files must also be in the same directory as the macro.src files to be imported. The Import Graphics program will automatically import these files if they exist.

7. In the groupbox, labeled Graphics, pull down the specify by menu. The choices are: • folder name -- all files ending in “.src” will be imported. This included macro source files. • full path source file names • batch file of full path filenames The entry field label changes accordingly per the selection made.

Press the Browse button. Select the directory/ﬁle(s) from a popup window and press OK.

8. In order to replace point names in the graphics being imported, the user must create a ﬁle of old/new point names. Enter the full path name in the Global Pt Name Replacement File entry ﬁeld.

Press the Browse button. Select a file from the popup window and press OK. This text file should contain a list of old/newpoint name pairs (1 pair per line). The old/newpoint names should both be fully qualified and should be separated by spaces or tabs (no commas or comments in the file). The old point name proceeds the newon each line of the file. The name and location of the file are user-defined.

9. Press the Import button to start the import.

When the import begins, a status window displays showing the import processing messages. The same output displayed on the popup window is also written to the list file specified in the Output list file entry field. The output file name is “import_graphics_output.txt”. The output file path is the temporary files folder on the local machine (typically this is “C:\temp”).

11/01 D-7 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C D-4. Importing All or Part of a Graphics System

When importing, if one or more imports have been done prior to this one from the current Import window, the user will be prompted to append to the existing output file, overwrite the existing output file, or cancel. This option is provided in the event that the user is importing in steps or from multiple floppies and wants a single list file for the overall import process. In such an event, select the append option. The import processing messages will be appended to the output window and also to the output file.

If an item is skipped, a brief explanation is given. Items that already exist in the database and are exactly the same as what is to be imported are not imported and do not show up in the output window or the output list ﬁle. The count of such items, however, is displayed in the ﬁnal message as “# already existed”.

When the import completes, if any macros/graphics were imported, GBNT is invoked to compile or replace and compile the graphics. GBNT will display its own output window. When the compile or replace and compile is complete, GBNT exits. However, all output displayed on GBNT’s output window is copied to the Import Graphics output window.

10. After importing, press the Exit button on the Import Graphics window.

NT-0090 (Rev 1) D-8 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C Index

Symbols B $ offsets 2-14 Background draw items 4-4, 4-5, 4-30 $COLORn macro parameters 4-110 Bar draw item 4-55 $CONSTn macro parameters 4-109 Bar window 4-55 $D pointers 2-17 Bitmap (.bmp) files A-18 $DN macro parameters 4-106 Bitmap text 4-17, 4-19 $G pointers 2-15 Bitmap_over text 4-17, 4-19 $H pointers 2-16 Blink 4-28 $O pointers 2-18 Blink window 4-28 $OL_COLORn macro parameters 4-110 Blocks (Source Editor) 7-20 $P pointers 2-14 Bottom justification alignment 5-58 $SETn macro parameters 4-107 Browse for Folder window D-6 $STATUSn macro parameters 4-110 Browse OPC Points 3-41 $Tn macro parameters 4-107 Browse OPC Pts window 3-42 $W pointers 2-16 (*.bmp) files A-2, A-18 C Center (x and y) alignment 5-44 A Center (x only) alignment 5-47 Absolute virtual coordinates 2-3 Center (y only) alignment 5-53 Adding a vertex 5-27 Changing a shape’s origin 6-11 Adding lines in a source editor command Changing attributes 5-21 7-15 Changing Place 4-6 Adding new source editor commands 7-11 Circle draw item 4-40 Align Origin x alignment 5-60 Color Attributes 4-7 Align Origin y alignment 5-60 Color window 4-8 Align x coordinate of a vertex 5-32 Colors 4-7 Align y coordinate of a vertex 5-34 custom A-3 Align/Equi-space toolbar 2-43 colors.txt A-2, A-3 Aligning items/groups 5-43 Commenting/Uncommenting commands align origin x 5-60 7-23 align origin y 5-60 Compare Online/Offline GBNT 2-22 bottom justification 5-58 Compilation Output window 3-14 center (x and y) 5-44 Compile function (online/offline) 2-31 center (x only) 5-47 Compile window 3-12 center (y only) 5-53 Compiling commands (Source Editor) 7-8 left justification 5-49 Compiling graphics 3-11 right justification 5-51 online vs offline 2-31 top justification 5-56 Conditional Word Wrap 3-54 Append mode 7-19 Control (23) poke field 4-134 Application (9) poke field 4-132 Coordinate Display 3-37 Arc draw item 4-32 Coordinates 2-3 Attributes menu 5-21 screen 2-3 Attributes window (Paint program) A-9 Virtual 2-3 AutoSave 3-52 Copy function 5-16 AutoSave Frequency 3-53 See also Duplicates function AutoSave Frequency window 3-53 Copying blocks (Source Editor) 7-32

11/01 Index-1 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C Index

Copying commands (Source Editor) 7-29 Displaying attributes 5-20 Creating a new graphic 3-4 See Properties function online vs offline 2-23 Docked toolbar 2-41 Creating macros 4-111 Dot draw item 4-46 Creating shapes 6-4 Dot window 4-46 Creating source editor commands 7-10 Drag/Draw Constraint 3-48 cstfiles A-2 Drag/Handle Color window 3-36 Ctrl + left-click 5-2 Drawitems (background, foreground, trigger) Current line/command (Source Editor) 7-9 4-30 custom bitmaps A-18 arc 4-32 custom colors A-3 bar 4-55 Custom files A-2 circle 4-40 *.bmp A-18 date 4-77 colors.txt A-3 dot 4-46 fill_patterns.txt A-6 dynamic line/polygon 4-67 fonts.txt A-5 ellipse 4-41 Import Graphics program D-2 line 4-36 line_patterns.txt A-12 macro 4-102 custom fill patterns A-6 ol cylinder 4-52 custom line patterns A-12 ol gauge 4-49 Custom Zoom window (Paint program) A-10 ol rectangle 4-47 plot 4-58 D point group text 4-80 Database Support (online/offline) 2-22 polygon 4-42 Date draw item 4-77 process point 4-83 Date window 4-77 rectangle 4-45 Defining Place 4-4 rubberband line 4-39 Deleting a vertex 5-30 rubberband line/arc 4-35 Deleting blocks (Source Editor) 7-22 shape 4-98 Deleting characters (Source Editor) 7-22 text 4-88 Deleting commands (Source Editor) 7-21 time 4-75 Deleting items/groups 5-15 trend 4-72 Deleting line patterns A-16 xy plot 4-62 Deleting lines (Source Editor) 7-21 Draw items (diagram) Deleting shapes 6-13 macro 4-102 Deselecting items/groups 5-4 Draw items (keyboard) Diagram Background Bitmaps entry field 4-138 creating custom A-18 function key 4-164 Diagram Configuration 3-16 macro 4-102 Diagram Configuration window 3-16 ol button 4-155 Diagram draw items 4-102 ol check box 4-145 Diagram naming 3-8 ol choice 4-150 Diagram/Group (2) poke field 4-126 ol event menu 4-160 Displaying a graphic 3-4 ol slider 4-141 poke field 4-123

NT-0090 (Rev 1) Index-2 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C Index

Draw toolbar 2-43 deleting commands 7-21 Drawing Attributes deleting lines 7-21 Blink 4-28 find/replace 7-36 Color 4-7 insert mode 7-19 Fill 4-23 moving blocks (after) 7-28 Font 4-17 moving blocks (before) 7-27 Line Patterns 4-24 moving commands (after) 7-26 Line Width 4-26 moving commands (before) 7-24 Place 4-4 replace mode 7-19 Toolbar elements 4-2 undo 7-22 Drawing Attributes toolbar 2-44, 4-2 Edit toolbar 2-44 Drawing graphics Editing drawing attributes 5-20 See Section 4 See also Properties function Dummy Point List window 3-50 See also Setting drawing attributes Dummy points 2-13, 3-50 Editing graphics Duplicates function 5-17 See Section 5 See also Copy function Editing line patterns A-16 Dynamic Line/Polygon draw item 4-67 Editing macros 4-111 Dynamic Line/Polygon window 4-68 Editing shapes 6-9 Editing source editor commands 7-10, 7-19 E Editing vertices 5-22 Edit menu (Main GBNT window) 2-36 Ellipse draw item 4-41 Copy 5-16 Entry Field draw item 4-138 Delete 5-15 Entry Field window 4-138 Duplicates 5-17 Equi-space items/groups 5-43 Group 5-7 Equi-space window 5-62 Object-to-object snap 5-73 Equi-spacing Paste 5-16 horizontal spacing 5-61 Properties 5-20 vertical spacing 5-66 Snap to Grid option 5-41 Exiting Undo 5-42 GBNT application 3-14 Ungroup function 5-8 object snap mode 5-75 Vertex Edit 5-23 vertex edit mode 5-40 Edit menu (Source Editor) 7-4 adding commands (after) 7-13 F adding commands (before) 7-11 File menu (Main GBNT window) 2-35, 3-3 adding lines (after) 7-17 Compile function 3-11 adding lines (before) 7-15 New function 3-4 append mode 7-19 Open function 3-4 commenting/uncommenting 7-23 Print function 3-9 copying blocks (after) 7-33 Restore original diagram 3-11 copying blocks (before) 7-32 Save function 3-6 copying commands (after) 7-31 File menu (Source Editor) 7-4 copying commands (before) 7-30 printing 7-34 defining blocks 7-20 Fill Attributes 4-23 deleting blocks 7-22 Fill Pattern window 4-23 deleting characters 7-22 fill_patterns.txt A-2, A-6

11/01 Index-3 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C Index

Find/Replace function 7-36 Commenting/Uncommenting 7-23 Find/Replace window 7-36 Compiling lines and commands 7-8 Floating toolbar 2-41 Copying blocks 7-32 Font Attributes 4-17 Copying commands 7-29 Bitmap/Bitmap_Over text 4-19 Define current line and command 7-9 Vector/Vector_Over text 4-20 Defining blocks 7-20 Font Sizes A-5 Deleting blocks 7-22 fonts.txt 4-17, A-2, A-5 Deleting characters 7-22 Forcing horizontal vertex movement 5-39 Deleting commands 7-21 Forcing vertical vertex movement 5-39 Deleting lines in a command 7-21 Foreground draw items 4-4, 4-5, 4-30 Edit menu 7-4 Frequently Asked Questions (FAQ) B-2 Editing commands 7-19 Function Key draw item 4-164 File menu 7-4 Function Key window 4-165 Find/Replace function 7-36 Insert mode 7-19 G Keyboard shortcuts 7-7 GBNT introduction 1-1, 2-33 Moving blocks 7-27 GBNT Main window 2-34 Moving commands 7-24 Generic Text Editor 3-22 Overview 7-2 TextEdit 3-22 Printing 7-34 Grid 3-37 Pull-down menu panel 7-4 Snap 3-38 Replace mode 7-19 Grid Options 3-39 Selecting lines and commands 7-8 Grid Options window 3-39 Terms 7-8 Grouping items 5-7 Toolbar 7-6 Undo 7-22 H View menu 7-5 Handle/Drag Color 3-35 Integrated Source Editor window 7-3 Help 2-49 Invert/Rotate toolbar 2-44, 5-14 Help (20) poke field 4-133 Inverting items/groups 5-14 Horizontal Origin Justification 5-60 Horizontal spacing 5-61 J Jog mode 5-9 I Import Graphics window D-4 K accessing D-4 Keyboard draw items 4-5, 4-122 Importing graphics D-1 Keyboard Repaint Order 3-35 all or part of a system D-5 Keyboard shortcuts (Main GBNT window) overview D-2 2-46 Insert mode (Source Editor) 7-19 Edit menu 2-46 Insert New Diagrams window (Developer File menu 2-46 Studio) 2-26 Options menu 2-48 Integrated Source Editor 3-22, 7-1 View menu 2-47 Adding lines in a command 7-15 Keyboard shortcuts (Source Editor) 7-7 Adding new commands 7-11 Edit menu 7-7 Append mode 7-19 File menu 7-7 View menu 7-8

NT-0090 (Rev 1) Index-4 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C Index

L Pull-down menu panel 2-35 Ladder (6) poke field 4-128 Toolbars 2-41 Left justification alignment 5-49 View menu 2-38, 3-15 Licensing 2-10 Main toolbar 2-42 Line draw item 4-36 Moving a vertex 5-27 Line Patterns 4-24 Moving blocks (Source Editor) 7-27 creating A-13 Moving commands (Source Editor) 7-24 custom A-12 Moving items/groups 5-9 deleting A-16 Multi-draw mode 3-49 editing A-16 exiting edit mode A-17 N Line patterns out for edit A-15 Naming macros 4-102 Line Patterns window 4-25 New Diagrams window (Developer Studio) Line Patterns window (out for edit) A-15 2-27 Line Width 4-26 New function 3-4 Line Widths window 4-27 See creating a new graphic line_patterns.txt A-2, A-12 New function (online/offline) 2-23 NT font mapper 4-18, B-4 M NT Paint program A-7 Macro draw item 4-102 Macro Notes & Parameter Descriptions 3-55, O 4-118 Object (.diag) files 1-1 Macro Notes & Parameter Descriptions Object Snap menu 5-71 window 4-119 Object Snap mode 5-71 Macro tagout parameters 4-105 exiting 5-75 color ($COLORn) 4-110 undo 5-75 color ($OL_COLORn) 4-110 Object-to-object snap 5-70 constants ($CONSTn) 4-109 Offline GBNT process point ($Dn) 4-106 Compile function 2-31, 3-11 set number ($SETn) 4-107 Database support 2-22 status word ($STATUSn) 4-110 Importing Graphics D-1 text string ($Tn) 4-107 New function 2-23, 3-4 Macro window 4-112 Open function 2-28, 3-4 Macros Save functions 2-32, 3-6 creating and editing 4-111 OL Button draw item 4-155 naming 4-102 OL Button window 4-156 overview 4-102 OL Check Box 4-145 rules 4-104 OL Check Box window 4-146 tagging parameters for substitution 4-105 OL Choice draw item 4-150 Main Commands OL Choice window 4-151 FUNC_KEY 4-164 OL Cylinder draw item 4-52 Main GBNT window 2-34 OL Cylinder window 4-52 Edit menu 2-36 OL Event Menu draw item 4-160 File menu 2-35, 3-3 OL Event Menu window 4-161 Keyboard shortcuts 2-46 OL Gauge draw item 4-49 Options menu 2-39, 3-45 OL Gauge window 4-49

11/01 Index-5 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C Index

OL Rectangle draw item 4-47 P OL Rectangle window 4-47 Paint Program A-7 OL Slider draw item 4-141 Paint window A-8 OL Slider window 4-142 Paste function 5-16 Online GBNT Place 4-4 Compile function 2-31 Background, Foreground, Trigger draw Database support 2-22 items 4-4, 4-5 Importing Graphics D-1 Changing 4-6 New function 2-23 Keyboard draw items 4-5 OPC Point Browser Support 2-23 Line # 4-6 Open function 2-28 Options 4-4 Save As window 2-32 Plot draw item 4-58 Save functions 2-32 Plot window 4-58 Online Help 2-49 Point Group Text draw item 4-80 menu icons 2-54 Point names 2-11 search methods 2-51 Point types with record fields 2-18 Online vs Offline GBNT 2-22 Pointers 2-14 OPC Point Browser Support (online/offline) Poke Field draw item 4-123 2-23 application (9) 4-132 OPC points 2-20 control (23) 4-134 Open function (online/offline) 2-28 diagram/group (2) 4-126 Open menu item (Main window) 3-4 help (20) 4-133 Open window 3-5 ladder (6) 4-128 Opening a graphic 3-4 options (7) 4-128 online vs offline 2-28 process point (0) 4-125 Options (7) poke field 4-128 program (3) 4-127 Options menu (Main GBNT window) 2-39, window (8) 4-131 3-45 Poke window 4-123 AutoSave 3-52 Polygon draw item 4-42 AutoSave Frequency 3-53 Print Setup window 3-10, 7-34 Conditional Word Wrap 3-54 Printing (Main GBNT window) 3-9 Drag/Draw Constraint 3-48 Printing a graphic 3-9 Macro Notes & Param Desc 3-55 Printing the source file 7-34 Multi-draw mode 3-49 Process Point (0) poke field 4-125 Resize Aspect Ratio 3-46 Process Point draw item 4-83 Resize Pin Point 3-46 Process point names 2-11 Resize Scale Factors 3-46 Process Point window 4-84 Undefined Description Warnings (for Program (3) poke field 4-127 macros) 3-55 Properties function 5-20 Undefined Points 3-50 See also Conditional Word Wrap Undefined Points Warning 3-52 Pt Group Text window 4-80 Origin 2-6 Pull-down menu panel (Integrated Source Origins (by draw item) 2-7 Editor) 7-4 Outlining rectangle 2-2 Pull-down menu panel (Main GBNT window) Ovation NT Developer Studio window 2-24 2-35 Overstrike option (font types) 4-18

NT-0090 (Rev 1) Index-6 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C Index

R creating 6-4 Record fields 2-11 deleting shapes 6-13 with associated point types 2-18 editing shapes 6-9 Rectangle draw item 4-45 object version 6-2 Reference documents 1-3 out for edit 6-5 Relative virtual coordinates 2-3 renaming a shape 6-10 rules 2-5 -S command 6-3 Renaming a shape 6-10 source version 6-2 Replace mode 7-19 Shape Library Source File C-1 Resize Aspect Ratio 3-46 ARC C-5 Resize Pin Point 3-46 DEF_SHAPE C-6 Resize Scale Factors 3-46 DOT C-7 Resize toolbar 2-45 ELLIPSE C-8 Resizing items/groups 5-11 END_SHAPE C-9 Resizing items/groups by a factor 5-13 Error messages C-14 Restore original diagram 3-11 Format C-3 Right justification alignment 5-51 LINE C-10 Rotating items/groups 5-14 POLYGON C-11 Rubberband Line draw item 4-39 RECTANGLE C-12 Rubberband Line/Arc draw item 4-35 Sample C-4 Rules for macros 4-104 SHAPELIB C-13 Shape Library window 4-99, 6-4 S out for edit 6-5 Save As window 3-7 Snap 3-38 Save Defaults 3-41 Snap to Grid option 5-41 Save function (online/offline) 2-32 Snapping one object to another 5-73 Saving a graphic 3-6 Snapping one vertex to another 5-36 online vs offline 2-32 Source (.src) files 1-1 Scale Factors window 3-47, 5-13 Source Editor Screen coordinates 2-3 See Integrated Source Editor Selecting items/groups 5-3 Selecting lines/commands (Source Editor) T 7-8 Tagging macro parameters for substitution Selecting overlaid items 5-7 4-105 Setting blink 4-28 Target item (for vertex edit) 5-25 Setting color 4-7 Terms 2-2 Setting drawing attributes 4-2 for Source Editor 7-8 See also Custom files Text draw item 4-88 See also Editing drawing attributes groups 4-95 Setting Fill Attributes 4-23 multiple text 4-92 Setting Font Attributes 4-17 single text 4-89 Setting Line Patterns 4-24 Text Editors Setting Line Width 4-26 Generic 3-22 Shape draw item 4-98 Integrated Source 7-2 Shape Library 6-1 Text window (groups) 4-95 changing origin 6-11 Text window (multiple) 4-92

11/01 Index-7 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C Index

Text window (single) 4-89 selecting a new item 5-25 TextEdit 3-22 selecting a new target item 5-27 Differences with Integrated Source 3-24 snapping one vertex to another 5-36 Time draw item 4-75 target item 5-25 Time window 4-75 undo 5-39 Toolbar (Source Editor) 7-6 Vertex Edit menu 5-28 Toolbars 2-41, 2-42, 3-16 Vertex edit mode 5-22 Align/Equi-space 2-43 Vertical Origin Justification 5-60 Draw 2-43 Vertical Spacing 5-66 Drawing Attributes 2-44, 4-2 View menu (Main GBNT window) 2-38, 3-15 Edit 2-44 Browse OPC Pts 3-41 Invert/Rotate 2-44, 5-14 Coordinate Display 3-37 Main 2-42 Diagram Configuration 3-16 Resize 2-45 Generic Text Editor 3-22 Zoom 2-45 Grid 3-37 Top justification alignment 5-56 Grid Options 3-39 Trend draw item 4-72 Handle/Drag Color 3-35 Trend window 4-72 Integrated Source Editor 3-21, 7-10 Trigger draw items 4-4, 4-5, 4-30 Keyboard Repaint Order 3-35 Troubleshooting B-1 Save Defaults 3-41 Shape Library 3-25, 6-4 U Toolbars 3-16 Undefined Description Warning 4-121 Zoom 3-26 Undefined Description Warnings (for macros) View menu (Source Editor) 7-5 3-55 Virtual coordinates 2-3 Undefined Points 3-50 absolute 2-3 Undefined Points Warning 3-52 relative 2-3 Undo (Source Editor) 7-22 Undo/Redo W object snap 5-75 Window (8) poke field 4-131 the last edit 5-42 Windows vertex edit 5-39 $COLORn display values 4-12 Ungrouping items 5-8 $OL_COLORn display values 4-15 Attributes (Paint program) A-9 V AutoSave Frequency 3-53 Valid diagram ranges 3-8 Bar 4-55 Valid point names 2-11 Blink 4-28 Valid record field names 2-18 Browse for Folder D-6 Vector text 4-17, 4-20 Browse OPC Pts 3-42 Vector_over text 4-17, 4-20 Color 4-8 Vertex Edit 5-23 Compilation Output 3-14 adding a vertex 5-27 Compile 3-12 align x coordinate 5-32 Custom Zoom (Paint program) A-10 align y coordinate 5-34 Date 4-77 deleting a vertex 5-30 Developer Studio 2-24 exiting 5-40 Diagram Configuration 3-16 forcing horizontal/vertical movement 5-39 Dot 4-46 moving a vertex 5-27 Drag/Handle Color 3-36

NT-0090 (Rev 1) Index-8 11/01 Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C Index

Dummy Point List 3-50 Time 4-75 Dynamic Line/Polygon 4-68 Trend 4-72 Entry Field 4-138 XY Plot 4-62 Equi-space 5-62 Zoom In/Out Factor (%) 3-30 Fill Pattern 4-23 Find/Replace 7-36 X Font Attributes 4-19 XY Plot draw item 4-62 Function Key 4-165 XY Plot window 4-62 Grid Options 3-39 Import Graphics D-4 Y Insert New Diagrams Wizard 2-26 Zoom In/Out Factor (%) window 3-30 Integrated Source Editor 7-3 Zoom menu 3-26 Line Patterns 4-25, A-14 Deﬁne Area 3-33 Line Patterns (out for edit) A-15 Recall 3-31 Line Widths 4-27 Zoom by Box 3-27 Macro 4-112 Zoom by Corners 3-27 Macro Notes & Parameter Descriptions Zoom in 3-29 4-119 Zoom In/Out Factor 3-30 Main GBNT 2-34 Zoom out 3-30 New Diagrams (Developer Studio) 2-27 Zoom to Area 3-34 OL Button 4-156 Zoom toolbar 2-45 OL Check Box 4-146 OL Choice 4-151 OL Cylinder 4-52 OL Event Menu 4-161 OL Gauge 4-49 OL Rectangle 4-47 OL Slider 4-142 Online Help 2-50 OPC Item Browser 3-43 Open 3-5 Paint A-8 Plot 4-58 Poke 4-123 Print Setup 3-10, 7-34 Process Point 4-84 Pt Group Text 4-80 Save As 2-32, 3-7 Scale Factors 3-47, 5-13 Select $COLORn value 4-13 Select $OL_COLORn value 4-16 Select $SETn value 4-116 Shape Library 4-99, 6-4 Shape Library (out for edit) 6-5 Text (groups) 4-95 Text (multiple) 4-92 Text (single) 4-89 TextEdit 3-23

11/01 Index-9 NT-0090 (Rev 1) Westinghouse Process Control, Inc. Proprietary Class 2C